AMD
HENRY IVL STOWELL (EASE
SBXSTCBintCB,, WKiUHOnnff Ik B^KSBC?, K.35, 5
WHITCOMBE AND TOfVIBS LIMITED
*
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
AND
VADE MECUM
BY
HENEY M. STOWELL (HARE HONGI)
CHRISTCHUHCH, WELLINGTON AND DUNEDIN, N.Z. ;
MELBOURNE AND LONDON :
WHITCOMBE AND TOMBS LIMITED
Stack
Annex
AUTHOR'S PREFACE.
As there are already available several hand-books on
the Maori language, including grammars and
vocabularies, it may seem surprising to some that
another should now be added to the list. It cannot
however be denied by scholars, that the efforts of
previous writers are not altogether adequate to the
scientific study of the subject. This remark is not
intended to depreciate the merits of other works, but
is assigned as a reason for the present production. The
mischievous effect due to the exclusion from the Maori
alphabet of wh, has now been rectified. Its omission in
the past has been entirely due to a capricious estimate
of the sounds of Maori. The evils resulting therefrom
are abundantly evident in the mutilated forms of such,
place-names as Whanganui, Whangaehu, Whakatu,
Whakatipu, and many others. The same capricious
estimate has induced more than one writer to declare
that: "A has a slender sound as in cab, — kapiti, — and
a broad sound as in tall, — mama.1' Neither of these
sounds being proper to Maori, both examples are wrong
and their teaching pernicious.
To the writer who urges that the tense of Maori is
unsatisfactory, the mode of comparison freaky, and the
want of a verb substantive very marked, this work gives
a complete answer.
The classification of the pronoun into singular and
plural, as hitherto obtaining, has been set aside; and the
more regular form of singular, dual and triplial
iii A3
iv AUTHOR'S PREFACE
substituted in accordance with the requirements of the
tongue.
The aim of the Author has been to present a succession
of genuine examples of Maori, beginning with the
simplest expressions and passing along by gradual
stages to the most complex; to show the real simplicity
of the tongue, its scope, and at the same time its purity ;
which can be better illustrated by one example than by
many words.
In English we would say : — Having mused awhile with
the object of stirring up the fountain of speech, the
speaker rises, and with his honeyed tongue and well
modulated voice begins an oration. Then is heard the
expressive whisper, the full tones of animated vigour,
and those more tender and pathetic, the apt quotation,
pointed illustration and old-time proverb. From the
nature of his discourse it would almost seem that he had
conversed with the gods of the sky, and that they had
revealed to him the original plan of the creation of the
world, and its evolution from darkness to light, when
the history of man begins. The rapt attention of the
listeners gives silent testimony to their appreciation of
his eloquence.
Here, it will be observed, the noun "speech" is not
repeated in the subsequent clauses, but is represented
by various substitutes — the English language being so
largely made up from borrowed sources.
In Maori we would say : — Kua rapupuku ra nga
mahara o te Kai-korero ki a ko, a, kua tu ake. Titku
tonu mai ai ko td te arero pdrekareka, o te reo maeneene,
paparonaki, a, kua timata rawa taana whai-korero. Ka
rangona i konei fe main a te korero-kdmnhumuJiu, a te
korero-ivahanui, a te korero-whakamihi. Whakahuahua
AUTHOR'S PREFACE v
noa hi td terd kupii-ichakarite, ko toona aronga o te
hanga nei o if kupu-korero, o te korero-whakatau-d-ki
o mua mai. And i nd te dhuatanga o taana tdtai-
korero kita korerorero-tahi tonu rdtou ko ngd atua o te
rangi, a, i kauwhautia tonutia mai e end ki d ia
te ritenga o te oroko-ivhaihangangatanga o te Ao-turoa
nei, ara, te ko-toi-nuku, te ko-t&i-rangi, mai and o te
kunengatanga mai i te hmapountanga tde noa ki te
Ao-mdrama nei, d, timata iho ki kond te korero mo te
hanga nei mo te tangata. Ata whakarongo mdrire ai te
taringa tangata, ko tdau tohu e te korero-wahakore, te
u'hakamate atu ki tend hanga ki te tino-korero, me ka
rangona atu.
Here, it will be observed, the noun is repeated in all
of the subsequent clauses or phrases relating to the
particular idea ; which, while exhibiting the structural
simplicity of the tongue, demonstrates its purity. Here
you have no borrowing from fortuitous sources, but a
tongue at once comprehensive, ample in all required
processes, and proudly self-reliant.
No special reference is made to sub-dialectic variation.
Throughout the length and breadth of New Zealand the
differences are so very slight, never of the least difficulty
to the ordinary native, that they may by courtesy alone
be referred to as sub-dialects. A few examples may be
shown of the most noticeable : —
Mao, rdo, tdo; for, mdua, rdua, tdua.
Whenei, for penei. Teneki, for tenei. Tipuna for
tupuna.
Mdtau for mdtou. Tdtau for tdtou. Rdtau for rdtou.
Hai for hei. Kai for kei. Hoi for liei. Taina for
teina.
vi AUTHOR'S PREFACE
Mahau and mohou for mdau and moou. Awau for
ahau.
Kiahore, kdore and kukore, for kcihore, ekore and kua
kore.
The South Island natives consistently substitute a k
for fl#, as rafci, for rangi; takata for tangata, etc. ; whilst
those of the Bay of Plenty use n for ng, as : tanata, for
tangata, hana for hanga, etc. There are very feeble
indications of pronouncing whenua as fenua; and also
the substitution of a peculiar click for the letter h, as
a'i for afti. However trivial, those are the most pro-
nounced forms of difference and cannot be classed as
dialects.
For dialects of the Maori tongue we must pass to the
consideration of the speech in use at the different island-
centres of Polynesia. These occur within a triangle
running from New Zealand and the Chatham Islands in
a straight line to Easter Island, thence in a straight line
to the Sandwich Islands, thence straight back to New
Zealand. In this triangle we find the Chatham Island
dialect, the Tongan dialect, the Niuean dialect, the
Rarotongan dialect, the Samoan, Tahitian, Marquesan,
Mangarevan, Easter Island (nearly pure Maori), and
Hawaikian.
The islanders in the above-defined region all speak
a dialect of Maori, and an examination will demonstrate
(with the leave of etymologists) that the Maori is the
most pure, the least affected by corruption or phonetic
decay.
It is hoped that the present work will be found to
facilitate the appreciation of this view. By adopting
Maori as a standard and by discussing those of proved
philological affinity as so many dialects, much sound
AUTHOB'S PREFACE vii
progress may be made along the lines of enquiry as to
the original forms of speech.
For the rest, whatever shortcomings may be found
either in the matter or manner of the present work, it
has at least the distinct merit of teaching what it is
proper to learn. Nothing is herein laid down which
will require to be unlearned. If a thorough grounding
in the sounds, elements, and principles of a tongue can
be gained without the assistance of an oral teacher,
those of Maori should be acquired by a proper and
painstaking study of what is here presented.
The work contains, in a very large degree, the know-
ledge proceeding from life-long and assiduous study
under the most favourable conditions. It is the result
of three years close labour, and it is now placed before
an indulgent public with all the confidence to which
the genuineness of its mission may entitle it.
HENRY M. STOWELL,
(Hare Hongi),
Wellington, New Zealand, 1911.
ERRATA.
Page 8— Fourth line from bottom, for Kai pai ai a la read
Kia pai ai a la.
Page 89 — Fifth line from bottom, for Whakamakia read ' ' Not
used. ' '
CONTENTS.
PAGE
Author 's Preface . . . . . . . . . . iii
Diagram . . . . . . . . . . xii
CHAPTEE I.
Alphabetical Tables and Vowel Sounds . . . . 1
On Diphthongs . . . . . . . . . . 6
CHAPTEE II.
On Whaka; Kia — ai; Aliei; Pit; Tonu; Eaica, Wlmka-
haraham, Tino; Ke; Me; E; Tu; Kaua — kei; Kai;
Ano and Hoki; A ; Koa . . . . . . 6
On the Prepositions . . . . . . 14
CHAPTEE in.
On Direction and Directive Particles . . . . 17
On the Mode of Comparison . . . . 19
On the Senses . . . . . . . . 19
On Voice and Speech . . . . . . 20
On Enumeration . . . . . . . . 22
On Measurements . . . . . . 30
CHAPTEE IV.
On the Articles . . . . . . . . 31
On the Noun and Gender . . . . . . 33
CHAPTEE V.
On the Pronouns . . . . . . . . 36
Personal Pronouns . . . . . . 36
Possessive Pronouns . . . . . . 37
Kelative Pronouns . . . . . . 43
Interrogative Pronouns . . . . 43
Demonstrative Pronouns . . . . 45
Distributive Pronouns . . . . 46
Indefinite Pronouns . . . . . . 47
On Adjectives and Adverbs . . . . 48
On the Verb Substantive ko . . . . 49
CHAPTEE VI.
On the Verb, Mood and Tense . . . . . . 51
Present tense . . . . . . 52
X CONTENTS
PAGE
Past tense . . . . . . . . 53
Perfect tense . . . . . . . . 55
Past perfect tense . . . . . . 55
Future tense . . . . . . . . 56
Dual tense . . . . . . . . 57
Emphatic forms . . . . . . . . 58
Passive and jussive forms . . . . . . 60
CHAPTER VII.
On the regular use of tense-signs in sentence construction 61
Ka not a tense-sign . . . . . . 64
On the Negative . . . . . . . . 65
On Antonyms . . . . . . . . 67
CHAPTER VIII.
On the Grammar . . . . . . . . 75
On I was, I had been, I have been, I have become . . 77
CHAPTER IX.
On Verbs and their Terminals . . . . 78
On Verbal Prefixes .. .. .. ..81
List of Verbs . . . . . . . . 83
CHAPTER X.
On colour . . . . . . . . . . 105
On insects and reptiles . . . . . . . . 109
On fish . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
On trees and plants . . . . . . Ill
On birds . . . . . . . . - . . . 116
CHAPTER XI.
On proper names . . . . • • • • • • 118
On place names . . . . . . • • 120
On Maori aphorisms . . . . . . . • 126
On selected phrases . . . - . • 132
On fables .. .. ..135
CHAPTER XII.
On the Tohunga .. . . . . . . . . 137
Parts of the human body . . . . . . 138
On the bone system . . . . • • 140
Ailments and diseases . . . . . . 141
On sport, pastime, drill . . . . . . . - 143
Law of tapu . . . . . . . . • • 144
On the Koropatu . . . . . . • • 146
CONTENTS xi
PASK
On Ariki .. .. . . 147
On mantles and garments . . . . . . . . 149
On weapons, axes. etc. . . . . . . 150
On Maori houses . . . . . . . . . . 151
CHAPTER XTTI.
On the term Kura . . . . . . . . . . 153
Philosophic lament . . . . . . . . 154
Maori flute music . . . . . . . . . . 157
Names of Maori songs, chants, etc. . . . . 158
Maori love ditties . . . . . . . . 159
Epic poem (Tvraukawa) . . . . . . . . 161
Epic poem, translation . . . . . . . . 165
CHAPTEE XIV.
On marriage customs and land rights . . . . 172
Fixity of land tenure . . . . . . . . 174
Hereditary tenure .. .. .. .. ..181
Land tenure in its relation to marriage customs . . 182
Kinship and marriage connexions . . . . . . 187
Plural marriages . . . . . . . . . . 190
CHAPTEE XV.
On time . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3
Sun, Moon, Stars, Planets, Constellations . . . . 195
Maori lunar Calendar . . . . . . 195
Stars ruling Months . . . . . . . . 196
Months by numbers . . . . . . 196
Seasons . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Winds . . . . . . . . 197
The Planets . . . . . . . . 198
Milky Way. constellations . . . . . . . . 200
Sun, summer, the sky . . . . . . . . 206
Moon, night, star-groups . . . . . . . . 208
CHAPTER XVI.
Whang a, T atari, Taihoa .. .. .. ..212
Tabloid Translations . . . . . . 213
CHAPTEE XVII.
Verbalised phrases, childhood, manhood, old age . . 222
Rhyming slang . . . . . . . . . . 228
Maori hymn to Creator . . . . . . . . 229
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . 232
DIAGRAM
Illustrating a fundamental principle of Maori.
BY THE AUTHOR.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR.
CHAPTER I.
. fe
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
_ a? 2 o 1-1
-3} ,3 a .jj o
<u ^ bo as
-2 ? TO a „
a
III
•*> I* W
C ® to S 2r
•rt t * ".S-e
02 __«
g
*C
W ^
a a
PQ
O^-^ - S 'en
•2S§5?g
'C o
_S «> 5
<u
f «
o 'g 2 *g s '2 73 <*-
isS^gogtaaj
-2'-fJ^"=HYa3'-i
a s i §
rClSr^g^JQ^
g-SaJg-gS53
r3 » r3 to 53 « -£ ai
to
ha
fi
W t"1
^5 fcj
O fc !SJ ^ ^
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
03 rrt O 03 03
a
8 a
S -o
0 T3
r" ;-
-e S*
fl -r S?
„, c -
03 ^ f~>
~ ~ c3
f£J M 03
hJ £ ci
E- -r.
i 03 OS O)
03 o
w
r^^ p^^
QJ -4-s 03 CD
i^J
03
•H
03
AJ
03
B 0
1
M03 03b£BO355 ^
03
^:
JB
•^
J 0
,0
12
03 ^Q CD ^ ^ r2 03
03
03
i
t
o
,0
g
03
~ 03
03 -
JS 03
2
||||||lf§||
0 j
3 Q-
^ §
S .g 03
S5*
a~
£
f2 "S
3
" '"1" s" ^^ S~ ^ rt S ^
S T
. £
^ e
2 g
•0 g T3
e8 3 cS
rS
S e
s"
Q
,-ro --S? - e e e
'SgO'^fc'Sr^ryCr^rt
r§ f
5r§
C ^ B
"®
e e
« e e e «.«.«.§ -S
e
_e
a
O
•^» •<!»
•«*
kl
Q
S
N
03
03
p
GO 13 <r> >
C^ p r— • '^
b
0)
•a
>•>
f 1
be
S
rt So ® ^ « -^ T^
QHw*;a)to<p-(_^^ 5J
p
'S
ft
CO
B
03
="
ri
S
^ 2
d
. ^ ""^ Q^
o
CO
^H £S
jQj^ fS^S*® S
o
i»
c '
Q
X
g 3 \
5 ° I
l^gg^^J^C o
1"
1
1
G
II
'£
0^^^^!^^^ ^
fe
!?
K
d
o
S
'-H
B
CJ
•
B
^_^
p
^
fl
^
-2
"S
"j
02
cr
1
03 *?
0 g*
c3
-t-i
_B
be
B
•M
43
JJ<
OfclSSSSS* EH
^
W
^
CO
E
0
cu
JS
c
02
c
CO
—
P3
£ 03l| |
CO
3
03
^
a
g.
IT* F^
m & °g-2 -0
O
fO
03
oT
N
LJ
r^
s
"03
^
•*.
K
"o
h^rr-l ,-, bC S N- hr"S ^
g
>
So
y±
-— 43
a
B
03
, >, QJ ,M ™ 03
•+j "T2 -- S -—
C C «
r~
— w
^£
r- * ^"^
^c ^3 *^ ^-* B
-a fc js cs
<JB S C
3 s.
S S? ffi «
a 5 c rt
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
CD CD
CD
r3
CD
a
a
CD
a
CD
a
££
42
a
ri
CD
CD
-^
CD
43
o
o
CD
CD
CD
CD
2
*" +3
K
-•H
Jj
43
O
CD
O
^£
if
0
3
o
CD CD 43 p
CD
rt
CD
05
c4
r,
4=
v
E
S
O
o
.
Of*-3 O •* .H CO CD 3 OS
03
-T
cS
s"
CO
>•) ^
; — ;
CD
E
<E "*"" ^CDCDrl.*1
ft
^
r^
g
O
a CD
-s§
b>.
d
"^
be
OS
CD
42
a
5|I|I|5:S|«|
e
O
'S
Cp i<
I
'C3
i
•s ®
^
M
'Q
CD .
*• CO
3
<w-S
T? O
0) CD
'5
•^
CO
•z
Uj
•—i
•d
•
iz;
fl if If 0^2^11
2 s P
s a s:
3 -ij -M
S
if
'- i
3 S
0 ^
«M <u
epj p
nS
la
O 42
s
- ^)
O3 .
a
s °
«M
O
s
0
•rj
CO
03
J 5 « « « » J J t « » !
3 *> t3
3^S
«
a -S
13 **
§•2
a ci
3 J
a -4-j
a
'43 co
o
o -±f
"ji
•A
d
a
03
-i-T
® 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
k M fcd M kl kl ^sj fed ^sj fcsj tsj
CD
O
a
0
o
M
C5
M
o
m
1
43 ,2
~ be!
_e_g :
•5 'S
S
bo
^ z: z, CQ _vj o ^ •»
ft'*? "S bo O
<o "^ ^>^ a CD
O
jg
^a^o^HMS^^M
o
FH
^-eoco^o^ ra
0 V^ &'£ " .
CO
^7
"^^^aS-Srt c
"En
•§ » |- 3 5 a <j
Qp-
.9c»CD(p'tf-<J
B M O
CD -1-1 3
•^3 ^ 5 -« 43 '^
• | s a m -^ CD
a be a -^ gT
CD a M CD 0 CO «
„ o > ^ « a
H
^ 0- C bO 42 fe
I ^ -S >^a 4, 0 1
S •§ ^'S 3 •**
.3 "^ . •!-< "> ®
^ ^3 g S g"'3 q
CD -^ 5 *H< a o ^ ._! -u "S
CO te *^^ Oi &(42 a 43 ^
1
a a .« g .5 S ®
P^ ""^ ^ ^H o bo o
• 8 "tt ** 3 |lj *
•^ s" s j| Q" S > ^2 «H 'a -^
o
3 43 3 T3 co ® cp
s^Se0^-*'*''1'-'-
^
43 73 >H -^ a <v) be
co p J; 3 CD co a!
O ° O QJ >i
^ K) ^ O to fc3 ^ ^ ^ ftn fel
&H
4?S°-S§^>
•^ J3 55
d> j2 _. ^ o_i
s a 5 1 J8 a
'3 a CD •* ®
^ «W CD -i O °°
a
CD *~~t O Oj CD *-• a
^-»
^H
X ^ > CD 3 -rt
S
OS CD .SJ
£ CD .In CO, O
• & 3 co 0 >^
.2 ° 0 ^ o a
BB
be
• S to ^J us 03 -g CD "43 S
CD
5 cu « °5 °
a^ »•§ §CboS
S
<!sJ^OOWMS^;P-iW
t-t
O
EH
tH ^^ "? 43 B ^
P«
43 '^ r§ 'g 3 ,.
05
1
0 0 0 0 o 0
^ ftq ^, C fc) tj ^ ^ ^ (X, ft^
£
«- bo
r* 43
S.S
a ns
co-g
0 c;
S P,
® a
MAORI-ENGLISH TUT R
s"= n~ ° o c
a, "3 3 r2 ^03
5 B
O B 03 O
-^ 05 CO O
O i
S «S -
P
C3 O 5 03 S O O
SOS O -^ •" B w
fe O 2 B
15 COrS rt 2
^S B 00 r^J -U -fn
"^ ^3 ^ p B
_j __j P4 flB 3
03 g 03 oT 03 B p
B p fl IT- 03 o O
co 'co o> o
T3 <j f) 03 ,r3 OH
r« 3
al's
a
-
H
5 651
§ e <? «
III p
55 .§ -ti K
e«e 8
«S ^
2 &
S
CO 0
'o" g 'S 1 rt
, c b tu k
1 3 $ T£
m
5 K
CD '3
173 B 01
CD 03 co
S > g
ft ^£
- e S
G 5S S
I!'
^ s s"
S ft
«£,
^
6 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
ON DIPHTHONGS.
As it is imperative to give to each vowel, no matter
what its position in a word may be. its one true measure
of sound, there are no diphthongs or digraphs in this
tongue. A few examples are here given of those vowel-
combinations which are sometimes wrongly regarded
as diphthongs. _
Arj.
This combination is correctly sounded in speaking the
English Ah else. Each of these letters receives the long
sound in every case in which the two appear together in
the above order. . T
The long sound is fully heard in the English word
eye, also in ay of the sailors: Ay, ay, Sir. The short
sound is heard in igh of such words as right, might, etc.
AO.
The long sound is heard in the English Ah oasis.
When occurring in the order here given the short sound
never applies.
-A.U .
The long sound is heard in the English word rowdy,
the short sound in the English word out.
EL
The long sound is heard in such words as neigh,
reign, and the short sound in the word eight.
OU.
The long sound is distinctly heard in the English
word foe.
Such words as the following are compound:—
Mata-dra, wakeful. Iri-iri, to christen.
Haere -ere, to ramble about Oma-oma, to run to and fro.
Unu-unu, to undo, untie. Utu-utu, to dip up water.
Ako-ako, to instruct. Ihi-ihi, to twitch (as
nerves).
CHAPTER II.
ON WHAKA.
Whaka is a word of two syllables and one of the most
important in the language. In many instances it
corresponds to the English prefix &e-, thus : — before,
whakamua: behind, ivhakamuri; besmudge, whakapoke,
etc. W'haka, which always has the short vowel-sounds,
is a causative prefix, causatives being formed by
prefixing it to verbs, adjectives, and nouns, thus : —
Tika, straight, correct, whakatika, to straighten, to
correct.
Hoki, return; whakdhoki, to send back.
Kata, laugh; whakakata, to cause laughter.
Taka, fall; ivhakataka, to cause to fall.
Pai, good; ivhakapai, to make good.
Tangata, man; ichakatangata, to make a man of, to
act as a man.
ON KIA—AI.
These are particles of very extensive use, kia being
used to denote a wish or proposition : —
Kia atawhai ki tou tamaiti, be kind to thy child.
Ko taaku hialiia tenei, kia whakaakona koe • my desire
is this, that you be taught.
Kia haere taua ki te onel Shall you-and-I go to the
sands ?
Kia is a sign of the jussive tense let-it-be : —
Kia mdrama, let it be light.
Ki a has the meaning of unto :—
Haere mai ki a au, come hither unto me.
Haere atu ki a ia, go thither unto him.
7
8 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Including as it does the negative prefix un- ki a is
largely infinitive: —
Taihoa e hoe, ki a tde mai era, defer the paddling until
the others arrive.
Ki a kite rd and au i d ia, until I actually see him.
Ai (verb auxiliary), may, possible to be, contingent:—
Ko wai i hua ai, ko wai i tohu ai? Who would deem
it possible, who prepare for such a contingency?
Md tend anake ka whakade ai au, upon that (under-
standing) alone will I consent.
He wehi noon-a i oma atu ai, it was probably fear
which caused him to run off.
Na toona mate i kore ai a ia e kai, it is probably his
illness which causes him to abstain from food.
He papal no ngd kai i reka ai, it is probably due to
its excellence, that the food is so relished.
He koakoanga ngdkau i kata ai a ia, it is probably a
rejoicing heart which causes him to laugh.
Ai, then, propounds a cause or advances a reason.
Ai is perhaps an abbreviation of Ahei: —
E ahei, it is possible : e kore e ahei, it is impossible.
When associated in a sentence the words Kia — ai
convey the meaning: in order to effect the desired
object :—
Omakia, kia pahure ai tdtou; run, in order that
we may escape.
Hohorotia, Ma wawe ai tdtou te tde • hasten, in order
that we may the sooner arrive.
Kai pai ai a Ia; in order that he may approve.
Utaina he wahie, kia ka tonu ai te ahi; put on some
firewood, so that the fire may continue to burn.
Me Hahde te whiu o te patu, kia mate ai to tangata:
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 9
you must use the weapon with a drawing stroke, in
order that you may kill your man.
Kia idea ai te hdpai; in order to make the lifting
practicable.
ON PU.
Pu connotes the essence or core of a thing, and is used
to denote exactitude: —
Bite pu, precisely similar: Tika pu, absolutely
straight or correct.
[straight, or directly towards.
Poka pu J
Wdenga pu, the exact centre.
Ko te waka pu tenei, this is the actual canoe.
Ko ia pu tend, that is it undoubtedly.
Ka mamde pu koe i a Au, I shall most assuredly hurt
you.
Erangi pu a la i a koe, of you two he is certainly the
best-informed, cleverest or strongest (as the case may
be).
ON TONU.
Tonu connotes precision, intensity, eontinuancy : —
Ko ia tonu, certainly, exactly so, the very person or
thing.
Ko taana mahi tonu tend, that is his constant
occupation.
He karanga tonu td tend, that one is continually
calling.
He tangi tonu td tenei, this one is incessantly crying.
He pai tonu tdau ki d Ahau, thou art ever good unto
me.
Kdati tonu to korero, cease thy speaking instantly.
10 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
E kore tonu Au e whakade, I positively will not
consent.
Mdro tonu, perfectly rigid.
ON RAW A, WHAKAHARAHARA, AND TINO.
These terms are largely used in expressing degrees
of size, quality, quantity, intensity, etc. : —
Rawa, very.
Whakaharahara, unusually, exceedingly, excessively.
Tino, intensely, superlatively.
Pai rawa, very good. Tika rawa, very just.
Pai whakaharahara, exceedingly good.
Tino pai, most superior.
He waka pai rawa tenei, this is a very good canoe.
He waka pai whakaharahara tend, that is an exceed-
ingly good canoe.
Ko tdau and i a te waka tino pai, but yours is the
most superior canoe.
Ko te rdkau nui rawa nei tenei, this then is the
very large tree.
Ko te rdkau nui whakaharahara na tend, that then is
the exceedingly large tree.
Ko te rdkau tino nui ra terd, yonder then is the largest
of large trees.
ON KE.
Ke connotes variation, difference, contrariety : —
He tangata ke tenei, this is quite a different person.
He mea ke tend, that is quite another matter.
Pai ke, better. Kino ke, worse.
Poto ke, shorter. Roa ke, longer.
Pai ke tenei i tena, this is much better than that.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 11
Nui ke tend i terd, that is much larger than the other.
Mohio ke a la i a Au, he knows much more than I do.
E ha ke tena, that is not it.
Ke sets apart, tu ke, tu ke ; and separates, taka ke.
Ke refers to a point of time already past : —
Kua oti ke, previously finished.
Kua ri.ro ke, had already gone.
It also refers to the future, a ke nei, and ' ' Onward for
ever" would be expressed by "A ke, A ke, A ke tonit
atu."
ME.
At the head of a sentence me is used as an imperative
and has the sense of the word must: —
Me mahi koe, you must work. Me hdere koe, you
must go.
Me tatari koe, you must wait. Me korero koe, you
must speak.
It is also a copulative conjunction, as : Te waka me
ngd hoe, the canoe and the paddles.
ON E.
E Tai, E- hdere mai ki dhau, O Tai, do come unto
me. In that brief sentence we have the aggregated
functions of the term E, which are : —
1. The sign of the vocative case, 0.
2. The sign of the future indicative.
3. The verb auxiliary, to do; imp., did, past part.,
done ; pres., doing.
We may here consider it under this latter head : —
Me pend E Au, I must do so.
Me pend E koe, you must do so.
Me pend E la, he must do so.
12 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
/ pendtia E Au, I did it so.
/ pendtia E koe, you did it so.
Te pendtanga E a/icm, my doing so, my having done so.
Te pendtanga E koe, your doing so, your having done
so.
E pend ana Au, I am doing so.
Negatively : —
Kaua E pend, do not so.
E kore Au E pend, I shall not do so.
For other examples in E, see E — ANA.
ON TV.
Tu connotes anything strange, singular, peculiar,
extraordinary : —
Tenei tu tangata, this extraordinary man.
Tend tu tikanga, that peculiar method, rule, or style.
ON KAUA—KEI.
These terms are frequently associated in a sentence
and belong to the dehortative-imperative class, con-
veying the sense of do not — lest: —
Kaua e piki rdkau, kei taka iho koe, do not climb
trees, lest you fall down.
Kaua koe e tahu ahi, kei wera te w'hare, do not you
light a fire, lest the house burn.
Kaua e tohe, kei raru ko koe, do not persist, lest you
yourself suffer.
ON KAI.
Kai is a term used as a prefix, to indicate the agent :—
Kai-Ta, practitioner. "Koi-torotoro, scout.
Kai-whakadko, one who teaches. Kai-w<n, one who
entreats.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 13
Kai-pupuru, one who holds. K&i-tuku, one who
liberates.
K&i-whakawd, a judge. K&i-whakaora, a preserver
(of life).
Ksi-tlaki, a caretaker, guardian. "Kai-titiro, an
inspector.
ON ANO AND HOKI.
These terms have reference to some other person,
place, or matter, as: — Yet again: once more still: still
another : too : again, also :—
Ko koe ano hold tetahi i reira, you, too, were also
there.
Ko koe ano tetahi, still, you were one (of them).
Ko koe hold tetahi, you were also one (of them).
A e noho mai nei ano a la, and he still dwells there.
Kahore ano Au nei i parangia, I have not yet
slumbered.
Korerotia mai ano e koe, you relate it once again.
He tangata ano a aku i kite ai, I saw some people too.
He tangata ano tenei, this is yet another individual.
E tika ana ano tend, that is yet another correct (view).
Maana ake ano, for himself and none other.
Mdaku ano taaku, mine is for myself (and none
other) .
Mdana atu ano, for himself absolutely and for no other.
Kdhore ano Au i rongo noa, I have not yet heard.
ON A.
A speaks of the manner, means, process : —
Mahi-3,-ringa, by means of hand, handicraft.
Hdere-a,-wdewde, proceed by means of feet, walk.
Kite-b-kanohi, by means of the eye, actual observation.
Whakadro-a,-tangato, thoughts altogether human.
14 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Korero-a,-ngutu, spoken by lip.
Mahi-&-rangatira, act as a nobleman.
Tu-&-rangatira, appearance, manners, speech, of a
nobleman.
Tu-a,-rangi, of heavenly form. Tu-&-ware, of base
form.
Toro-Srwaka, visit by means of a canoe.
Toro-a,-nuku. Toro-a,-rangi.
ON KOA.
Koa implies entreaty: —
Hoatu koa ki a la, give it to him, do.
Tukua atu koa ahau ki uta, do suffer me to get ashore.
Tend koa, kia kite ahau, do permit me to see it.
Kimihia mai koa taaku tammti, do search for my
child (I implore you).
Ki a Au koa to wrika, grant me (the use of) thy
canoe, do.
E hara koa i tenet, this is not it, surely (if I may be
allowed to express an opinion).
ON THE PREPOSITIONS.
RUNGA, up, upon, the top : —
Ki runga ki te puke, up on to the hill.
Ko runga ko te puke, to be upon the hill.
Kei runga kei te puke, is upon the hill.
Hei runga hei te puke, for to be upon the hill.
I runga i te puke, was upon the hill.
To runga 5 te puke, that of the hill-top.
0 runga o te puke, those of the hill-top.
No runga no te puke, from upon the hill.
Mo runga mo te puke, for upon the hill.
Ko runga o te puke, the top of the hill is.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 15
A rung a o te puke, the top of the hill.
Ma runga nid te puke, go, pass along over the hill.
RARO, beneath, the bottom, down : —
Ki raro ki te rdkau, to the bottom of the tree.
Ko raro ko te rdkau, to be below the tree.
Kei raro kei te rdkau, is beneath the tree.
Hei raro hei te rdkau, for beneath the tree.
I raro i te rdkau, was under the tree.
To raro o te rdkau, that of the bottom of the tree.
0 raro o te rdkau, those of the bottom of the tree.
No raro no te rdkau, from beneath the tree.
Mo raro mo te rdkau, for beneath the tree.
Ko raro o te rdkau, the bottom of the tree is.
A raro 6 te rdkau, the bottom of the tree.
Ma raro md te rdkau, go (pass along) under the tree.
ROTO, in, into, within : —
Ki roto ki te Whare, into the house.
Ko roto ko te Whare, to be within the house.
Kei roto kei te Wltare, is within the house.
Hei roto hei te Whare, for within the house.
/ roto i te Whare, was within the house.
To roto o te Whare. that of within the house.
0 roto o te Whare, those of within the house.
No roto no te Whare, from within the house.
Mo roto mo te Whare, for within the house.
Ko roto o te Whare, the inside of the house is.
A roto o te Whare, the inside of the house.
Md roto md te Whare, go (pass along) through the
house.
WAHO, out. outside, without : —
Ki waho ki te Marde, out to the courtyard.
Ko waho ko te Marde, to be outside on the courtyard.
16 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Kei walio kei te Marde, is out at the courtyard.
Hci waho hei te Marde, for to be out at the courtyard.
I waho i te Marde, was out at the courtyard.
To waho 6 te Marde, that of out at the courtyard.
0 waho o te Marde, those of out at the courtyard.
No ivaho no te Marde, from out of the court}rard.
Mo waho mo te Marde, for out at the courtyard.
Ko waho o te Marde, outside the courtyard is.
A waho o te Marde, outside the courtyard.
Md waho md te Marde, pass along out by way of the
courtyard.
CHAPTER III.
ON DIRECTION AND DIRECTIVE PARTICLES.
(Hdere is a verb of motion, meaning to proceed.)
Eunga, up, South.
Hdere mai, come hither.
Mai, hitherward.
Nau mai- \
Ahu mai- \ come towards,
Anga mai- • approach.
Whanomai- I
Koke mai, stride hither.
Hdere mai ki d ahau, come
unto me.
Neke mai, move hither.
Ho-mai, give hither.
Tahuri mai, turn hither.
Mauria mai, bring hither.
Akiria mai- 1
Epaina mai- least hither.
Opehia mai J
Tlkina mai, come fetch.
Karanga mai, call (us) to
you.
Hoki mai, return hither.
Heke mai, descend hither.
Kake mai, ascend hither.
Kau mai, wade hither.
Tomo mai, enter hither.
Ko mai- 1
Tahaki mai- xnear side.
Tua mai
Td-wdahi mai, this side
(river).
Ko ke noa mai, much nearer
Whiti mai, cross hither.
Raro, down, North.
Hdere atu, go hence.
Atu, thitherward.
Nau atu- \
Ahu atu- go towards,
Anga atu- approach.
Whano atu- )
Koke atu, stride hence.
Hdere atu ki d ia, go unto
him.
Neke atu, move hence.
Ho-atu, give hence.
Tahuri atu, turn hence.
Mauria atu, convey hence.
Akiria atu- 1
Epaina atu- feast hence.
Opehia atu- J
Tlkina atu, go fetch.
Karanga atu, call (them)
to us.
Hoki atu, return hence.
Heke atu, descend hence.
Kake atu, ascend hence.
Kau atu, wade hence.
Tomo atu, enter hence.
Ko atu- 1
Tahaki atu- xfar side.
Tua atu-
Td-u'dahi atu, the other
side (river).
Ko ke noa a£u,much farther
Whiti atu, cross hence.
17 C
18
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Tde mai, arrive hither.
Poka pu mai 1 come direct
Heipu mai- \ hither.
Poka tata mai-]
Whakangau mai, impel
hither.
Tlkei mai, step up hither.
Puta mai, appear hither.
Anganui mai. \
Aronui mai- \ to face
Hdngai mai- hither.
Taurite mai- )
Hohoro mai, hasten hither.
Kokiri mai, dash hither.
Moiri mai, hanging towards
(us).
Ake, upwards.
Hdere ake- \ come
AJiu ake- ) upwards.
Neke ake, move upwards.
Hoki ake, return upwards.
Piki ake, mount, climb up.
Kake ake, ascend.
Tu ake, stand up.
Totoro ake, reach upward.
Pehia ake, press upward.
Whdia ake, follow upwards.
Ringihia ake, pour upward.
Tikina ake, fetch upward.
Opehia ake, cast upward.
Toia ake, haul upward
(canoe).
Kumea ake, pull upward
(rope).
Tirohia ake, seek upward.
Ahua ake, incline (it) up.
Tde atu, arrive thither.
Poka pu atu |go direct
Heipu atu \ thither.
Poka tata atu J
Whakangau atu, impel
hence.
Hlkei atu, step down
thither.
Puta atu, appear hence.
Anganui atu- \
Aronui atu- to face
Hdngai atu- hence.
Taurite atu- !
Hohoro atu, hasten hence.
Tdkiri atu, dash hence.
Tdiri atu, hanging away
(from us).
Iho-, downwards.
Hdere iho \ come
Ahu iho- j down wards.
Neke iho, move downwards.
Hoki iho, return down-
wards.
Heke iho, dismount, descend
Heke ihot descend.
Tu iho, stand down.
Totoro iho, reach downward
Pehia iho, press downward.
Whdia iho, follow down-
ward.
Rangihia iho, empty down-
ward.
Tikina iho, fetch downward.
Opehia iho, cast downward.
Toia iho, haul downward
(canoe).
Kumea iho, pull downward
(rope).
Tirohia i/io,seek downward.
Ahua iho, incline (it"! down.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 19
Werohia ake, thrust up (at Werohia iho, thrust down
it). (at it).
As a directive particle whaka has the sense of
towards :
Whakarunga, upwards. Whakararo, downwards.
Whakatmia, forwards. Whakamuri, backwards.
Whaka te ihu, towards the Whaka te kei, towards the
bow. stern.
Tahuri, capsize, as a canoe.
Hurirapa, upside down, as a cart.
Whakahurapa, to tip, as a tip-dray.
Note the sense of these directive particles in the next
exercise.
ON THE MODE OF COMPARISON.
POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE.
Pai, good. Pai ake, better. Tino pai, best.
Kino., bad. Kino ke, worse. Tino kino, worst.
Hi, little. Iti iho, less. Tino iti, least.
Tawhiti, far. Tawhiti atu, farther. Tino tawhiti, farthest.
Raro, low. Raro iho, lower. To raro, lowest.
Mua, fore. Mua atu, former. To mua, foremost.
Muri, hind. Muri atu, hinder. To muri, hindmost.
Rung a, high. Rimga ake, higher. To runga, highest.
Poto, short. Poto iho, shorter. Tino poto, shortest.
Roa, long. Roa ke, longer. Tino roa, longest.
Ahua pai kau ake, very little better.
It is quite proper to use the terms "tino roa" or
"tino poto," to express the sense of "too long" or "too
short. ' '
Under the superlative, it may be that "To" is an
abbreviated form of "Tino."
ON THE SENSES.
Rongo, to hear. Whakarongo, to listen. Rongo
hlrearea, to hear indistinctly.
Kite, to see. Titiro, to look. Kimi, to seek. Hure, to
search for (under something). Mdtakitaki, to gaze,
20 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
view. Matadra, to be wakeful. Tirotiro, to examine.
Titiro matatau, to stare. Wheiro, to perceive indis-
tinctly.
Hongi, to smell. Whakamono, to scent. Whengu-
whengu, to sniff. Ngongoro, to snore.
Pa, to touch. Whdwhd, to feel.
Whakamotau to taste. (Note, — kahore he hd o te kai
nei, this food has no flavour.)
ON VOICE AND SPEECH.
(Arero, the tongue: Reo, the voice (also dialect);
Korero, to speak. Ko is the verb substantive. To speak,
is equivalent to "to be. ' ' Ko-rero is evidently composed
of the verb, Ko, and the name for the tongue, arero.}
Ko, silent speech (as a prayer). Korero, to speak.
Kopana, to speak (as an oracle). Korerorero, to discuss.
Kl, to state. Kauwhau, to recite. Whakahua, pronounce.
Tatau, to count. Whai-korero, to orate. Whakade, to
assent. Whakapai, to approve. Whakahe, to dissent, dis-
count. Whakatika, to endorse, justify. Whakakdhore, to
deny, reject. Whakarite, to compare. WJiak-akino, dis-
parage. Whango, hoarse. Koroki, to advise. Whakarlroi,
to distort. Whakapau korero, exhaustively discuss.
Whakapiiaki, to utter. Whakamdrama, enlighten,
explain. Pdnui, announce. Waiata, sing. Amuamu,
grumble. Hamumu, murmur. Haivata, mutter.
Hautete, jabber. Atete, oppose. Komuhumuhu,
revile secretly. Tohe, persist, Whakamohio, inform.
Whakamahara, remind. Tautohe, argue. Hdmama,
bawl. Ui, enquire. Pdtai, ask. Tono, demand. Inoi,
entreat. Karakia, recitation of religious ritual.
Whakadko, teach, instruct. Tohutohu, show, direct.
Whakahau, order. Whakatupato, caution. Whakaivd,
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 21
arraign. Parare, yell. Moenanu, talk asleep. Korero
hanihani, offensive personal remarks about an absent
one. Kohete, strongly disapproving. Whakateka, the
lie direct. Whakapeau, divert at an angle. Tautoko,
support, endorse. Whakapehapeha, brag. Whakaputa,
boast. Whakakihi, incite. Whakamoemiti, praise. Whaka-
mdrie, pacify. Whakatoi, impudent. Wana, beg. Nuka,
deceive. Whakapohehe, confuse, bewilder. Whiriwhiri,
choose. Iriiri, christen. Tohi, baptise, anoint. Mihi, greet
affectionately. Whakawai, to tempt, beguile. WJiakapati-
pati, entice. Whakaene, cajole. Whakapono, believe.
Whakahlhl, vain pride. Hianga, pretend. Korero
tipoka, speak irregularly. Whakapeka, doubt. Whaka-
manamana, extol, exalt. Poroporo-d-ki, make dying
speech. Kotamutamu, whisper. Whakatakoto tikanga,
lay down rules or proposals. Whakatakariri, express
annoyance. Whakakaitoa. "serve him right." Whakaiti,
belittle. Ngcmgare, to quarrel. Taunu, to revile.
Whakap&e, to blame, accuse. Aro, incline towards.
Hori, beside the truth. Whakawahi, anoint. Whakapde-
teka, falsely accuse. Whakaweti, threaten. Taki,
challenge. Papepape, stammer. Kanga, curse. Whaka-
dtn, tell. Tito, compose, invent. Whakahoki kupu,
reply. Karanga, call. Whaka-o, "halloo." Tdtai, to
recount methodically (such as genealogy). Hangareka,
jest. Korero whakangdoko, to tickle, amuse. Karanga-
td, remain silent when called. Whakahohd, express
weariness of discussion. Korero tara, speak fables.
Korero tohunga, speak wisely. Whakakorero, induce to
speak. Whatawhditi, narrowing (the discussion).
Whakanui, enlarge, amplify. Whakawhiti, transfer.
Uapare, divert from one's self. Kapetau, express
resolution. Kolta-u, indicate future fame, for one's self.
22 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Whakamdtau, hazard. Whakataihoa, defer. Wahangu,
wahakuku, silent, dumb, (as a squid or mussel).
ON ENUMERATION.
The student already (see alphabetical tables) under-
stands the mode of enumeration in the lower numbers.
He may now proceed in the higher numbers (using the
prefix the sense requires) as follows : —
Ka tekau md-iwa, that makes ten and nine . . 19
Kd rua ngd tekau, that makes the two tens . . 20
Ed rua tekau md iwa, that makes two tens and nine 29
Kd toru ngd tekau, that makes the three tens . . 30
Kd toru tekau md iwa, that makes three tens and
nine .. .. .. ,.39
Kd whd ngd tekau, that makes the four tens . . 40
Kd wM tekau md iwa, that makes four tens and
nine . . . . . . 49
Kd rima ngd tekau, that makes the five tens . . 50
Kd rima tekau md iwa, that makes five tens and nine 59
Kd ono ngd tekau, that makes the six tens . . 60
Kd one tekau md iwa, that makes six tens and nine 69
Kd whitu ngd tekau, that makes the seven tens . . 70
Kd whitu tekau md iwa, that makes seven tens
and nine . . . . . . 79
Kd waru ngd tekau, that makes the eight tens . . 80
Kd waru tekau md iwa, that makes eight tens and
nine . . . . . . . . 89
Kd iwa ngd tekau, that makes the nine tens . . 90
Kd*wa tekau md iwa, that makes nine tens and nine 99
Kd kotahi te rau, that makes the one hundred . . 100
Ka kotahi te rau md tahi, makes the one hundred
and one . . . . . . . ... 101
Ka kotaki te rau, ka kotahi tekau, makes the one
hundred and ten 110
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 23
Ka kotahi te rail, ka iwa tekau ma iwa, that makes
the one hundred, the nine tens and nine . . 199
Kd rua nga ran, that makes the two hundreds . . 200
With the difference of the new number only, the same
process is repeated and we reach : —
Ka iwa nga ran, ka iwa nga tekau ma iwa, that
makes the nine hundreds, the nine tens and
nine .. .. .. ..999
Ka kotahi te mano, that makes the one thousand . . 1000
He Mano, a thousand.
Ka kotahi te Mano, ka rima nga rau, makes the one
thousand and the five hundreds . . . . 1500
Ka kotahi te mano, ka iwa nga rau, ka iwa tekau
ma iwa, that makes the one thousand, the nine
hundreds, the nine tens and nine . . . . 1999
Kd rua nga Mano, that makes the twyo thousands 2000
So we may go on to ten thousand, fifty thousand, one
hundred thousand, nine hundred thousand, and so reach
the —
He Mano tuarea — a thousand thousands.
Tua-rea, has the force of multiplying a large number
by itself.
Here we pause, because it is not certain that the
Maori had a term to indicate a million ; if he had, in all
probability it was the term "Ngea," the exact meaning
of which is now lost.
When the earlier Maori dealt with large numbers, he
invariably concluded with: — "Kd Ngea, kd Ngea, ka
Ngea." This in all probability meant millions, and
millions, and millions. There we must leave it.
The following are common expressions: —
Ka Mano tini, making many thousands.
Ka tua Mano tini. beyond many thousands.
Ka Mano tini icliaioio, making innumerable thousands.
2-i MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
ON TEKAU.
Tekau, ten, or te-kau, the ten. This ancient and
common term for ten is interesting, because it is not
definitely known whether tekau exactly expresses ten,
or, whether te is merely the definite article singular
making the true meaning of te-kau the ten. It may be
that this is so because a reference to the foregoing Table
shows that the Maori was very careful to use an article
before any round number : —
Kd rua nga tekau, that makes the two tens.
Ka kotahi te rau, that makes the one hundred.
Ka kotahi te ma-no, that makes the one thousand.
He mano, a thousand. (He, indefinite article.)
Ka rua nga mano, that makes the two thousands.
(Nga, pi. of def. art).
But, although it is quite proper to say kotahi tekau,
one ten, or, the one ten perhaps, it is equally proper
to say Kd rua nga tekau, that makes the two tens.
It is so again in the question Kd hia nga tekau, how
many are the tens ? In these cases nga the plural article
apparently ignores the presence of te as the definite
article. There we may now leave it.
ON NGAHURU.
The Maori had a distinct name for each month of the
year. What is of present interest is the fact that the
universal names for the seasons are : —
Hotoke, or, Makariri, Winter.
Malniru, or, Koanga. Spring.
Rauniati, Summer.
Ngahuru, (lit. the tenth month) Autumn, harvest
time.
Now, nga-huni is known to mean "the fullness of
harvest"; so that, unlike our apparently doubtful te
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 25
in te-kau, we know that the nga of nga-huru is really the
plural of the definite article. In treating of the number
(not names) of the months, nga-huru is the tenth,
because it was in the tenth month (March, — the Maori
year commences in June) — that the main harvest was
stored; hence the saying: Ngahuru kai pdenga, or, the
storing of the food-crops (for winter use) . Now, Bongo
is the recognised Lord of the abundance of Harvest, and
when food-crops were planted, and again when the crops
were harvested, appropriate rituals were used in honour
of Rongo. In these rituals whenever the number ten,
or tenth occurred, the term nga-huru was used, and not
te-kau, this latter being, very properly, considered too
common. The same thing occurs in the ritualistic
observances to Tdivhaki, because Tdwhaki is a Sun-god.
So that in his count of the months the Maori referred
to the tenth as ngahuru, to the eleventh as ngahuru-
taitahi, and to the twelfth as ngahuru-tairua.
In this way, during the course of time, ngahuru came
to be associated generally with the number ten, and
its use becoming freer it was frequently (wrongly) sub-
stituted for the commoner term te-kau. Here we have
what appears to be the true origin and meaning of the
term ngahuru, and also in a particular sense, its wrong
application in ordinary enumeration: E kore e kna te
kai tuku ki a Tdwhaki, ki te kupu nei "Tekau," engari
"Ngahuru"; (a tenth portion of) food offered up to
Tau'haki is not spoken of by the ordinary term "tekau,"
but (in the special term) "ngahuru." (A.H.M. VoL
I. P. 49.)
ON TOKO AND HOKO.
These terms are allied in their use, the one apparently
being an outcome of the other. As numeral prefixes
26 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
they apply to persons only, answering the question:
How many persons are there. The difference is that
Toko is prefixed to the lesser numbers including nine,
after which Hoko, which multiplies by ten times, is
introduced, thus: —
Toko-tahi, one person. Toko-rua two persons.
Toko-toru, three persons Toko-wha, four persons.
Toko-rima, five persons Toko-ono, six persons
Toko-whitu, seven persons Toko-waru, eight persons.
Toko-iwa, nine persons.
Hoko-tahi, ten times one person . . . . 10
Hoko-rua, ten times two persons . . . . 20
Hoko-toru, ten times three persons . . . . 30
Hoko-wM, ten times four persons . . . . 40
Hoko-rima, ten times five persons . . . . 50
Hoko-ono, ten times six persons . . . . 60
Hoko-whitu, ten times seven persons . . . . 70
Hokowhitu, or, seventy was, for many excellent
reasons, the favourite number forming a raiding, or
surprise party, or ope-taua. In the first place any
fighting tribe could raise this number, all of whom would
naturally obey the instructions of their one leader, or
chief. (For it was with the Maori as with the Scottish
tribes, any combined movement requiring the united
strength of several tribes was apt to be spoiled by the
presence of too many proud chiefs.) In the next place
a company of seventy could embark in a single canoe
and proceed quickly up or down a river, or by sea, as
the case might be. Proceeding by canoe was preferable
to proceeding by land, if only for the fact that, with
an alert and active people such as the Maori, no party
of men could pass over the country without making the
fact prematurely known.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 27
The true war-party or taua consisted of not less than
one hundred and forty men, expressed in the term
"lloko-whitu topu," or, seven times ten, doubled —
whakatopu, to add two such numbers together. Such
a number could proceed, fully equipped, in two canoes,
and their two leaders usually worked together in
harmony. But we are treating of numeration.
As we have seen, toko does duty only up to nine and
hoko accounts for even tens. Any number occurring
between the tens might be either particularly expressed
as: Hokorua ma-toru, equal to twice ten and an added
three; or Hokorua me te tuma, equal to twice ten and a
few over, a form which conveys that there are over
twenty but not nearly thirty.
ON TAKI.
Taki indicates numeration one by one, or section after
section, with the peculiar distinction that there is a
marked interval between : —
Taki-tahi, one after one, one after the other.
Taki-rua, two after two Taki-toru, three after three
Taki-wkd, four after four Taki-rima, five after five.
Taki-ono, six after six Taki-ivhitu, seven after
seven.
Taki-waru, eight after eight Taki-iiva, nine after nine.
Tdtaki tekau, ten after ten. (Note the change in
this.)
As topu indicates uniting, taki indicates disuniting.
Although taki-toru means three after three, it by no
means implies regularity or order. Taki may be used
for instance, in reference either to persons or to things,
but it would be quite wrong to speak of a company
marching along in fours, as marching taki-whd. It is
wrong only because there is order and regularity in,
28 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
and very little space between, each party of four so
marching. When a Maori says: I kaere takiwha atu,
he means that they went off four after four (with quite
an interval between each). Again, when a Maori says:
Ka hore he tangata o te kainga nei, kua t&ki-haere
katoa; he means, there is nobody left in this village,
they have all gone off, in various parties, and at different
times. This is the sense in which the term taki is to be
understood.
ON TOPU.
Whereas taki as a numeral prefix indicates distribu-
tion at irregular intervals, topu, as a numeral affix,
indicates doubling, or putting together. In the lesser
numbers pu is used, topu being understood: —
Tahi-pu, one-doubled. Rua-pii, two-doubled.
Toru-pu, three-doubled. Whd-pu, four-doubled
Rima-pu, five-doubled. Ono-pu, six-doubled.
Whitu-pu, seven-doubled. Waru-pu, eight-doubled
Iwa-pu, nine-doubled.
Tekau-topu, ten-doubled. (Note the change.)
Perhaps, twice one are two, twice two are four, etc.,
expresses this form of numeration.
E rua tekau topu, twenty-doubled: twice twenty.
E torn tekau topu, thirty doubled: twice thirty.
Kotalii rau topu, one hundred doubled : twice one
hundred ; one hundred twice told.
The true meaning of all this is that there are two
equal but separate lots put together; for instance, one
hundred men from one tribe and one hundred men from
another tribe, join forces. If one tribe raised two
hundred of a war-party, that number would not be
termed, kotahi ran topu, because it could not be classed
as two separate lots brought together. A Maori would
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 29
say of that, simply : E rua 6 mdua ran, there were two
hundred of us (of ourselves). If he wished to express
it in another form, he would say : E rua o mdua ran taki-
tahi, there were two hundred of us counting them one
by one (selected from among ourselves).
Topu is frequently associated with hoko in a mode of
very briefly denoting higher numbers. Hoko- wKitu
topu, or. seven-tens doubled, is a very handy form of
expressing one hundred and forty, which would other-
wise demand: Kotalii ran e who, ngd tekau, or worse
still : Kotalii te ran e wtid atu ngd tekau.
MISCELLANEOUS.
Tdnga, the noun of circumstance is used as a numeral
prefix to indicate how many times a thing is, or has
been, done: —
Tanga-tfa/zi, once done: tanga-nta, twice done, etc.
In counting the points of a game, the prefix papa is
used, perhaps because the win itself is termed papa : —
Pa,pa,-tahi, one point: papa-nta, two points, etc. Eai,
too, signifies point.
The deuce and trey of playing cards are termed the
ro-rua, and ro-toru.
A peculiar form of abbreviation is found in md-tahi
and md-rua. In enumeration ma means and, the plain
meaning of md-tahi therefore is a /id-one. It is known
that something should precede "and," and that some-
thing is understood to be ten. Md-tahi thus represents
ten and-one. or, eleven. A Maori in speaking of the
eleventh month says: Te Ma-tahi o te tau, i.e., the (ten)
and-one (month) of the year.
Tatau, to count, numerate.
Whdkahui, or. huihui, to add; addition.
Hui-rua, to pair, to put two together.
30 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Tango, or, patu, to take away; subtract.
Although poro expresses one-half of anything, there
does not now appear to be a term for indicating one-
sixth, one-third, or, one-tenth. It would require to be
put in so many words: —
E ono katoa ngd wehewehenga, kotahi te wehenga /
a An; there were six (equal) divisions made, of which I
received one division ; equal to one-sixth. Kotahi o roto
o te ono, one out of the six: one-sixth.
Whaka-kotahi, to unify, combine, make into one.
Whaka-tekau, to make into ten. To pile in tens.
Te-whaka-tekau, the tenth one, the made-up ten.
Ngd whaka-tekau, the made-up tens.
"la Po, i te Po Tuatahi, tde noa ki te Po tua-Ngakuru,
ki te Ran, ki te Mano." (Ancient Maori.)
ON MEASUREMENTS.
Tdtai, to measure.
Kotahi wkdnuitanga ringa, one hand width including
thumb, six-inches approximately.
He whatianga ringa te wkanui, an arm-bend in width,
from elbow to finger-tip, equal to eighteen inches.
E rua whatianga ringa te whdnui, two arm-bends,
equal to three feet.
Kotahi Mdaro te roa, one extension (both arms) the
length, one fathom, or, equal to six feet.
Kotahi kumi te roa, one ten-fathoms the length, equal
to sixty feet.
Poro-whd, four-sided, full square.
Taha-toru, three-sided, triangular.
Wehenga-rua, an equal division into halves.
Taha-rua, two-sided.
Porowhita, circle, round.
Wewehe, to separate.
Wdwdahi, to cut or divide off.
CHAPTER IV.
ON THE ARTICLES.
(Note, in Maori it is the article which is pluralised and
not the noun.)
The indefinite article is he • as, he whare, a house.
The definite article is te ; as, te whare, the house.
The plural article is ngd ; as, nga whare, the houses.
In Maori the words tenei and tend, or, this and that,
are certainly made up by means of prefixing the definite
article. Note how the plural occurs in such words as : —
Te-nei -tangata, this man E-nei tdngata, these men.
Te-nd tangata, that man. E-nd tdngata, those men.
Te-rd tangata, the other E-rd tangata, the other
man. men.
Taua tangata, the man re- Aua tangata, the men
ferred to. referred to
Te-tahi tangata, the one (particular) man: a certain
individual.
E-tahi tdngata, some particular men: certain
individuals.
Ko wai Ma end, who are those persons?
The following are the principal uses of the indefinite
article : —
He tangata, a man.
He tdngata some men.
He tangata end, those are men.
He wahine nei etahi, some were women.
He tangata pokanoa koe, you are an interfering man.
32 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
He ngdrara pea, it is an insect, perhaps.
He rongo hou tenei, this is new tidings.
I rongo Au he hake taua tangata, I heard that the
man referred to was a hunchback.
He kiore pea te mea e korerotia na e koe, that of
which you speak may have been a rat.
He mea kite i reira, the things were found there.
He tahi, it is one : there is one.
Te, as the definite article singular is unaccented. A
curious use of it occurs when used in negation; here it
is highly accented: —
Te kitea e Au, I could not find (it) .
Heaha koe te haere ai, why did you not go?
Ko te take tend te whakaae ai Au, that is the reason
why I would not assent.
The articles are used with each substantive in a sen-
tence : —
Te whenua me nga tangata, the land and the men.
Na te ua i pai ai te tupu, the rain improves the
growth.
He mahi atawhai, he mahi tika hoki, it is a kind act, it
is also a just act.
With few exceptions, such as "Waikato," the articles
are prefixed to tribal names: —
Nga-puhi : Nga-rauru : Nga-i-tawake : Nga-ti-maru :
Te Rarawa : Te Uri-6-hua, Te-tini 6 Toi, etc.
The common form, conventionally written, Ngati, is
merely an abbreviation of Ngd-tini, or the numbers of:
it is a courteous way of referring to a tribe, that is,
it speaks of them as being numerous, whether they are
so or not.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 33
ON THE NOUN AND GENDER.
MALE. FEMALE.
Tdne, masculine. Hine, feminine.
Hanga tangata, mankind. Hanga wahine, womankind.
Tama-tdne, male child. Tama-wahine, fomale child.
Tangata, man. Wahin-e, woman.
Tdne, male, husband. Wahine, female, wife.
Tahu, husband, spouse. Makau, wife.
Matua, Papa, Hdkoro, Whdea, Hdkui, mother.
father.
Matua-keke, uncle. Whdea-keke, aunt.
Tupuna, heinga, grand- Tupuna-wahine, grand-
father. mother.
Tupuna, ancestors. Tupuna, ancestresses.
Hungawai,hungarei, father- Hungawai-wahine, mother-
in-law, in-law.
Hundonga, son-in-law. Hundonga-wahine, daugh-
ter-in-la .v.
Tama, tama-tdne, son. Tamdhine, tama-wahine,
daughter.
Tdokete, brother-in-law; one married to a man's
sister.
Tdokete, sister-in-law; one married to a woman's
brother.
Hoa-hoa-tdne, men married to sisters. Hoa-hoa-
wahine, women married to brothers.
Au-tdne, brother of a woman's husband.
Au-wdhine, sister of a man's wife.
Irdmutu, nephew, or, niece; the children of a man's
sister.
Iramutu, nephew, or niece; the children of a woman's
brother.
(NOTE. — Brothers referring to their brothers' children,
call them tamariki, not irdmutu ; sisters speaking of
their sisters' children, call them tamariki, and not
irdmutu.}
D
34
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
MALE.
Mokopuna, grandson.
Tungdne, brother of a
female.
Tuakana, elder brother of
a male.
Teina, younger brother of
a male.
Tuakana keke, cousin senior
Teina keke, cousin junior.
Kau-mdtua, elders.
Matua-whdngai, foster
father.
Tamaiti whangai 1 adopted
Tamaiti taurima ] son.
FEMALE.
Mokopuna-wahine, grand-
daughter.
Tuahine, sister of a male.
Tuakana, elder sister of a
female.
Teina, younger sister of a
female.
Tuakana keke, cousin senior
Teina keke, cousin junior.
Kuia, elders.
Whdea-whdngai, foster
mother.
Tamdhine whang ail ad' 'ptd.
Tamdhine taurima \ d 'ghter
MISCELLANEOUS.
Muanga, first-born.
Potiki, pet.
Whdeereere, wife, bearing
children.
Whare-tangata, connexions
by marriage.
Pouaru, widower, or widow
Manene, one who does not
belong to the tribe or
country.
Tau-iwi, foreigner.
Tai-tama, a youth.
Tai-ohinga, youthful vigour
Puhi, a virgin.
Moe-wahine, married to a
wife.
Rangatira, a nobleman.
Ware, tutud pononga,
herehere, taurekareka,
servant, slave.
Muringa, last born.
Poriro, bastard.
Pakoko, pukupd, childless
wife.
Huatahi, first conceived.
Pani, an orphan.
Tangata whenua, abo-
riginals.
Tai-tamdhine, a maid.
Tai-kaumdtua, verging to
old age.
Taka-kau, unmarried, free.
Moe-tdne, married to a
husband.
Tamariki, children.
Tamaiti, child.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
35
Kai-pdoe, a vagrant, one
who eats at one place
and another.
Tira matakitaki hdere,
pleasure party, tourists.
Mdhanga, twins.
Whanau, a family.
Ariki, supreme tribal head.
Tohunga, one skilled ;
adept, initiate, philo-
sopher, sage.
Wairua, a spirit of a rela-
tive.
Kahurangi, turehu, patu-
paiarehe, a fairy-like
people.
Tau,whai-a-ipo, ipo, a loved
one of either sex: te
tau o te ate.
Kahuhura, one treasured
(male).
Korakorako, an albino.
Whdnau, family. Hapii, tribe. Iwi, aggregation of
kindred tribes. Tinana, body. Wairua, spirit. Mauri,
soul.
Tau-tahi, an only child.
Whanaunga, a relative.
Uri, descendants.
Eehua, ghost, spirit of an
unknown person.
Mdreikura,
female.
a cherished
CHAPTER V.
ON THE PRONOUNS.
TABLE OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
(In three specific numbers thero are four persons in
Maori.)
SINGULAR.
Au, I. Koe, thou. la, he or she. la, it.
Ahau, myself. A koe, A la, himself, herself. A
thyself. ia, itself.
Ko Au, I am, it is I Ko koe, thou art, it is
thou, etc.
DUAL.
Tdua, thou and I : first and second persons.
Mdua, he (or she) and I : first and third persons.
Korua, you two: second and third persons.
Rdua, they two: third and fourth persons.
(Based on the term for the number two, that is rua.)
TRIPLIAL.
Tdtou, you and I : first second and third persons:
Mdtou, they and I : first, third and fourth persons.
Koutou, you three: second, third and fourth persons.
Rdtou, they three: third, fourth and one other person.
Multitudinous, — matou katoa, all of us. Rdtou katoa,
all of them. (Based on the term for the number three
that is, toru.}
The student's attention is directed to the similarity
of terms in the relative dual and triplial; the triplial
includes the consonant t.
36
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 37
MODE OF SALUTATION.
Singular, — (to the male) Tend koe e hoa, e mara, e pa,
e id, e koro, etc.
Singular, — (to the female) Tend koe e kui, e whde, e
ko, e hine, etc.
Dual, — Tend konia e hoa md, e mara md, e pa md, e
koro md, etc.
Dual, — (to females) Tend korua e kui md, e whde md
e ko md, e hine md.
Triplial, — Tend koutou e hoa md, e mara md, e pa md.,
e koro md.
Triplial, — (to females) Tend koutou e kui md, e whde
md, e hine md.
Kia ora koe, health unto thee, life unto thee, etc.
"Koutou" is pronounced as the English words
"coat-toe," without repeating the letter t.
TABLE OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
SINGULAR.
Ndaku, nooku; tdaku, tooku: of, or, from me, my,
mine.
Ndau, noou; tdau, toou: of, or, from thee, thy, thine.
Ndana, noona ; tdana, toona : of, or, from his, or hers.
Ndana, noona; tdana, toona: of, or, from its.
EXAMPLES : —
(Singular), — tdaku waka, my canoe. Tdau waka, thy
canoe.
(Plural), — Aku waka, my canoes. A Au waka, thy
canoes.
DUAL.
Nd or no:—} .-...,,•.. £ A
„_ \taua, jointly belonging to us-two: first and
1 a, or to ,
second.
38 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Td, or to maua, jointly belonging to us-two : first and
third.
Td, or to korua, jointly belonging to you-two: second
and third.
Td, or to rdua, jointly belonging to those-two: third
and fourth.
EXAMPLES : —
(Singular), — td tdua waka, our joint canoe, the canoe
of us two.
(Plural), — a tdua waka, our joint canoes, the canoes
of us two.
(As before (see Articles) by the omission of the
initial letter #, the plural sense is given.)
Nd or no:-} TRIPLIAL.
Td, or to j tdtou; (lit: that of) of or belonging to
us-three (including person addressed).
Td, or to mdtou; of or belonging to us-three
(excluding person addressed).
Td or to koutou : of or belonging to you-three.
Td, or to rdtou ; of or belonging to the-three of them.
EXAMPLES : —
(Singular), — td tdtou waka, our canoe.
(Plural), — A tdtou waka, our canoes.
(If more than three are intended the number should
be stated, thus, — td tdtou tokorima, of or belonging to
the five of us. If there is a large number, then the word
katoa should be used, — td tdtou katoa, of or belonging
to all of us.)
Particular attention is directed to the different sense
conveyed by using the vowel o, in the place of the vowel
o. 0 has an exclusive, d a general sense: — Nooku tenet
kdinga, this home is my own.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 39
Ndaku tenei Jcdinga, this is my home (that is to say,
I have a personal interest in it) .
So that speaking in a general sense we use the form
o, speaking in an exclusive sense we use the form o.
There are other modifications which, while not inter-
fering with the rule just laid down, go to show that a is
largely used in the active sense, and o in the passive
sense : —
Te hinganga a Ngdpuhi, the felling of Ngapuhi,
(Ngapuhi slew) .
Te hinganga o Ngdpuhi, the falling of Ngapuhi,
(Ngapuhi were slain).
He ki mdaku, a statement for me (to make).
He Tel nooku, a statement for me (i.e., about me),
(affecting me personally).
Ma taaku ivaha, for my vocal-organs (to declare).
Mo tooku walia, for my palate (for my own food).
Ndana ake tdana he, his difficulty is of his own
seeking (yet it affects others).
Noona ake toona he, his difficulty is a matter entirely
of his own.
He patu mdaku, a weapon for me (to use against
others) .
He patu mooku, a weapon for me, (to be used against
me).
He aha a Au, what have you got generally?
He aha o Au, what do you actually possess?
PAST POSSESSIVE.
(NOTE. — i, sign of past tense.)
Singular.
7 d Au, I had ] te waka, the canoe,
7 d koe, thou hadst I or
7 d la, he (or she) had \ngd ivaka, the canoes
7 d la, it had J
40
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Dual.
7 a tdua, you and I had }te wdka, the canoe,
7 a mdua, he (or she) and I had I or
I a korua, you two had \ngd wdka, the canoes
/ a rdua, they two had J
Triplial.
7 a tdtou, we three (including 1
you) had \te waka, the canoe,
7 a mdtou, we three (excluding I or
you) had \ngd waka, the canoes
7 a koutou, you three had
7 a rdtou, they three had J
7 a teat £e wafca, who had the canoe?
PRESENT POSSESSIVE.
(Kei, at, literally signifies contact.)
Singular : —
Singular.
Kei d Au, I have
Kei d koe, thou hast
Kei a 7 a, he (or she) has
Kei d la, it has
Dual.
Kei a tdua, you and I have
Kei a mdua, he (or she) and I \ te waka, the canoe,
have
Kei a korua, you two have
Kei a rdua, they two have
Triplial.
Kei a tdtau,vfe three (including
you) have
te waka, the canoe,
or
ngd waka, the canoes
or
ngd waka, the canoes
Kei a mdtou, we three (exclud-
ing you) have
Kei a koutou, you three have
Kei a rdtou, they three have
Kei d wai te waka, who has the canoe!
te waka, the canoe,
or
ngd waka, the canoes
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
41
te waka, the canoe,
or
ngd waka, the canoes
FUTURE PROSPECTIVE POSSESSIVE.
(To add to what one already possesses, is the idea.)
Singular.
Mdaku, mooku, for me, for mine 1 te waka, the canoe,
Mdau, moon, for thee, for thine I or
Mdana, moona, for his, for hers \ngd waka, the canoes
Mdana, moona, for its J
Dual.
Md or mo tdua, for you and me
Md or mo mdua, for him (or
her) and me
Md or mo korua, for you two
Md or mo rdua, for the two of
them
Triplial.
Md or mo tdtou, for us three
(including you)
Md or mo mdtou, for us three
(excluding you)
Md or mo koutou, for you three
Md or mo rdtou, for the three
of them.
Md wai te waka, for whom is the canoe?
We see that possessive pronouns have as prefix, nd or
MO-, td or to; md or mo. It follows then, as a matter
of course, that the balance of the term, nd-aku, to-oku, or
md-ana, is largely the pronoun itself. This fact is
apparently overlooked by the majority of writers, gram-
marians and dictionary -makers, for they invariably write
these terms in the following way, naku, toku, mana, etc.
This should not be, for it completely alters the sense, as
the following examples clearly show: —
te waka, the canoe,
or
ngd waka, the canoes
INCORRECT FORMS.
Kia mana mai.
He kai man.
Ko au i taka ilio.
Keihea auf
CORRECT FORMS.
Kia mdana mai.
He kai mdau.
Ko d Au i taka iho.
Keihea d Auf
42 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
INCOREECT FORMS. CORRECT FORMS.
He Pu maku Tie Pu mddku.
Kia mau ai te tikanga. Kia mdau ai te tikanga.
Hei mahi maku tamariki Hei mahi mdaku tamariki.
Hoatu ana. Hoatu 6 ana.
Kei au te wai. Kei a au te wai.
Ko au anake. Ko 5 Au anake.
Now, each of the examples in the first column is what
the French term a clause of "squinting construction,"
i.e., looking two ways at once. I translate the first two
literally : —
Kia mana mai, let it be confirmed: which is not the
meaning that the writer intends to convey.
He kai mau, some carried food: again, not the writer's
meaning.
On the other hand, each of the examples given in the
second column conveys but the one definite meaning: —
Kia mdana mai, let it be for him (to decide) : — He kai
mdau, some food for you: — meanings which the
examples in first column are intended to but do not
explicitly convey.
All of which impresses the fact that combinations of
certain letters and sounds, have certain well-defined
meanings, which teachers and students alike should
accurately master. If a vowel be deleted from ' ' do not, ' '
it becomes ' ' don 't " ; it is merely a question of grammar
and orthography.
Kl, to.
(To grant or allow ; to solicit as a loan.)
Ki Ahau to waka, let me have (the loan of) your canoe.
Ki a mdua to waka, let us-two have (the loan of)
your canoe.
Ki a mdtou to waka, let us-three have (the loan of)
your canoe.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 43
Ki a wai te waka, to whom is the canoe to be taken
(lent) ?
A person asking for anything right out will use the
full sign of the possessive case thus: — Mdaku to waka,
give me your canoe (absolutely).
SOME FORMS OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN.
Te turoro moona nei te rongoa, the invalid for whom
the medicine is intended.
Te tamaiti i taka iho nei i te rdkau, the boy who fell
down from the tree.
Ko koe te tangata i he ai Au, thou art the man who
caused me to err.
Te tangata noona nei te whare, the man who owns the
house.
Ko tehea rdnei te tangata, am doubtful which is the
man.
Te tangata i d la nei taaku waka, the man who had my
canoe.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
(Uses of Ko, the verb substantive.)
The interrogative pronouns are wai, aha, and whea or
hea.
Ko wai Au, who am I?
Ko wai hoe, who art thou?
Ko wai la, who is he (she, or it) ?
Ko wai md end, who are those persons?
Nd wai tend, whose is that ?
Md wai tend, for whom is that?
I d wai tenei, who had this ?
Ko wai tdau e Tci na, of whom do you speak?
Hei d wai tenei, who is to have this ?
Ko wai hei hua, who is to know positively?
44 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Ko wai hei maharatanga mdau, whom have you to
consider?
Ko wai rd tenei, who ever is this?
Ko wai kei konei, who is here?
Ko wai toou ingoa, what (literally, who) is your name?
Ko wai hei tohutohu i a koe, who is to dictate to you ?
Aha, what.
He aha tdau, what have you got (there) ?
I ahatia koe, what happened to you ?
He aha i rere-ke ai tenei, what has caused the
alteration in this?
/ aha a la ki d koe, what did he unto you ?
Md tend kd aha ai, what difference will that make ?
/ aha koe, what did you? Kd aha koe, what will you
do?
He aha oti, what else is it ? He aha tend, what is that ?
He aha taana mate, what is his ailment?
He aha koe i hdere ai, what induced you to go?
E aha ana koe, what are you doing?
Kd aha ko ia, what about it ?
He aha tenei tangata, what is this man?
Kei aha, lest what: equal to whyl
He aha ia, what is it ?
Whea, where.
E hdere ana koe ko-whed }
E ahu ana koe ko-whea [ where are you S°mS to ?
/ w hea koe, where were you ?
/ hdere mai koe i whea }
I ahu mai koe i whea j where did you come f rom 7
/ md-whea mai koe, by which way did you come ?
I haere mai koe ina whea }
N6na-wheakoeitideremai\when dld y°U C0me hither?
ai
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 45
A whea hoe hoki ai, when will you go back ?
Ed tika koe md-whea, by which way will you £0?
Ko te-whea, toou kdinga, which is your home? (where
do you live) ?
Kei whea to hoa, where is your companion ?
No whea mai to hoa, where is your companion from ?
Hei whea te Hui e korerotia nei, where is the proposed
meeting to be held?
Pe whea te roa e noho huihui ai rdtou, how long will
they remain assembled?
Ko e-whea kdinga i pahure i te waipuke, which
villages escaped the flood?
I-na-whea, when (past) ? A-whea, when (future) ?
Mo-whea, wherefor? Te-hea, which? P 'e-whea, how?
No-whea, where of? (No-whea is also used in the sense
of, what authority have you for saying so ? )
(Note — te-whea which? (singular) e-whea, which?
(plural)
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
These have been already indicated in the "Articles,"
but a knowledge of elegant Maori requires some further
consideration of them (see diagram p. x.) : —
Simple. Fuller. Exhaustive.
Au nei Ko Au nei Ko Au nei tenei : I : it is I ;
this is I.
Koe na Ko koe na Ko koe na tend : thou : 'tis
thou; etc.
la ra Ko la ra Ko la ra terd : he (or she) , etc.
Konei nei Kona na Kord rd : here, there, yonder.
7 a nei I a na I a ra: it is this. It is that.
It is the other.
Penei, such as this. Pend, such as that. Perd, such as
the other.
46 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
A close study of the foregoing enables a just apprecia-
tion of such nice sentences as :
Ngd manu e rerere nei.
Ngd mea kua kitea nei.
Te tamaiti i taka iho nei.
Te tangata i hdere atu nei.
Keiwhea rd te kurl e kimihia kautia nei?
Ngd rdkau e tu mai na.
Tend pea Te Earawa te kori mai na.
Te tangata i riri mai ra.
He mahi kino terd e mahia mai ra.
Terd te tangata ra te hdere mai ra; etc.
A change of position of the article te and its fellow
nei materially alters the sense in such phrases as : —
No mdtou tenei kdinga, this home is our own.
No mdtou te kdinga nei, this home is (one of) our own.
No mdtou nei te kdinga, the home is ours (and not
theirs) .
A phrase is amplified from simple to elegant in this
way: —
Pororere te kaki, snapped the neck.
Pororere iho te kaki.
Pororere tonu iho te kaki.
Pororere tonu iho nei te kaki.
DISTRIBUTIVE PRONOUNS.
The pronoun of the neuter gender, ia, also signifies
each : —
la hapu, each tribe. la rangi, each day. la tangata,
each man. Tahi, each one.
1 kite tahi Au i a ratou, I saw each one of them.
No rdua-tahi tenei, this belongs to each one of those
two.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 47
Rd-tahi ka hdere ano a la, each alternate day he again
goes.
/ kite taki-tahi Au i a korua, I saw each of you two
separately.
Rdtou takMahi, each one of them.
Rdtou tahi, every one of them.
Te-tahi, literally the one, is used in speaking of either —
Te-tahi 6 korua, either of you-two.
E kore Au e whiwhi ki te-tahi 5 end, I shall not secure
either of those.
The addition of the negative, kdhore, conveys the sense
of neither: —
Kahore tetahi o mdua i noho, neither of us two stayed.
In making a distribution the word rato is used: —
Kua rato katoa rdtou, each and every one of them has-
been served.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.
Kotahi anake i hdere, only one went.
Kaua tetahi e tohungia, let none be spared.
A wai tangata, any man.
Eo etahi 6 rdtou i pahure, some of them escaped.
He torutoru nei mdtou, there are but a few of us.
He tokomaha rdtou, there are many of them.
Tdtakitahi nei and koutou, there are few of you,
individually.
Ko mdtou katoa tenei, this is all of us.
Tenei tu tangata, such a man as this.
He tangata pena koe, such a man art thou.
Kua mate ngdtahi rdua, they-two have both died.
Ko tetahi tangata tau-hou i reira, a certain stranger
was there.
Ko terd te mea i mate, the other is the one who died.
48 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOE
Rd and tetahi 6 ratou, there is still another of them.
He tang at a noa-iho tend, that man is nothing (a
nobody) .
He tangata whai-tikanga tenei, this man is something
(a somebody).
Aha koa ko wai, no matter whom, anybody.
Kdhore kau he tangata o konei, there are none (no
men) here.
Kotahi kau te tangata i kite ai Au, I saw but one man,
.alone.
ON ADJECTIVES.
An adjective is a word used with a noun to limit the
.application. Adjectives are of three kinds: —
1. Of quality, as : he tangata pai, a good man.
2. Of quantity, as: tekau ngd kuri, ten dogs.
3. Of distribution, as: Te tangata nei, this man. Te
awa, na, that river. Te puke ra, yonder hill.
ON ADVERBS.
An adverb is a word used to modify the meaning of
& verb: —
Marama ana taana kerero, he speaks distinctly: his
.speaking is clear.
He whare nui rawa tenei, this is a very large house.
Pai whakaharahara nei taana tuhituhi, his writing is
exceedingly good.
Of time : — Nei, now. 7 reira, thereupon, then. / mua
ake nei, lately. Kotahi ra, once. Taro ake, soon.
Tdtakitahi, seldom. Ahea, when.
Of place: — Nei, here. Reira, there. Whea, where.
Nowhea, whence. Tu-ke, apart. Ngdtahi, together.
Runga ake, above.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 49
Of manner: — Nanahu, wisely. Pai, well. Atahanga,
gently. Whai-whakdaronga, prudently.
Of degree : — Nui, much. Iti, little. Ano, only. Pend,
so. Tini, abundant. Erangi, rather. Rawa, very.
Hedi, enough. Kdati, that will do. Ehia, how many?
Maha, ample.
Cause and effect: — Kei aha, why? Mo te aha, where-
f or ? No reira, therefore.
Certainty and uncertainty: — Pono tonu, truly. Koia
tonu, certainly. Pea, perhaps. Eapea, presumably.
Eanei, or not. Aua, doubtful. Hore, no, not.
ON *KO, To be, state of being, (ko-re, not to be).
(See reo, voice. Arero, tongue. Ko-rero, to speak.
To speak is synonymous with To be.)
Ko, am art, is; first, second and third person of the
verb substantive.
Ko, are ; plural of the verb substantive.
Ko (past tense) was, e.g., ko wai i reira, who was
there? Ko Au, I was. Ko Au taua tamaiti, I was the
said boy.
la, fourth person.
Ai, verb auxiliary; may, possible to be.
Kia, to let be, let there be.
Kua, been.
Ko ia, so be it; be it so; so it is: largely used in
expressing reality, in assenting to actual facts.
The following shows the usages and the literal sense
of Ko:—
Ko wai tend, who is that? Ko Au, it is I.
Ko koe, d, ko wai koe, 'tis thou, and whom art thou?
*See Appendix, p. 244.
50 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
K6 Au ra, ko Rangi, I am Rangi, to be sure.
K6 wai rawa ra la, who ever can it be (sotto voce) ?
Ko Rangi aha koe, what Rangi are you ?
K6 Rangikura, tama a Te Tai, I am Rangikura, son of
Te Tai.
Ko whea koe, where are you going to ? Ko te Tdheke
Au, I am going to the Taheke.
Ko wai he hoa moou, who is to be your companion ?
Ko koe, you are, etc.
We have already seen that it is proper to use ko as a
prefix to the numeration of persons ; ko is so used also as
a prefix to proper names and pronouns: —
Ko Rangi, ko Rongo, ko Tane, etc.
Ko matou tahi i hdere, we went together.
CHAPTER VI.
ON THE VERB, MOOD AND TENSE.
A verb is a word that asserts something about a subject.
Verbs are of two classes — (a) transitive, and (6)
intransitive : —
(a) Patua ana e Tai te Kurl, Tai struck the dog. Here
Tai is the subject, Patua the action, and Kurl the object.
(&) Kei te moe a Hine, Hine sleeps. Kei te kaukau
rdtou, they bathe.
TENSES.
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary hitherto
advanced (see Maunsell's grammar), the tenses in
Maori are absolutely clear, and their signs unmis-
takable.
E is the sign of the future, Ana is the sign of the past ;
united, they represent the connecting link between the
past and the future by becoming the sign of present-
progressive action : —
Taka ana Au, I fell. Mamde ana Au, I was hurt.
Tangi ana Au, I wept.
E taka ana Au, I am falling. E tangi ana Au, I am
weeping.
E taka Au, I shall fall. E tangi Au, I shall weep.
The sign of the perfect tense, kua, is equally clear : —
Kua riro rdtou, they have now gone.
Kua hoki mai rdtou, they have now returned.
Kua whakade Au, I have now consented.
Kua oti, it is now finished.
Kua mate a la, he is now dead.
51
52 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
INDICATIVE MOOD.
(Ko, the verb substantive, is the universal indicator
of persons, places, and things.)
Singular.
Ko Au, I am Ko koe, thou art
Ko la, he (or she) is Ko la, it is.
Dual.
Ko tdua, thou and I are. Ko mdua, he (or she) and
I are.
Ko korua, you two are. Ko rdua, they two are.
Triplial.
Ko tdtou, you and I are. Ko mdtau, they and I are.
Ko koutou, you are. Ko rdtou, they are.
EXAMPLES : —
Ko te whare tend o Nuku, this is the house of Nuku.
Ko taana tamaiti tend, that is his child.
Ko 6 ona whanaunga ena, those are his relatives.
Ko taana kupu tenei, this is his word.
A Maori does not say: I am blind. He says: I am a
blind man; or, Ko Au he tangata matapo.
ACTUAL FORM OP PRESENT TENSE.
EIRI — ANGER.
E riri ana a Pou, Pou is angering.
E riria ana a Pou, Pou is being angered at.
E riria ana e Pou, being angered at by Pou.
Singular.
E riri ana Au, I am angering.
E riri ana koe, thou art angering.
E riri ana a la, he (or she) is angering.
E riri ana la, it is angering.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 53
Dual.
E riri ana taua, you and I are angering.
E riri ana maua, he or she and I are angering.
E riri ana korua, you two are angering.
E riri ana raua, they two are angering.
Triplial.
E riri ana tatou, you and I (3) are angering.
E riri ana mdtou, they and I (3) are angering.
E riri ana koutou, you (3) are angering.
E riri ana rdtou, they (3) are angering.
The multitudinous is expressed by the word katoa,
which signifies all. Thtis, E riri ana koutou katoa, ye are
all angering.
In the foregoing examples of present progressive action
it will be noticed that the verb, riri — to anger, is situated
between the twin signs E — ana. It will be further
noticed that those twin-signs correspond to the English
terminal, ing, as in angering. That is a rule.
ON THE PAST TENSE.
Riri ana, angered; did anger.
Singular.
Riri ana a Au, I angered.
Riri ana a koe, thou didst anger.
Riri ana a la, he (or she) angered.
Riri ana a la, it did anger.
Dual.
Riri ana tdua, thou and I angered.
Riri ana maua, he (or she) and I angered.
Riri ana korua, you two angered.
Riri ana raua, they two angered.
54 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Triplial.
Biri ana tdtou, you and I angered.
Riri ana mdtou, they and I angered.
Riri ana koutou, you three angered.
Riri ana rdtou, they three angered.
Multitudinous, — Riri ana koutou katoa, ye all angered.
Ana thus corresponds to the English word did, or the
terminal ed.
I, a sign of Past Tense.
There is a strong tendency in Maori to give the time of
an action at the beginning of the sentence. In the fore-
going examples of past tense it is necessary to place the
verb and not the tense sign at the head of the sentence.
By using the letter i as a tense sign, the Maori is able to
give the time of the action first : —
Singular.
I riri Au, I angered.
7 riri koe, you angered.
I riri a la, he (or she) angered.
I riri a la, it angered.
Dual.
7 riri tdua, you and I angered.
I riri mdua, he (or she) and I angered.
I riri korua, you two angered.
I riri rdua, they two angered.
Triplial.
I riri tatou, you and I angered.
1 riri mdtou, they and I angered.
7 riri koutou, you three angered.
7 riri rdtou, they three angered.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 55
ON THE PERFECT TENSE.
Kua, the sign of the perfect tense, denotes an action
that has just been completed: Kua tuhituhi Au, I have
now written.
Singular.
Kua riri Au, I have now angered.
Kua riri koe, you have now angered.
Kua riri a la, he (or she) has now angered.
Kua riri la, it has now angered.
Dual.
Kua riri taua, you and I have now angered.
Kua riri maua, he (or she) and I have now angered.
Kua riri korua, you two have now angered.
Kua riri rdua, they two have now angered.
Triplial.
Kua riri tdtou, you and I have now angered.
Kua riri matou, they and I have now angered.
Kua riri koutou, you three have now angered.
Kua riri rdtou, they three have now angered.
Multitudinous: Kua riri koutou katoa, you have now
all angered.
ON THE PAST PERFECT TENSE.
The past perfect tense denotes an action that was
completed at a specified time now past. It is indicated
by ke associated with kua, the sign of perfect tense.
• Singular.
Kua riri ke Au, I had already angered.
Kua riri ke koe, thou hadst already angered.
Kua riri ke a la, he (or she) had already angered.
Kua riri ke ia, it had already angered.
56 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Dual.
Kua riri ke taua, you and I had already angered.
Kua riri ke maua, he (or she) and I had already
angered.
Kua riri ke korua, you two had already angered.
Kua riri ke raua, they two had already angered.
Triplial.
Kua riri ke tatou, you and I had already angered.
Kua riri ke mdtou, they and I had already angered.
Kua riri ke koutou, you three had already angered.
Kua riri ke rdtou, they three had already angered.
Multitudinous: Kua riri ke koutou katoa, ye had all
previously angered.
Kua riria ketia e ahau, had already been angered
at by me.
NOTE: — Riri, expressed anger.
Puku-riri, unexpressed anger.
Rlriri, to quarrel.
ON THE FUTURE TENSE.
E is the sign of future tense : — E tuhituhi Au, I shall
write.
Singular.
E riri Au, I shall anger.
E riri koe, thou wilt anger.
E riri a la, he (or she) will anger.
E riri a la, it will anger.
(E kore koe e riri, thou wilt not anger.)
Dual.
E riri tdua, you and I shall anger.
E riri maua, he (or she) and I shall anger.
E riri korua, you two will anger.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 57
E riri rdua, they two will anger.
(E kore korua e riri ki a la, you two will not anger
unto him.)
Triplial.
E riri tdtou, we three (including you) will anger.
E riri mdtou, we three (excluding you) will anger.
E riri koutou, you three shall anger.
E riri rdtou, they three shall anger.
(E kore koutou e riri ki a Au, you three will not anger
unto me.)
When intended to refer to personal action or intention
the future sense is very commonly expressed by "Ko te,"
being the verb substantive and definite article singular : —
Ko te riri pu korua ki a Au, you two will certainly
anger unto me.
Ko te whakdde pu a la, he will most assuredly consent.
Ko te hdere atu mdua ki reira, we two intend to go
there.
Ko te para Au i taaku wderenga, I intend to clear my
(new) cultivation-ground.
Ko te aha koef, what are you about to do?
Ko te hdere mai pea rdua kia kite i d koe, they two
will probably come along to see you.
DUAL TENSE.
In compound sentences, two tense signs frequently
occur. The second is sometimes merely a repetition of
the first, as: —
I kite Au i d la i taana tdenga mai : I saw him on his
arrival.
Korero mai ana a la, d, hdere atu ana : he spoke to us
and then went away.
58 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Sometimes the second presents a complete change of
tense, as: —
I kite Au i a la e noho ana i te taha o te ara : I saw
him, (he is) sitting (relatively present tense) at the side
of the road.
Or:—
I a Au i haere atu nei e noho ana a la i te taha o te ara :
When I went along, he (is) sitting at the side of the
road.
The time of the action is past (i), but the speaker
makes it relatively present by introducing e-ana, the
twin-signs of present progressive action. In such cases it
serves the purposes of clarity to place the true time of the
action (i) at the head of the sentence, as shown here. The
following form is to be avoided : - —
E noho ana a la i te taha o te ara, i a Au i hdere atu
nei: he (is) sitting at the side of the road, when I went
along.
Again : —
I a Au ka tde atu nei, kua riro katoa atu rdtou ki
tdtahi: when I arrived (past) there, they had already
(literally have now, perfect) all gone to the coast. Here
the use of kua (the sign of the perfect tense) , diverts the
action from past to the relatively perfect.
With these examples before him, the student may
intelligently proceed to work out similar forms of dual
tense.
EMPHATIC FORM OF THE ACTIVE VOICE.
Singular.
E riri ana and Au, koe, or, la :
I do anger, thou dost, he, she, or it doth anger.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 59
Dual.
E riri ana and Tdua, Mdua, Kdrua, or, Rdua :
You and I, he (or, she) and I, you two, they two — (it-
anger.
Triplial.
E riri ana and Tdtou, Mdtou, Kdutou, Rdtou :
We three, us three, you three, they three — do anger.
Subjunctive Mood.
Mehemea e riri ana and Au : If I do anger.
Ahakoa i riri and Au: Although I did anger.
Imperative Mood.
Me riri koe, kdrua, kdutou: you, you-two, you-thre.?,
must anger.
Negative Forms.
Kd hore kau d dku nei riri : I have no anger : I do n;;t
anger.
Kihai Au nei i riri : I did not anger.
Prohibitive Forms.
Kaua koe na e riri: do not you anger.
Kei riri koe na: (I advise) you not to anger.
Interrogative Forms.
E riri ana koia koe : do you truly anger ?
E riri ana rdnei koe : do you actually anger or not ?
7 riri koia koe : did you truly anger ?
/ riri rdnei koe : did you anger or not ?
Miscellaneous Forms.
And ki dhau e riri ana koe: it seems to me, thou art
angering.
7 te mea e riri ana koe : as thou art angering.
7 mea Au i riri koe : I felt that thou didst anger.
No te mea i riri koe : because thou didst anger.
60 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
7 d koe e riri ana : whilst thou wert angering.
I te mea kua riri koe : as you have now angered.
Ki te mea e riri a la ; should he anger.
Tend and pea i riri a la : perchance he did anger.
Kd hore nei and koe i riri noa : why, you have not yet
angered.
Nd reira ahau i riri ai : therefore did I anger.
Ko te take tonu tend 6 taaku riri: that is the precise
cause of my anger.
Nd wai, d, kd riri Au : and eventually I became angry.
Kd kawe nei, d, riri ana a au : and it continued until at
last I angered.
E tde mai Au, kd riri koe : whene 'er I arrive, you anger.
I hua Au e, e kore koe e riri : I had the impression that
you would not anger.
Ko Au kia tde wawe mai, kd riri ai koe : I am to arrive
before you may anger.
/ pohehe Au e, e kore a la e riri : I was under the mis-
conception that he would not anger.
Ko Au kia mate, ka klia ai koe "he tangata" : I am to
be dead, then you may be declared to be " a man. ' '
Passive Forms.
Past : — 7 rlria ahau e rdua : I was rebuked by those two
(by the two of them).
Perfect: — Kua rlria ahau e rdua: they-two have now
rebuked me.
Present : — E rlria ana Au e rdua : I am being rebuked
by the-two of them.
Future: — Ko te riria au e la: I shall be rebuked by
him.
Jussive Tense.
Kia Mdrama : let it be light.
Kia tika : let it be just.
CHAPTER VII.
HEGULAR USE OF TENSE-SIGNS IN SENTENCE
CONSTRUCTION.
Assuming that sufficient examples have now been
•given as aids to the formation of simple sentences,
examples in compound sentences may now be considered.
In speaking, naturally enough, different modes are
employed in the arrangement of the parts of a compound
sentence. The method here presented is, owing to its
clearness, that usually adopted by the best Native
-speakers.
In order to admit a full, if rapid, employment of the
various tenses, we may assume that some person (or
persons) has been, is, or, will be — asked, to go to some
place to fetch some article.
Having assumed this it is further necessary to premise
that the consent of such person is an essential. That
consent (or, refusal) is made to rule the sentence, the
several parts of which proceed in the following order : —
(a) The Tense.
(6) Declaration and person concerned.
(c) Locality of the object to be brought.
(d) The verb, as, TiTci^-to fetch.
(e) The object itself, as, Waka — canoe.
The exercise is set out in the first person singular. By
the substitution in its place of any other person (or,
number of persons) , the whole of the personal pronouns
may be used ; or, any noun or proper name, as required.
It is to be observed that the concluding clause may be
62 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
used with any one of the introductory clauses. In
speaking the rising inflection is used prior to the close
of a long sentence : —
PAST PERFECT.
Kua ichakade ke Au — kia hdere atu ki te Roto, ki te
tiki i te waka.
I have long since consented — to go along to the lake to
Iftrh the canoe.
PAST.
I whakade pea Au — kia hdere atu ki te Roto, ki te tiki i
te waka.
I perhaps did consent — to go along to the lake, to fetch
the canoe.
/ whakade Au — kia hdere atu ki te Roto, ki te tiki i te
waka.
I did consent — to go along to the lake, to fetch the
canoe.
PERFECT.
Kua whakade pea Au — kia hdere atu ki te Roto, ki te
tiki i te waka.
I perhaps have now consented — to go to the lake, to
fetch the canoe.
Kua whakade Au — kia haere ki te Roto ki te tiki i te
waka.
I have now consented — to go to the lake, to fetch the
canoe.
PRESENT.
E pai ana Au ki te whakade — kia haere ki te Roto, ki te
tiki i te waka.
I am willing to consent — to go to the lake, to fetch the
canoe.
E whakade ana Au — kia haere ki te Roto, ki te tiki i te
waka.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 63
I am consenting — to go to the lake, to fetch the canoe.
Future : —
E whakade pea Au — kia haere atu ki te Roto, ki te
whakahoki i te waka.
I may consent — to go along to the lake, to return the
canoe.
E whakade Au — kia, etc. (add concluding clause as
before).
I will consent — to, etc.
E whakadro ana Au ki te whakade — kia,
I am inclining to consent — to,
Terd ake pea Au e whakade — kia,
I will probably eventually consent — to,-
Terd ake Au e whakade — kia— —
I will eventually consent — to,—
Terd pea e kore Au e whakade — kia,~
It may be that I will decline to consent — to,-
E kore Au e whakade — kia,
I will not consent — to,— —
E kore rawa nei Au e whakade — kia,-
Verily, I will absolutely decline to consent — to,-
Imperative : —
Me whakade koe — kia,
You must consent — to,— —
Kaua koe e whakade — kia,
Do not you consent — to, —
Kei whakade koe — kia,
(I warn) you not to consent — to,-
Optative : —
Kia whakade ahau — ki te,
To make me consent — to,
Kia whakade ai ahau — ki te,
In order to induce me to consent — to,-
64 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Subjunctive : —
Mehemea ka whakade Au — kia,
If I then consent — to,
Mehemea e kore Au e whakade — kia,
Should I not consent — to,
Narrative forms: —
Whakade ana Au — kia, —
I agreed — to,
Klhai Au i whakade kia hdere atu ki te Awa, ki te
kaukau i te wai.
I did not consent to go along to the river, to bathe in
the water.
The incident may be commented on, thus: —
Whakade ana hoki rdua — kia,
So they-two consented — to, — —
He aha rawa te take i whakade al a la — kia,
Whatever cause induced him to consent — to,
He alia rd te take i kore ai korua e whakade — kia,-
What possible reason is there that you-two did not
consent — to,
He aha koia te take e whakade ai mdua — kia,
What is the reason that can be offered to induce us-two
to consent — to,
Ka, not a tense sign.
So extensive is the use of the particle ka, that scholars,
such as Williams and Maunsell, have been deceived into
regarding it as a true tense sign. That it is not so may be
demonstrated in a momentary consideration of the
simplest sentence, such as : —
Ka kite Au.
Here no amount of erudition is equal to a discovery of
the tense, therefore, time of the action ; because ka does
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 65
not indicate that. Observe the change with the introduc-
tion of a true tense-sign : —
Kite ana Au ) .
77-, ; 1 saw
1 Kite au
E kite ana Au, I see.
Kua kite Au, I have now seen.
E kite Au } T •
v , 7 ., - 1 shall see.
Ko te kite Au
Ka can be intelligibly used only : —
(a) When the tense is clearly set out in the same
sentence —
Ka kite Au apopo, I shall see to-morrow.
(6) When the time is clearly understood, —
E haere ana koe ki Kaikohet are you going to
Kaikohe ?
Ae, yes.
Ka haere hoki Au, then I will go too.
In those forms it is used merely as a colloquial substi-
tute for tense, the tense being otherwise made clear; and
it may be rendered by then, or, now.
(c) Where tense is unnecessary it may be rendered by
this is, or. that is :—
Kd^pai, that is good ; kd kino, that is bad; kd tika, that
is right ; kd lie, that is wrong; kd reka, that is sweet;
kd kau'a, that is bitter ; kd hore, that is not so, etc.
ON THE NEGATIVE.
We have just been considering various uses of the
particle kd. It is usually prefixed to hore and kore.
common expressions of negation and dissent — kd hore.
In the Waikato and along the greater part of the East
Coast (North Island) kd hore has come to be used to
express almost every conceivable form of negative; so
66 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
much so that the aspirate has been entirely worn off. and
kaore is now heard most painfully free. It is, therefore,
necessary to place before the student such other forms as
are proper to the language : —
Kd hore : no, not so. Ka here noa iho : nothing of the
kind.
Hore rawa: verily no. Kore rawa: not so, verily.
Hore kau he tangata i reira: there was nobody there.
Ka kore i tend, hei tetahi: if not that, try some other.
Ka kore nei a la i kl mai : he did not tell me.
Klhai i roa : 'twas not long.
Klhai Au i whakaae : I did not assent.
Klhai ano ("/.-/ano") i whakaae noa: has not yet
assented.
Ed kore a la e kl mai: if he does not tell (you) .
E kore Au e whakaae : I will not assent.
He mea noa tend : that is a matter of no consequence.
Kaua koe e whakaae : do not you assent.
Ka hori tend: that (statement) is incorrect.
Ka tito tend: that (statement) is an invention.
Ka teka tend: that (statement) is false.
Kd 'he tend : that (statement) is wrong.
Kei whakaae koe : you had better not assent.
E hara i tena: that is not it.
E hara i a Au : it is not mine.
These examples suffice to show that kihai largely
indicates the past ; ka hore, the present ; and e kore the
future.
A peculiar use in negation is given to the definite
article, te; here it is strongly accented:—
Te rongo te tamaiti nei: this child will not obey.
No reira An te hdere atu ai : therefore I would not go.
He aha koe i te korero ai : why did you not speak, or,
say so ?
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
67
ON ANTONYMS OR EXTREMES.
A.
Ad, light of day.
Ata, morning.
Ara, road, path, way.
A, to drive.
Ahuahua, to resemble.
Aitud, unfortunate, bad
omen.
Anewa, weak, listless.
Apiti, side by side.
Apiapi, close together.
Apo, mean, grasping.
Apuapu, crammed, stuffed.
Aral, to screen, block.
Arita, eager, keen.
Aroha, pity, love, sorrow.
Am, to chase.
Atadhua, pretty.
Aica, river, channel.
Angi-hait, gentle zephyr.
Awliitu, regret.
Aukati, to prevent.
Po, darkness of night.
Ahiahi, evening.
Ara-kore, roadless, pathless.
Arahi, arataki, to lead.
Rereke, not to resemble.
Waimarie, fortunate, good
omen.
Ua-ua, strenuous.
Tirara, scattered.
W&hewehe, separated.
Marere, free, generous,
liberal.
Korokoro, loose.
Whakawdtea, to free of
obstruction.
Akuto, slow, backward.
Tukino, show resentment.
Whakataki, to meet.
Kinokino, ugly, ill-favoured
Awaken, a dug ditch or
drain.
Awhd, gale, storm.
Koa, rejoice over.
Awhina, to assist.
E.
Eke, to get upon, mount. Heke, get down from, dis-
mount.
Ene, to flatter. Hanihani, to disparage,
speak ill of.
Eti, shrink, show timidity. Mdia, fearless, bold.
Ewa, extol, exalt. T-aunu, to revile.
I.
Ikeike, high. Pdpaku, low.
Inaki, press, crowd to- Taiwehe, separate and free,
gether.
68 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Inoi, to entreat. Tono, to demand.
loio, hard, stiff. Ngdwari, soft, yielding.
Iro, submissive. Turi, unsubmissive.
Iti, little. Nui, rahi, large.
Iwi, bone, tribe. Kikokiko, flesh.
O.
0, provision for journey. 0-kore, without provision.
Okooko, carry in arms. Pikau,waha, carry on back.
Omaki, move swiftly. Ata-haere, go slowly.
Onge, scarce. Tini, plentiful.
Ora, alive and well. Mate, dead.
Oreore, very dry. Tere, very watery.
Oru, boggy. Hard, firm.
Ola, green, uncooked. Mdda, ripe, cooked.
Whakaoti, to finish. Timata, to begin.
Ouou, torutoru, few. Afaha, many.
U.
U, firm (as a post) . Tungdngd, loose (as a post)
Ua, rain. paki, rainless, fine after
rain.
Uaki, open (as a door). Tutaki, shut (as a door).
Uho, heart (of a tree). Taitea, sap (of a tree).
Ukauka, preserved, sound. Pirau, rotted.
Ukupapa, all dealt with. Toenga, residue (undealt
with).
Umaraha, widely extended. Whaiti, in narrow compass.
Umiki, awhio, go around. Poka-pu, go direct, short
line.
Unu, undo, untie. Here, to tie.
Unuora, dearest in life. Maud-hara, object of
hatred.
TJnga. to invite. A, to drive away.
Uri, descendant. Tupuna, ancestor.
Uru, to associate one's self Puta-ki-ivaho, disassociate
one's self.
Uru-kehu, light-haired. Uru-pango, dark-haired.
Utu, payment, price. Utu-kore, paymentless.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
69
Uwha, female (of animals). Tourawhi, male (of
animals).
Uwhi, to cover over. Huke, uncover, expose.
Ha.
lid, tasty.
Baku, disinter.
Haka, song and dance.
Hakahaka, short in height.
Hakari, a feast.
Hdkerekere, downcast.
Hakiki, unkind, overbear-
ing.
Hakune, careful, deliberate.
Hang a, make, build up.
Hdpai, lift up.
Hara, guilt.
Haumaruru, languid.
Haunga, odour, smell.
Hauora, revived.
Haupu, place in a heap.
He, wrong.
Whakahe, mislead, put
wrong.
Hika, to inflame.
Hiwi, ridge of a hill.
Hohonu, deep.
Hohoni, graze surface.
Hono, to join.
Huna, to conceal.
Hd-kore, tasteless.
Nehu, inter, bury.
Tangi, song of lament.
Teitei, tall in height.
Kai-kore, without food.
Harihari, elevated, glad.
Atawhai, kind, gentle.
Hikaka, careless, rash.
Tukituki, break down.
Tuku-iho, let down.
Hara-kore, guiltless.
Whai-ngoi, energetic.
Haunga-kore, odourless.
He mo, faint.
Akirikiri, to scatter.
Tika, right.
Whakatika, put right.
Tinei, extinguish.
Hdpua, depression.
Pdpaku, shallow.
Ngoto, enter deeply.
Unu, disjoin.
Whakakite, to disclose.
Ka.
Kaitoa, expressing pleasure Pouri, dejection, gloom.
Kakama, nimble, sprightly.
Kapi, covered.
Kakara, scent.
Karanga, to call.
Karawa, mother (other
than human).
Puhoi, sluggish.
Tuwhera, uncovered.
Piro, stench.
Noho-puku, remain silent.
70
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Kati, shut, closed.
Kata, to laugh.
Katau, right (side).
Kateatea, not close.
Kdweka, ridge of a hill.
Kawiu, shrunk.
Ke, unlike.
Keokeo, peak of a hill.
Keulteu, motionless.
Kewha, irresolute.
Ki, full.
Whakaklkl, to instigate.
Kikini, to pinch, nip.
Kino, bad.
Koangiangi, cool.
Rde, forehead.
Kohi, to collect.
Kohure, to dig up.
Kokeke, winding (as river)
Kokiri, dart forward.
Koma, pale.
Kokomo, thrust in (as peg)
Konene, outcast.
Konewa, dream-song.
Konewha, drowsiness.
Konihi, avoiding observa-
tion.
Kongehe, feeble.
Kopiko, backwards and
forwards.
Kokopi, double-in.
Kopuke, make hillocks.
Kora, particle.
Koraha, open country.
Korapa, alarm.
Korara, disperse.
Puare, open.
Tangi, to cry.
Maid, left (side).
Pipiri, close.
Rdordo, valley.
Kowhera, open extended.
A-riterite, to resemble, alike
Horua, steep circular de-
pression.
Koni, to move.
Kaikd, eager.
Takoto-kau, empty.
Peehi, to suppress (bad-
ness) .
Mirimiri, to smooth, fondle.
Pai, good.
Werawera, warm.
Kohamo, back of head.
Rui, to scatter.
Tanu, to bury down.
Kotika, straight (as river).
Tdkiri, dart backward.
Pilpango, darkish.
Unuhi, pull out (as peg).
Tangata-wlienua, man of
the soil.
Waiata, conscious song.
Mata-dra, wakefulness.
Aro-nui, courting observa-
tion.
Ngoi, strength.
Tltika, straight on.
Whakatika, straighten.
Koniarua, make holes.
Kauika, heap.
Ngahere, bush country.
Noho-mdrie, at ease.
Hmliui, assemble.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
71
Kolia, promise.
Koran, having purpose.
Koiua, respect.
Koicde, to divide.
Koirhane, to bend.
Kuene, to urge on.
Kuiki, to desire.
Kunitete, to exchange.
Korongata, unfulfilled
promise.
Koroit-kore, having no pur-
pose.
Tan nu, revile.
Kopiri, to stick together.
WJiakatika, to straighten.
WJiakaware, to delay.
WhakaparahaJco, desireless.
Hoatu-noa, give without
return.
Ma.
Ma, white.
Maeneene, smooth.
Malta, many.
Mahara, to remember.
Main, to work.
Maliuru, contented ease.
Makariri, cold, winter.
Mdkona, food-satisfied.
Mama, not heavy.
Mamdo, distant.
Whakahau, to animate.
Manawareka, pleasing.
Matareka, fondness.
Mate, death.
Matika, rise up.
Matoro, woo, court.
Maiinga, mountain.
Ma mde, pain.
Meko, to withhold.
Moana, ocean.
Moe, to sleep.
MoMo, to know.
Molm, to smoulder.
Mua, before.
Milrere, clever, knowing.
Miikd, wild.
Maiigii, pango, black.
Mdtaratam, rough, prickly.
Torutorii, few.
Wareware, to forget.
Mdngere, to idle.
MdiJii, uneasy.
Raumafo, summer.
Hiakai, food-hunger.
TaimaJia, heavy.
Tata, near.
Mdroli iroli i, dispirited.
Matctharehare, offensive.
Matakaii'a, dislike.
Ora, life.
Takoto, lie down.
WJiakarere, desert.
Mania, plain.
Nauru, eased of pain.
Hoatu, to give.
Tuawhenua, land, country
Ara-ake, to wake.
MoJiio-kore, not to know.
Kd, to be afire.
Muri, behind.
Kuware, unknowing.
Ear at a, tame.
72
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Na.
Nanea, copious.
Whakanano, discredit.
Noa, free of restriction.
Haiti, scarce.
Whakatika, credit.
Tapu, ceremonially
stricted.
re-
Pa.
Pdkani, quarrelsome.
Pana, expel.
Pakaru, to break, smash.
Papatahi, flat (of land).
M drama, clear (as speech)
Pariratanga, intermittent.
Puad, dawn.
Puea, emerge from water.
Puhi, a virgin free.
Puwaha, mouth of river.
Maliaki, good tempered.
Unga, invite.
Whai-hanga, to mend.
Pukepuke, hilly (of land).
Papipapi, confused (as
speech).
Piimau, continuous.
Ahiahi-po, dusk.
Tore-mi, sink into water.
Taumau, one betrothed.
Mdtdpuna, fount, or source
Ra.
Ed, the sun, day.
Rangi, the sky.
Ropi, to close.
Rukaruka, indefinite.
Ruru, sheltered from wind.
Riri, to express anger.
Po, the night.
Papa, the earth.
Uaki, to open.
Tonu, definite.
Ran, windy.
Riri-puku, unexpressed anger.
Ta.
Tdawhitdawhi,to hang back
Tdepa, to hang down.
Tdhapa, an acute angle.
Whakatahe, clear from ob-
struction
Tahitahi, to scrape.
Tdhoata, pumice stone.
Tdhoro, cause to collapse.
Tahora, open country.
Tai-u, high tide.
Rere-mua, to dash forward.
Whakatare, to hang up.
Tdpou, perfectly straight.
Kati, to obstruct.
Tlhore, to peel off.
One-papa, sandstone.
Hang a, to upbuild.
Ngahere, bush country.
Tai-pdkoa, low tide.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
73
Tai-whanake, h a 1 f -t i d e
(rising)
Tai-heke, descent.
Taihoa, by and bye.
Tdiri, sun at eve.
Taitama, youth.
Taitea, whitewood, sap.
Takare, eager to get on.
Takatu, quite ready.
Takawiri, twisted (as a
tree).
Take, root, cause.
Takuhe, contented, secure.
Takutai, sea-coast.
Tdmuimui, to crowd upon.
Tdpiri, add to.
Tapore, bend, sag, faint.
Tarapi, delicate, fastidious.
Tararau, loud confused
noise.
Taraweti, hostile.
Tareliu, unaware.
Taruna, marriage connec
tions.
Tdtahi, wide apart.
Tdtai, to measure, enu-
merate.
Tdtere, unsettled.
Tau, year.
Tatau, door.
Taumua, be in front.
Taumdro, obstinate.
Tauhdti, stranger.
Taupuru, cloudy sky.
Taurangi, incomplete.
Tauwhena, dwarfish.
Tdwhiri, wave good-bye.
Tloro, jar on the ear.
Tai-pd, half -tide (falling).
Tai-piki, ascent.
A-kua-nei, presently.
Moiri, sun at morn.
Taitamdhine, maiden.
Taiiho, hardwood, heart.
Takaware, languid indif-
ference.
Takaware, delaying.
Akoako, straight grained.
Take-kore, without cause.
Hiwa, alert, apprehensive.
Tua-whenua, inland.
Papahoro, to scatter from.
Tango, take from.
Tawharu, curved.
Kai-lioro, coarse, gluttonous.
Tangi, sound.
Mdhaki, friendly.
Mohio, aware.
Whanaunga, blood rela-
tions.
Pipiri, close together.
Whakarite, to compare.
Pumau, settled.
Marama, moon, month.
Kuwalia, an opening (as
doorway) .
Tauhiku, be in the rear.
Taungdwari, yielding.
Taunga, intimate.
Ao-rangi, clear sky.
Taurite, complete.
Tokoroa, tall and slight.
Powhiri, wave welcome.
Paparonaki, please the ear.
74
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Tipatipa, ill-founded.
Tipoka, dig and expose.
Tiwhana, curved.
Tohatoha, to distribute.
Tomo, to enter.
Au-ripo, noisy current.
Touwha, swell.
Tuao, transient.
Tohunga, wise.
Tuahangata, hero of a tale.
Tuhea, overgrown with
scrub.
Tuwhiti, to banish.
Tuku, to let go.
Tuoi, without fat.
Tupere, to ejaculate.
Tupono, by chance.
Turuki, to supplement.
Tutanga, a portion.
Tutahu, to favour.
Tuwuharoa, yawn.
Taketake, well-founded.
Tapuke, dig and cover.
Plpiko, bent.
Kohikohi, to collect.
Pwto, to withdraAV.
Au-torino, flowing smoothly
Kokohu, sink in.
Tuturu, fixed.
Hauwarea, foolish.
Tua-wahine, heroine of a
tale.
Wdtea, clear.
Unga, to invite.
Hopu, to seize.
Momona, fatty.
Wafeawgrw, remain silent.
Kokohanga, by design.
Tinana, without addition.
Tinana, the whole.
Whakaparahako, to reject
with scorn.
Kokopi, compress lips.
Wain-gahia, easy.
Warea, busy.
Wawata, secret longing.
, of two minds,
disgusting.
Wa.
Uaua, difficult.
Takakau, at leisure.
Hiahia, expressed desire.
Whakaaro, fixed opinion.
Parekareka, delightful.
CHAPTER VIII.
ON THE GRAMMAR.
The grammatical or idiomatical structure largely
illustrates that : —
1. Noun and substantive precede the adjective —
He tangata pai, a man good.
He tikanga kino rawa, a rule bad very.
2. Number is indicated by a change of article —
Te Moana. the ocean.
Ngd Tai, the tides.
3. The possessive pronoun precedes the noun —
Taakn mokopuna, my grandchild.
Taana whakaaro ki a Te Hau, his consideration
towards Te Hau.
4. The verb follows the article or tense-sign and
precedes the noun or substantive —
Te korero 6 tenei tangata, the talk of this man.
I tancji tf tamaiti, did cry the child.
5. The time is indicated by a tense-sign, which, e — ana
excepted, invariably precedes the- verb.
Kiliai au i rongo, not I did hear.
h'na. taka ilio te tamaiti, has now fallen down the
child.
6. The passive (see list of verbs) is formed by a verbal
suffix —
Kata, to laugh.
Kataina, laughed over.
75
76 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
7. Continuity or repetition of action is indicated by
partial or whole re-duplication —
Oma, to run.
Omaoma, a sequence of runs.
8. The whole of the vowels are used in enumeration
and each as a numerical prefix has its peculiar value.
(See alphabetical tables.)
9. There are four persons and three numbers (table
of personal pronouns).
10. The mode of comparison (see page 16) is clear
and precise.
11. In tense, the jussive, "let it be," is included —
Kia mdrama, let it be clear.
Kia tika, let it be just.
12. Causation is effected by a prefix, whaka —
Taka, to fall.
Whakataka, to cause to fall.
13. The letter a is commonly used as a personal article
or prefix to proper names and pronouns —
A Titore, namely Titore.
Kia tde mai a ia, when he arrives.
14. An article precedes each substantive in a sentence —
Te waka me nga hoe, the canoe and the paddles.
15. The imperative mood is indicated by me, must,
preceding the simple form of the verb —
Me ui e koe, you must enquire ;
or by using the verb at the head of the sentence —
Haere atu ki a ia, go unto him.
Tikina atu he wahie, go fetch some firewood.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 77
On "I was," "I had been."
Was—
Ko au taua tamaiti, I was the boy referred to.
Ko au tetahi i hdere, I was one of those who went.
Ko au i reira, I was there.
Ko au te mea i whara, it was I who was hurt.
I had been —
/ tae ano au ki reira i mua } I had been there
/ reira au i mua ai j formerly.
Kua roa au e takoto mate ana, ka tae mai ra a ia,
I had been long lying ill when he arrived.
I have been —
Kua tae ke mai au ki konei, I have been here for
some time.
Kua tae au ki reira, I have been there.
Kua mdmingatia au, I have been duped.
Kua patua au, I have been beaten.
I have become —
Kua turorotia au, I have become an invalid.
I shall be —
Ko reira au, I shall be there.
CHAPTER IX.
ON VERBS AND TERMINALS.
A verb has four clearly defined forms or gradations.
First the simple form as tuku, to let go ; next the passive
form with the terminal syllable a, as tukua, a form which
is usually used before the fact, thus :"Kaua e tukua, e koe
te Kurl no," ; or, "do not you let that dog go"; next the
passive form with the terminal syllable na, a form which
is usually used after the fact, as: He aha i tukima, ai e
koe te Kuri na ? or " what did you let that dog go for ? ' '
and finally the verb with its verbal-noun terminal nga, as
tukunga, a form which indicates the act or fact of the
letting go; for this terminal, nga, corresponds to the
English terminal, ing (as go, going) : "/ kite An i taana
tukunga i te Kuri"; or, "I saw his letting go of the
dog."
EXAMPLES.
Verb.
Koko, to scoop.
Kuru, to pommel, brmse.Kurua.
Toro, to visit.
Hoko, to exchange.
Puru, to stop, plug.
Toko, to pole.
Akoako, to instruct.
Tatari, to await.
Tapa, to name.
Kuku, to nip.
Heke, to descend.
Jleru, to comb.
Here, to tie.
Future.
Past. Perfect.
Kokoa.
Kokon-a. Koko nga.
'.Kurua.
Kuruna. Kuril nga.
Toroa.
Torona. Toronga.
Hokoa.
Hokona. Hokonga.
Puma.
Piimua. Puru nga.
Tokoa.
Tokona. Tokonga.
Akoakoa.
Akoakona. Akoakonga
Taria.
Tdrina. Taringa.
Tapaia.
Tapaina. Tapanga.
Kukua.
Kukuna. Kukunga.
Hekea.
Hekena. Hekenga.
Herua.
Heruna. Herunga.
Herea.
Herena. Herenga.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
79
Verb.
Wete, to untie.
Horo, to swallow.
Tdtaku, to repeat.
TaJni, to kindle.
Toino, to enter.
Hopu, to catch.
Kata, to laugh.
Taki, to recount.
Whao, to stow.
T«A--i. to fetch.
Titan, to smash.
Hltoko, to hop.
Future. Past. Perfect.
Wetea. Wetena. Wetenga.
Horoa. Horona. Horonga.
Tatakua. Tdtakuna. Tdtakunga
Talma. Tahuna. Tahunga.
Tomoa. Tomona. Tomonga.
Hopua. Hopuna. Hopunga.
Kataia. Kataina. Katanga.
Takia. Takina. Taking a.
Wit ada. Whdona. Whdonga.
Tikia. Tikina. Tlkinga.
Tit aria. Titarina. Tearing a.
Httokoa.
HUokona. Hltokonga.
There is, however, a particular class of verbs to which
this terminal na does not appear to apply"; other terminal
forms being substituted. These are verbs in which the
consonant n finds a place. Tanu, to bury, for instance,
becomes tomonia, not tan-unA ; similarly, tono, to send,
does not become tonona,; neither does whana, to kick,
become whancma,. This fact appears to have led to the
introduction of a variety of terminal forms, as we shall
presently see. This again appears to have led to a
reduction to three of the four clearly denned verbal
gradations shown in the foregoing list. These forms
apparently govern (in addition to the class of verbs in
which n occurs) adverbs, adjectives, and a number of
causative verbs.
Of the variety of terminals under notice, the following
are the principal: —
Verb.
Aliuru, warm.
Ana, I know not.
First
Terminal
Final
Terminal
a, becomes nga
Alntrua. Ahurunga.
tia „ tang a
Anatia. Auatanga.
80
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb.
First
terminal.
Final
terminal.
no, „ ranga
Mdtauria. Mdtauranga.
ngia ,, nga.
Wehingla. W eking a.
mia „ manga
Tanumia. Tanumanga
hia „ hanga
Tangihia. Tangihanga.
kia ., kanga
Motokia. Motokanga.
kina „ kanga
Tuakina. Tuakanga.
ia „ nga
Aia. Anga.
whia „ wlianga.
Whdowhia. Whddwhanga.
With such a variety of terminals at hand, the speaker
has a wide choice; but, having chosen the form of his
first terminal he is bound to use its corresponding final
terminal. As we have just seen the equations are:
a — nga-, ngia — nga; ria — ranga; tia — tanga; and kia —
kanga. A speaker, then, in using for example the causa-
tive verb whakaatu, (or, to cause to know) having, as he
proceeds, used a first terminal, must use its corresponding
final terminal, as follows : —
Mdtau, learn.
Wehi, fear.
Tanu, to bury, inter.
Tangi, to weep.
Moto, a punch.
Tua, to fell (as a tree)
A, to drive.
Whawhdo, to cram.
Whakaatu.
Whakaatu.
Whakaatu.
Whakaatu.
Whakaatu.
Whakaatu.
Whakadtua.
Whakadtungia.
Whakadturia.
Whakadtutia.
Whakadtukia.
Whakadtuhia.
To that rule there is no exception
the proverbial slip of the tongue.
Whakadtunga.
Whakadtunga.
Whakadturanga.
Whakadtutanga.
Whakadtiikanga.
Whakadtuhanga.
unless that made by
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 81
By the process of gradation portions are omitted from
such verbs and so on as are partially or wholly redupli-
cated. Thus : —
Tatari, to await, becomes Tdria and Tdringa.
Whawhdo, to cram, becomes Whdowhia and
Whdowhanga.
Katdkata, to laugh, becomes Kataina and Katanga.
Whanawhana, to kick, becomes Whanaia and
Whananga.
Tatau, to count, becomes tdua and Tauanga.
Titiro, to look, becomes Tirohia and Tirohanga.
Kaukau, to bathe, becomes Kauria and Kauranga',
and so on.
The verb and its accompanying adjective must always
agree in terminal form, as:
Korero pai, good talk.
Korerotia paitia.
Korerotanga paitanga.
Although the final sound of a in the above forms
invariably indicates the passive, the sound of e is
occasionally used instead of it : —
Ho, to pout, becomes Hoine and Hoinenga.
Ad, to dawn, becomes Adine and Adinenga.
Pad, to crush, becomes Pdoike and Pdoikenga.
Koru, to sink dying, becomes Korue and Koruenga.
Having so far dealt with verbal suffixes, two verbal
prefixes, Kau and Tai, may now be noticed. The chief
function of these appears to be to modify the sense ; tita
same may be said of taka when used as a verbal prefix :—
Amo, to shoulder (as a heavy piece of wood).
Kau-amo, to shoulder (as four persons shouldering
along an invalid between two poles: the load, being
distributed, is comparatively light.
82 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Tuku, to let go.
Kau-tuku, to let go gradually (as to "pay-out" a line,
nautically) .
Heke, to descend.
Tai-heke, to descend slowly or gradually.
Hard, hard.
Tai-maro, moderately hard.
Kaha, strong.
Tai-kaha, moderately strong.
Tangata, man.
Tai-tangata, a young man scarcely matured.
Horo, swift, speedy.
Taka-horo, hurriedly (a stout person or an invalid
may hurry along without attaining much speed).
Ware, delay.
Taka-ware, to hesitate.
Tdpui, a collection.
Taka-tdpui, inseparable ("hoa taka-tapiui," an in-
separable friend) .
There are other interesting prefixes, the functions of
which the student may ascertain for himself; for
instance the prefix au — as: —
Mihi, to greet (as one person greeting another).
Au-mihi, to greet (the united greetings of a number
of persons to a distinguished visitor or visitors) .
Taia, to injure, cast down, or destroy a person.
Au-taia, to injure, cast down, or destroy many persons.
( Said of a criminal, or an evil such as drinking, gambling
and so on.)
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
LIST OF VERBS.
83
Passive or
Verb active.
Imperat ive.
Verbal noun.
A.
A, to drive off
Aia
Anga
Ahu, to mould
Ahua
Ahungu
Whakadhua, to form
Whal'dahuc.'.ii
WJiakaahuatanga
Ai, (possible to be), act
Aitid
Ait an g a
of coition
Aki, to dash against
Akina
Akinga
Ako, to instruct
Akona
Akonga
A mo, to shoulder
Amohia
Amohanga
Anau, sway to and fro
Anaua
Anaunga
A nga, move towards
Angaia
Anganga
Whakaangi, fly, as a kite
Whakaangin
Whakaanginga
Apiti, to place together
Apitia
Apitinga
Apo, appropriate, grab
Apohia
Apohanga
Arahi, to conduct
Arahina
Arahanga
Arolia, to love, compas-
Arohatia
Arohatanga
sionate
•K
Aral, prevent
Araia
Arainga \
Arau, entangle
Arautia
Arautanga
Whakadri, to display
Whakadria
Whakaarinr/a
Aro, confront
Aroa
Aronga
Arohi, inspect
AroJiirohia
Arohirohint/d
Aropiri, attached
Aropiria
Aropiringii
Aru, to chase
Aru mid
Aiumanga
Ataicliai, tend kindly
Ataichditia
Atawhaitdnga
Whakadtu, to inform
Whakddturia
Wh akadt it ra nga
Auru, to free
Aurulid
Aurutanga
Aweke, misrepresent
Awekea
An-ekenga
Awhi, embrace
A whitia
Awhitanga
Au'hina, support
Awhinatia
Aichinatanga
E.
E, to do
Engia
Eanga
Whakaea, repay, avenge
Whakaeaina
Whakoeanga
Eho, to clarify
Ehoa
Ehonga
Ehu, make turbid
Ehtio
Ehu nga
Eke, mount, embark
Ekea
I'kenga
Ekoa, to append
Ekoaia
Ekoa nga
Ene, to cajole
Enea
Enenga
Whakaeo, to disable
Whakaeo'j
Whakaeoni/d
Epa, pelt, cast
Epaina
Epanga
Ete, urge along
Etea
Etenga
Ewa, enlarge, exalt
Ewaina
Eivanga
84
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Passive or
Imperative.
Verbal noun.
Ihiihi, nerve twitch IhiiMa I'hiihinga
ITci, consume wholesale ITcia Ixinga
Inoi, entreat Inoia Inoinga
Inu, to drink Inutnia Inumanga
Whakairi, hang up Whakairm Whakairinga
Iriiri, to christen Iriiria I r tiring a
Iro, cause pain Iroa Ironga
Whakairo, to carve Whakairoa Whakaironga
Whakaita, to restrain, JVfiakaitain Whakaitanga
repress
O.
Whakao, call upon loudly Whakaoria l'/hakauranga
OTia, affectionately greet Ohaina Ohanga
Owhiti, caution Owhitia Oiuliitinga
Omoomo, tend sick Omoomoa Omoomonga
Oni, act of coition Onia Oninga
Ore, to bore into Orea Orenga
Oretd, exterminate Oretaia Oreianga
Oka, to stab Okaina Gkanga
Oke, struggle Okea OTcenga
U.
Whdkau, make firm
Uliu, to wail
Umere, to chant together
Una, to bless, sanctify
Undhi, scale fish
TJTcul, wipe clean
Ukupara, smudge
Umiki, completely tra-
verse
Vnga, invite
Unu, undo, untie
Upane, place in ranks
Uru, to unite
Urungi, to steer
Uta, to place as cargo
Utu, to pay
WhaTcautu, repay, as a
loan
JJtuutu, draw up, as
water
Whakauria
K'hakaiiranga
Uhua
Vliunga
Umerea
Umerenga
Unaia
Unanga
Unahia
U nohing a
Ukuia
Vkuinga
Ukuparaia
Vlcuparanga
Umikia
Umikinga
Ungatia
Ungatanga
Unuliia
Unuhanga
Upanea
Upanenga
TJrua
Vrunga
Urungiiia
Urungitanga
Utaina
Viang a
Utua
Utunga
Whakautua
Whakautunga
Utuhia
Utuhanga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Eahd, seek for
Whakahd, breathe, inhale
Haehde, slash, cut into
strips
Hdere, to proceed
Hatiau, cut down
Eahu, to disinter
Haka, sing and dance
Uaku, find fault with
Hakune, profoundly study
Uamama, bawl
Hamu, gather leavings
Hanga, make, build
Hanihani, disparage
Hangarau, befool
Hangareka, jest with
Had, enclose as in a net
Whakahapa, deprive
Bapai, to lift up
JJaparu, inconsiderate
Hara, crime, guilt
Ilarau, grope for
Hari, to carry along
Hard, dress flax fibre
Jldtepe, cut off, exter-
minate
JJau'hake, dig up root
crops
F.aukoti, interrupt, in-
tercept
Whakahau, inspirit, ani-
mate
Whakahauora> to reprieve
Whakahawea, despise
W hakake, to wrong,
mislead
Hei, to wear on neck
Here, tie, fasten
Whakahere, to sacrifice
Heru, comb hair
Hihi, to hiss
Hialiia, long for, wish for
Hiakai, food-desire
IJiainu, drink-desire
Eiamoe, sleep-desire
Hianga, impose upon
Passive or
Imperative.
Verbal noun
HA.
Hahariu
Haharanga
Whakaltangia •
Whakahdnga
Haehaea
Raehaenga
Haerea
Hderenga
Hahauria
Hahauranga
Hahua
liahunga
Hakaina
JIdkanga
Eakua
Hakunga
Hakunea
llakunenga
Hdmamatia
Hdmamatanya
Hamua
Hamunga
Hangaia
Hanganga
Hanihania
[Janihaninga
Hangarautia
Hangarautanga
Hangarekatia
Hangarekatang:i
Hada
Hdonga
Wlidkahapaina
Whakahapanga
Hdpaia
Uapainga
JIaparua
Hdparunga
Harangia
Haranga
Haraua
Haraunga
Haria
Haringa
Haroa
Haronga
Hatepea
fldtepenga
Haiihakea
Rauliakenga
Haukotia
Haukotinga
Whakahaua
Whakcihaunga
Whakahauoratia
Whakahauoranga
Wli akahdweatia
Whakahaweatangc,
.Whakahengia
Whakahenga
Heia
Ueinga
Herea
Herenga
Whakaherea
Whakaherenga
Herua
B'erunga
Hihitia
Hihitanga
Hiahiatia
Jliahiatanga
Hiakaitia
liakaitanga
Hiaimitia
Fliainutanga
Hiamoetia
lf°amoetanga
Hiangatia
Riangatanga
36
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Hiangongo, pine for
Hika, to rub together
Hikaikai, to writhe
HiJci, carry about (as a
baby)
Hlnana, to glare at
Hinga, to fall prone
Uipa, to interspace
Rlpolci, cover over
Hiwi, heave up a great
weight
Hirihiri, reliable
Hoe, to paddle
Hoka, to spread apart
Rdkehoke, lose patience
HoTco, exchange, barter
Bono, join, unite, splice
Hopu, detect, capture
Kora, spread out
Hori, slit, slip aside
WhaTcalioro, demolish
Hohoro, to hasten
Horomi, to swallow
Eoroi, to wash
Jloiu, to sigh
Holiou, bind make peace
Huhu, value
Whakahou, renew
Hua, to lever
Huaranga, transplant
Hulce, dig, or grub up
Eume, to taper off
Humene, fold, or tuck
together
Huna, to conceal
Euhunu, singe, char
llura, uncover, expose
Sure, search underneath
Euri, turn around, roll
Uuri Tco-aro, turn inside
out
Huri Ico-tua, turn back
to front
Huri-polci, turn upside
down
Huti, pluck, or Tug off
Passive or
Imperative.
Hiangongotia
Hikaina
Elkaikaitia
Hikitia
Hlnanatia
Hingaia
Hipaia
nipoTcina
Hiwia
Hirihiria
Hoea
HoTcaia
Tlokehdkea.
JJoTcona
Jlonoa
Eopukia
Horahia
Horia
WhaJcaJioroa
Hohorotia
Horomia
Eoroia
JJotua
Hohoutia
Huhua
Whakahoutia
Huakina
Euarangatia
Hukea
Eumea
Eiimenea
Hunaia
Huhunua
Hurahia
Hurea
Eurihia
Hnri Tcoarotia
Euri Tcotuatia
TTuripokinn
TJvlia
Verbal noun.
Hiangongotanga
Ilikanga
UlTcailcaitanga
HiJcitanga
Hinanatanga
Hinganga
Eipanga
EtpoTcinga
Hiwinga
Eirihiringa
Eoenga
Hokanga
Hokelwlcenga
Eolconga
Bononga
Hopvkanga
Horalianga
Jloringa
Wlinlfdhoronfic
Holwutanga
Horomanga
Horoinga
Eotunga
EoJioutanga
EuJiuanga
Wliakahoiltanga
Euakanga
lluarangatanga
HuTcenga
Eumenga
Eiimenenga
Ifunanga
Hvlnmunga
HuraJianga
Hurenga
Eiirihanga
Hun Tcoarotanga
llurilcotuatanga
TluripoTcinga
lluiinga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
87
Verb active.
Kdewa, wander aimlessly
Wliakakaha, to strengthen
ILawhaki, forcibly carry
off
KakaTin, to dress, clothe
Kahupapa, bridge across
Kai, to eat
Kaikd, too hurriedly
Kaid, to rob
Kaiponu, stingy
Kakama, nimble
Kanga, to curse
Kapetau, resolute
Kape, omit, thrust aside
Whakalcapi, close, shut in
Kapo, snatch, catch
Kapuranga, by handfuls
Karalcia, recite rituals
Karanga, call, welcome
Karapiti, fasten side by
side
Karat iti, peg down
KarawMu, whirl, swirl
Whdkarekare, swirl (as
liquid)
Karo, ward off, parry
Karure, spin, twist, twirl
fcata, to laugh
Kdtea, to whiten
Katete, lengthen by
joining
Kati, close up, block
Kato. top off, pluck
Kdtoitoi, to respond
TLau, to wade
Kauhoe, to swim
Kaukau, to bathe
Kaupare, parry, avert
Kawe, bring, or take
along
Keri, to dig
Ketu, turn over ("earth)
Whalcakl, to fill
Whakakikl, to instigate
Kihi, to click the tongue
Passive or
Imperative.
Verbal nouu.
KA.
Kaewaitia
Kdcivatanga
Whalcakahangia
Whakakahanga
Kdwlwkina
Kdwhakinga
Kdkahuria
Kakahuranga
KaJiupaparia
Kahupaparanga
Kaingia
Kainga
Kaikdtia
Kaikatanga
Kaidtia
Kaidtanga
Kaiponua
Kaipormnga
Kakamatia
TLakamatanga
Kangaia
Kanganga
Kapetaua
Kapetaunga
Kapea
Eapenga
WJiakalcapia
Whdkalcapinga
Kapoa
Kaponga
Kapurangatia
Kapurangatanga
"Karakiatia
Ji arakiatanga
Karangatia
Karangatanga
Karapitia
Karapititanga
Karatitia
Karatitinga
Karawhiun
KarawMunga
Whakarekarea
Wliakarekarenga
Karoo.
Karonga
Karurea
Karurenga
Kataina
Katanga
Kdteatia
Kdteatanga
Katetea
Katetenga
Ratio,
Katinga
Katohia
Ratohanga
Kdtoitola
Katoitoinga
Kauria
Kaunga
Kauhoea
Kauhoenga
Kaulcauria
Kaukauranga
Kauparea
Kauparenga
Kawea
Kaicenga
Keria
Keringa
Ketua
Ketunga
Whakaklia
Whakciklnga
Whakalcilcia
WhaTcakiklnga
Kihia
Kihinga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Wliakakihi, urge on (as
a dog)
Kini, to pinch, nip
Eimi, to seek
Eimokimo, to blink
Whakakino, spoil
7T6, silently to invoke
Kohari, to mash
Kohere, to pound
KoM, gather, collect
KohuTcolm, curse loud
and long
Kohure, take from inside
Kohuru, to murder
Whakakoi, to sharpen
Koihiihi, writhe in terror
Edingo, to yearn for
KoTciri, to dart forth
Eoko, to scoop
Kome, move jaws with
lips closed
KoTcomo, to insert
Komuru, to rub off
Konatunatu, to mix well
Eoni, to move sT'ghtly
Konihi, to steal about,
sneak
Konumi, to fold double
Kopae, to border
Eopaki, envelope, enwrap
Kopare, to shade eyes
Eoparu, to crush
J5.0pere,to loosen a spring
Kopi, shut tight (as lips)
Kopiro, to ' ' duck ' '
(under water)
Kopiupiu, to wave, fan
Rdrangaranga, to ache
Korari, to twist off
Whakakore, to discard
Koreto, to drop tears
Korikori, to wriggle,
!ii ove
Koriti, wary
Koronga, to long for
WJidkdhoro, to cast off
Koroiroi, trifle with,
neglect
Passive or
Imperative.
Verbal noun.
TF^afcafcifeto
IVliakakihinga
Kinitia
Einitanga
Kimihia
Eimihanga
Kimokimoa
Eimokimonga
Whakakinoa
Whakakinonga
Koea
Eonga
KoTiaria
Eoharinga
Koherea
Eohcrenga
KoMa
EoMnga
Kohukohuo
Kohukohunga
Kohurea
Kohurenga
Kohurua
Eohurunga
Whakakoia
Whakakoinga
Koihiihia
Edihiihinga
Koingotia
Edingotanga
Kokiria
Eokiringa
Kokoa
Eokonga
Komea
Eomenga
Komotia
Eomotanga
Komurua
Komurunga
Eonatunatua
E onatunatunga
Konia
Ironing a
Konihia
Eonihinga
Eonumia
Eonuminga
Eopaea
Eopacnga
Eopakina
Eopakinga
Eoparea
Eoparenga
Koparua
Edparunga
Eoperea
Eopercnga
Kopia
Kopinga
Kopiroa
Eopironga
Eopiupiua
Kopiupiunga
Eorangarangatia
Eorangarangatanga
Eoraria
Koraringa
Whakakorea
Whakakorenga
Eoretoia
Eorctonga
Eorikoria
KoriTcoringa
Koritia
Koritinga
Eorongatia
Korongatanga
Whakahoroa
Whakah oronga
Eoroiroia
Koroiroinga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
89
Verb active.
Korokl, well advise
Koromaki, suppress feel-
ings
Korongata, mere promise
Koropiko, bow down
Korori, stir about
Korou, to purpose
Korowlriti, spring, jerk
off
Wliakakorua, hollow out
~Ei.ru, sink (as into
grave)
Kotamu, move lips
Koti, to cut
Kotiti, stray, diverge
Kotua, respect, esteem
Kotuhi, write, draw
Kotui, to lace, sew
howde, divide
Kowhdki, tear off, pluck
Kdwhiri,to select, choose
Kdw~hiuw~hiu, to fan
Ku, to block, bar, eclipse
Kuliu, thrust in, conceal
Kuihi, whisper
KuiTca, express a wish
Kulca, clog, encumber
Kuku, nip, draw together
Eumanu, to cherish
foster
Kume, to pull
Kupapa, stoop down
Kupe, enclose, enmesh
hilraruraru, busy, per-
plexed
Kuru, smite with fist
Kurutete, to exchange
Kuti, draw tightly
together
Knwata, anxious love
Whdkama, shame
MiinJia, gratification
ffhaJcamafiana , to vrarm
Maliara, to reflect
Maliea, free, at leisure
Passive or
Imperative.
Korokltia
Koramakina
Korongatatia
Koropikoa
Kororia
Koroua
Korowhitia
Whakakoruatia
Korue
Kotamua
Kotia
Kotitia
Kotuatia
Kotuhia
Kotuia
Kdwdea
Kowhakina
Kowhiria
Kowlmiwhiua
Kungia
Kuhua
Kilihitia
Kuikatia
Kukatia
Kukua
Kumanua
Kumea
Kupapatia
Kupea
Kurarurarua
Kurua
Kurutetea
Kutia
Kuwatatia
MA.
Whdkamakia
MaaTiatia
Whakamahanatia
Maharatia
Mdheatia
Verbal nouii.
Korokltanga
Koromakinga
Korongatanga
Eoropikonga
Kororinga
Korounga
KorowMtinga
Whakakoruatanga
Roruenga
Eotamunga
Kotinga
Kotitinga
Rotuatanga
Kotuhinga
Kotuinga
Kowaenga
Kowhakinga
Kowhiringa
B. owhiuwhiunga
Kunga
Kuhunga
Kuihitanga
Kuikatanga
Kukatanga
Kukunga
Kumanunga
Kumenga
Kupapatanga
Kupenga
Kurarurarunga
Eurunga
Kurutetenga
Jfutinga
Kuwatatanga
Whakamakanga
Alaahatanga
Whakamahanatanga
Zlaharatanga
Mdheatanga
90
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Mulii, to work, act
MahimaM, to copulate
Mdhia, sound, resound
Maliue, omit, leave,
abandon
Malmru, assure, gratify,
relieve
Maia, brave, fearless, bold
Maihi, anxious, uneasy
Mdiki, to remove
Maimoa, show regard,
attention
Maioha, greet lovingly
Maire, sing at eve
Makamaka, propound
riddles
Makaroa, perceive dimly
Makatikati, as stinging
Makenu, to trace, track
Maki, to inconvenience
Makowha, to expand
Makutu, magically
Ma-kuware, unknowingly
Whakamamde, to give
pain «
Alamaku, square with axe
Mdminga, play tricks
upon
Whakamana, authorise,
empower
Manadkl, regard, give
effect to
Mandheeu, cheerful, hope-
ful
Manako, to trust
Mamma, to make dumb
signs
Manana-ki, sign convey-
ing word
ManauJiea, reluctant
Manawanui, endure with
fortitude
Manawa-pa, cling to,
prize
JManaiva-reka, elated,
delighted
Mania, ear-tingle, teeth
on edge
Passive or
Imperative.
Mahia
Mahimalna
Mahiaiia
Mahuetia
Mahurutia
Mdiatia
Mdihia
Mdikia
Maimoatia
Maioliaiia
Mairea
MakamaTcatia
Makarotia
Mdkatikatia
Makenua
Makina
Makowhatia
Makuturia
MdkuwareUa
Whakamam aetia
Mamakutia
Mdmingatia
Whakamanaia
Manadkltia
Manahaua
Manakotia
Marian atia
Mananakitia
Manemheatw
Manawanuitia
Manawapdtia
Manawarekatia
Maniatia
Verbal noun.
Maliinga
Mahimahinga
Mahiatanga
Mahuetanga
Ilahurutanga
Maiatanga
Mfiihinga
Mdikinga
Haimoatanga
Maihoatanga
Maireanga
Makamakatanga
Makarotanga
Makaiikatinga
Makenmtaa
Makinga
Makoichatanga
Makuturanga
Mfikuwaretanga
Wliakamamdetanga
Mamakutanga
Mdmingatanga
WJiakamananga
Maitadkitanga
ManaJiaunga
Manakotanga
Mdnanatanga
Mananakitanga
Mdiiftnlieatanga
Matuncanuitanga
Manaicapdtanga
Manawarekatanga
Maniatanga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
91
Verb active.
Manowai, slaughter
wholesale
Maninohea, disgust
Mdngere, lazy, idle
Mapu, to sigh
Whakmdrama, to en-
lighten
Maranga, to rise
Marara, to scatter
Mare, to cough
Marere, to drop, to die
M are wa, to raise on high
Whakamarie, to appease
Maringi, spill
Hariri, tranquillise
Maaro, headstrong
Whakamdaro, to stiffen
Maroliirolii, over-exerted,
weary
Mataara, wakeful
Matahanahana, to blush
HatahareTiare, to offend
disappoint
itdtai, to importune
Matakana, to distrust
Matakawa, disrelish, dis-
like
Matakeke, to loathe
Matakitaki, to view
Mataku, to fear, dread
Matanga, to be experi-
enced
Whakamatad, to cool off
Matareka, fondness
Matau, to learn
Whaka mate, put to death
Matenui, adore
Matihei, to sneeze
Matika, to rise up, stand
Mau, take and carry
tfaumau, to waste
Wlwkamau, strive to
attain
Idea, to say, do, act
Meke. strike with fist
Meko, to withhold
Wliakamene, to as&emble
Memenge, to smile
Passive or
Imperative.
Manowaitla
Maninoheatia
Mangeretia
Mapua
Whakamaramatia
Marangatia
Mararatia
Marea
Mareretia
Marewatia
Whakamarietia
Maringitia
Mdriritia
Mdarotia
Whakamaarotia
Mardhirohia
Verbal noun.
Manowaitanga
Maninoheatanga
Mangeretanga
Mapunga
WTi a kamaramatanga
Marangatanga
Mararatanga
Marenga
Mareretanga
Marewatanga
Whakamarietanga
Maringitanga
Mariritanga
Mdarotanga
Wl\ akamaarotanga
MuroMroMnga
Mataaratia Mataaratanga
Matahanahnnatia Matahanahanatanfja
Mataharea Mataharenga
Mataia
Matakanatia
Matakawatia
MatakeJcetia
Mdtakitakina
Matakuria
Matangatia
Matainga
Matakanatanga
Matakawatanga
Ma ta keketanga
Mdiakitakinga
Matakuranga
Matangatanga
WhakamatadtaotiaWhakamatddtaotanga
Matarekatia Matarekatanga
Mdtauria Mdtauranga
Whakamatea Whakamatenga
Matenuitia Matenuitanga
Matiheia Matiheinga
Matikatia Matikatanga
Mauria Maxranga
Maumauria Maitmauranga
Whakamaua Whakamaunga
Meatia
Mekea
Mekoa
Whakamenea
Memengetia
Meatanga
Mekenga
Mekonga
Whakamenenga
Memengetanga
92
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Miharo, admire, wonder
Mihi, greet sorrowfully
Atimi, urinate
Minamina, long for,
crave
M iramira, to be emphatic
Afirimiri, stroke, pet,
fondle
Miro, to spin, twist
Miti, to lick
Moo, sway from side to
side
Whakamoa,lay in a heap
Moata, to rise early
Afoeroa, to sleep late
Moe, sleep, sleep with,
marry
Whakamoe, cause to
marry or sleep
Moehewa, to dream
Moenanu, talk in one's
Moe-titiro, sleep open-
eyed
Mohio. to know, recog-
nise
Whakamohio, to acquaint
Whakatnoho, to steal
upon
Whakamokd, to muzzle
Mo-mi, to suck, kiss
Honaroa, to loiter
Monimoni, to consume
&ono, to caulk, plug
Jfomono, use charms,
spells
Moremore, to make bare
Mono-Tel, to expel, de-
denounce
Morearea, to be wearied
Whakamomori, to des-
pair, suicide
Morikarika, disgust
Moteatea, scrupulous
Whakamotl, exterminate
MotoJie, irrepressible
Motu, sever, cut off,
escape
Passive or
Imperative.
Mlharotia
Mihia
Mimia
Minaminatia
Miramirali*
Mirimiria
Miroa
Mitimitia
Moaia
Whakamokatia
Moaiatia
Moeroatia
Moea
Whakamoea
Moehewatia
Moenanutid
Moetitirotia
MoTiiotia
Whakamohiotia
Whakamolioa
Whakamdkdtia
Momia
Monaroatia
Monimonin
Monoa
Momonoa
Moremore-i
MonoTnia
Moreareatia
Whakamomoritia
Mdrikarikatia
Moteateatia
Whakamotltia
Motohea
Motuhia
Verbal noun.
Miharotanga
Miminga
Minaminatanga
Mir amir at any a
Mirimiringa
Mironga
Mitimilinga
Moanga
Whakamoatanga
Moatatanga
Mocroatanga
Moenga
Whakamoenga
Moehewatanga
Moenanutanga
Moetitirotanga
Mohiotanga
Whakamohiotango
Whakamohonga
Whakamokatantja
Mominga
Monaroatanga
Monimoninga
Mononga
Momononga
Moremorenga
MonoMnga
Moreareatanga
Whakamomoritanga
Aforikarikatanga
Moteateatanga
WhakamotitanQa
Motohenga
Motuhanga
.MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb activ.
ttuhu, force aloug
Muimui, infest, swarm
upon
MuTcw,to wipe, or rub off
Muna, tell in confidence
Muru, legally despoil
WhaTcamutu,io terminate
WTiakana, to satisfy,
gratify
Whalcanano, to discredit
Nanu, complain of loss
Nando, to seize and
handle
hanati, squeeze, throttle
NeJiu, to bury, inter
Nelce, to move
Ninihi, steal quietly by
fi/iu, to divine by lot
WhaTcanoa, cancel, dis-
regard
Whakanoi, to place aloft
NonoTce, struggle, pommel
None, consume by waste
Nukarau, series of de-
ceptions
Nunumi, steal off and
vanish
Pa, to touch, affect
Whakapa, prevent con-
ception
Paia, repel, shut off
Papae, to border
Whakapae, blame, accuse
Pahdo, to enclose, shut in
I'aheTce, to slip, slide
Pdheno, to slip off,
escape
Pahi, to slap, thrash
Whakapaho, to soar
Pahua, take by sheer
force
Pahure, escape by flight
Whakapai, to favour,
approve
Passive or
Imperative.
Muhua
Muimuia
MuTcua
Munaia
Murua
Whakamutua
NA.
Whalcanatia
Whakananoa
Nanua
Nandotia
Nanatia
Nehua
Nelcea
Ninihia
Niua
WhaJcanoatia
WJialcanoin
NonoJcea
Nonea
Nukarautia
Nunumia
PA.
Ptingia
Whaleapdngia
Paiatia
Papaetia
Whalcapatti
Pahdoa
Pahekea
Pahenotia
Pdhitia
Whakapahoa
Pahuatia
PaJiuretia
WhaTcapaia
Verbal noun.
Muhunga
Muimuinga
Whakananonga
Nanunga
Nandotanga
Nanatinga
Nehunga
NeTcenga
Ninihinga
Niunga
Whakan oatanga
Whakanoinga
NonoTcenga
Nonenga
NuJcarautanga
Nunuminga
Pdnga
Whakapanga
Paiatanga
Papdetanga
Whakapaenga
Pahdonga
Pahekenga
Fdhenotanga
Pahitanga
V/Jiakapahonga
Pahuatanga
Pdhuretanga
Whdkapainga
94
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Pdihi, to flinch
Paikeike, raise by adding
to
Whakapakari, assert
one's self
Pakaru, to break, smash
Whakapake, to overawe
PapaJci, pat, clap, slap
Pdkiki, repeatedly ques-
tion
Fakiri, show teeth, grin
Pakiwaha, to brag, boast
Wliakapakoko, make an
image
Parii, to paint or smear
Pana, expel, banish
Panelce, move endwise
Panga, to throw, cast
Panoni, to change
Fad, crush, break through
Pdoro, to reverberate
Pdoi, pound, mash
WJiakapapa, place in
layers, recite gene-
alogies
Paparua, to double
Para, clear of under-
growth
Parau, false, invention
Papare, ward off, parry
Parore, to weaken
Pataritari, to divert,
amuse
Patato, to jingle, rattle
Patt, to squirt
Patoto, knock at a door
Whalcapau, expend, ex-
haust
Pauhu, defer, adjourn
Pawera, premonition
Pawhara, split open (as
a fish)
Whakapeau, diverge,
"side-track"
Pepeha, wittily boast
Peehi, to oppress, press
Pei, turn off, banish
Passive or
Imperative.
Pdihia
Pdikeikea
Verbal noun.
Pdihinga
Pdikeikenga
Whakapakoritia Whakapakaritanga
Pakarua
Whakapakctia
Papakia
Pdkikitia
Pakiria
Pakiwahatia
Whakapakokotia
Pania
Panaia
Panekea
pangaia
Panonia
Pada
Paorotia
Pdoitia
Whakapaparia
Faparuatia
Para
Parautia
Paparetia
Paroretia
Pdtaritaria
Patatotia
Patia
Patototia
Whakapaua
Pauhua
Paweratia
Pawharatia
Pdkarunga
Whakapaketanga
Papakinga
Fdklkltanga
Pakiringa
Pakiwahatanga
Whakapakokotanga
Paninga
Pananga
Panekenga
Panganga
Pnnoninga
Pdonga
Pdorotanga
Fdoitanga
Whakapaparanga
Paparuatanga
Paranga
Parautanga
Faparetanga
Paroretanga
Pdtaritaringa
Patatotanga
Patmga
Pdtototanga
Whakapaunga
Pduhunga
Pdweratanga
Pdwharatanga
Whakapeautia Whakapeautanga
PepeJiatia
PeeMa
Peia
Pepehatanga
Peehinga
Peinga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
95
Verb active.
Whakapelca, to dispute.
doubt
Peo, to beg
Tie, desire for, call for
Pikau, carry on the back
Pinono, to beg
Pioi, brandish (as a
weapon)
Ptrangi, daily ^ant
Piri, adhere or cleave to
Piu, to cast (as a dart)
Piwari, to beautify
Popo, to crowd upon
Poliane, commit sodomy
Whakapohehe, to con-
fuse, mislead
Pohutu, to splash
Poipoi, whirl aloft
Pokepoke, to admix a
solid
Poke, to soil, taint
Poker ehu, unwittingly err
Poki, to cover over
Whakapono, rely upon,
believe in
Popono, to covet
Porae, to anoint the
brow
Porahu, put out of place
Porangi, flurried, de-
mented
Whakaporepore, specially
favour
Porearea, modest, timor-
ous
Porewarewa, act foolishly
Poro, cut to two lengths
Poro-a-lm, parting in-
structions
Pororaru, to thwart
Pororua, double-dealing
Potde, use as hat for
head
Potatu, impatient
TFhakapoto, to shorten
POM, implant, erect, set
up
Poiiri, downcast
Passive or
Imperative.
Whakapekaina
Peoa
Fiea
Pikauria
Pinonoa
Pioia
Plrangitia
Piria
Piua
Piivaria
Poporia
Pohanea
Whakapohehetia
Pohutua
Poipoia
Pokepokea
Pokea
Pokerehua
Pokia
Wliakaponoa
Poponoa
Pdrdea
Porahuo
Pdranf/itia
Whakaporeporea
Poreareatia
Porewarewatia
Poroa
Poroakttta
Pororarua
Pororuatia
Potaea
Potatua
WJiakapotoa
Poua
Ponritia
Verbal noun.
Whakapekanga
Pconga
Pienga
Pikauranga
Plnononga
Pioinga
Pi,rangitanga
Piringa
Hung a
Tiwaringa
Poporanga
Pohananga
WhakapoheJietanga
Polmtunga
Poipoinga
Pokepokenga
Pokenga
1'okerehunga
Pokinga
Whakapononga
Popononga
Poraenga
Porahunga
Porangitanga
Wliakaporeporenga
Poreareatanga
Poreivarewatanga
Poronga
Porodkitanga
Fororarunga
Pororuatanga
Potaenga
Potatunga
Whakapotonga
Pounga
Pouritanga
96
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Whdkapoururu, frown,
scowl
PowJiiri, wave a welcome
PuJiaehae, envy, jealous}'
Wliakapumau, fix, assure,
confirm
Punarua, wed two wives
Pure, to cleanse, purify
Puremu, commit adultery
Pupuru, to hold, detain
Turn, to pad or plug
Putiki, to bind
Rahiri, cordially receive
guests
Eahurdhu, meddle with
J2a/iwo,take advantage of
Edhui, to conserve
Eanga, to arrange
orderly
Rangirua, broken rhythm
or time
Rane, to amplify
Rapi, to clutch
Rapu, to search for
Rapurapu, try to solve
Rard, to roar
Eauwiri, to interlace
Whakarawa,to latch, bolt
Whakarawe, to supply
Eehe, weakness of age
Eei, to dash forward
Whakarere, discard,
abandon
Whakarereke, to alter
Eeti, to noose, lassoo
Whdkarewa, to melt, to
float
Whakaririka, to annoy
Firingi, to pour out
Eipiripi, to split open,
rip
Eirio, diminish, subside
Whakarlroi, to distort,
pervert
Whakaroa, lengthen,
delay
Passive or
Imperative.
Whakapoururutia
PowTiiria
Puhdehdea
Whakapiiinautia
Punaruatia
Purea
Puremutia
Purutia
Purua
Putikia
BA.
Edhiria
Edhurahua
Eahuatia
Rahuia
Eangaia
Eangiruatia
Eanea
Rapid
Eapua
Eapurapua
Rardtia
Rauwiria
WhaTcarawaia
Whakarawea
Rehea
Reia
Whakarerea
WhakarereJeetia
Retia
WhaTcarewaia
Whakaririkatia
Ringihia
Ripiripia
Ririoa
Whakarlroia
Whakaronina
Verbal noun.
Whakapoururutanga
Poiuhiringa
Puhdehdenga
Whakapumautanga
Punaruatanga
Purenga
Puremutanga
Purutanga
Purunga
Putikinga
RdMringa
Eahurahunga
Eahuatanga
Eahuinga
Eanganga
Eangiruatanga
Eanenga
Rapinga
Eapunga
Eapurapunga
Earatanga
Eauiviringa
Whakarawanga
Whakarawenga
P.ehenga
Reinga
Whakarerenga
Whakarereketanga
Eetinga
Whakarewanga
Whakaririkatangz
Eingihanga
Eipiripinfja
Ririonga
Whakarlroinga
Whakaroanga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
97
Verb active.
Kobe, to bound
Eokohanga, happen upon,
encounter
Rona, to offer np, sacri-
fice
Eongoa, to doctor
Sore, to snare, entrap
Eotu, compel sleep
Borou, reach by artificial
means
Eiiaki, to vomit
Whakaruhi, to enervate
Bui, to scatter as seed
Euke, throw away as
worthless
Buna, to reduce, degrade
Eunanga, discuss in
council
Eutu, swayed by emotion
Ta, practise (as an art)
la, to print, paint, spin
TawTie, to go all around
'Idea, to accomplish,
succeed
Whakataetae, contend
with
Whakatdtaha, to avoid
Tahae, steal, rob
Tahapa. to pass at an
angle
Tahei, to crease, wrinkle
Tahere, to noose, snare
Tahi, to clear away,
sweep
Tahu, to kindle
Tai, to consecrate
Toiamiki, to stray,
wander
Taiapu, to assail
Taiari, to demolish
Taiki, to weave, .interlace
Taipara, select (as a
target)
Taiaroa, to memorialise
Tai-hoa, performance of
rites
Passive or
Imperative.
Eohea
Bokohangatia
Eonaia
Verbal noun.
Eonanga
Eongoatia
Eorea
Eotua
Eoroua
Eongoatanga
Eorenga
Eotunga
Eorounga
Euakina
Wliakaruhia
Euia
Eukea
Eilakanga
WhakaruJiinga
Euinga
Bukenga
Eunaia
Eunangatiii
Eunanga
Eunangatanga
Eutua
TA.
Tangia
Taia
Tawhea
Taeatia
Eutunga
Tonga
Tdinga
TawJienga
laeatanga
Whakataetaea Whakataetaenga
WhakatataJiatia
TaMetia
Tahapatia
Taheitia
Taherea
Tahia
Tahua
Taia
Taiamikia
Taiapua
Taiaria
Taikitia
Taiparatia
Taiaroatia
Taihoatia
Whakatatahanga
Tdhaetanga
Tahapanga
Taheitanga
TaJierenga
Tahinga
Tahunga
Taianga
Taiamikinga
Taiapunga
Taiaringa
Taikitanga
Taiparatanga
Taiaroatanga
Taihoatanga
98
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Taiuru, to lean
Takahi, trample upon
Taka-he, do wrong, go
wrong
Takai, to roll up, enwrap
Takapau, to free from
iapu
Takapui, to accompany
T&kare, show eagerness
-Takatu, prepared to start
Takawiniwini, to scroll
Takeke, to mesh a net
Takitaki, to challenge
Taki, to recount
Tdkiri, withdraw sud-
denly
Takwnga, claim as just
Tcimaki, to start involun-
tarily
Tame, smack one's lips
Taami, to repress
Tamoe, cook all night
Tamumu, to buzz, hum
Tane, nauseating
Tangi, to mourn, lament
Whakatangi, to make
music
Tad, cook food in earth
oven
Tapa, to re-name, sur-
name
Tapahi, to cut or chop
Tapapa, to stoop or
crouch
Whakatapeha, to mis-
apply
Tapena, to insult
Tapiri, to add to
Tdpoi, to explore, tra-
verse
Tapoko, to enter
Tapore, to be dismayed
Tapu, inviolate, sacred
Whakatapu, to sanctify
Tapuhi, to tend, succour.
nurse
Tapiti, to lay together
Passive or
Imperative.
Taiurwa
Takahia
Takahetia
Takaia
Takapana
Takapuia
Takarea
Takatutia
Takawwwmia
Takekea
Takilakiti'i
Takina
Takiria
Takungatia
Tamakia
Tamea
Taamia
Tamoea
Tamumua
Tanea
Tangihia
Whakatanffihia
Taona
Tapaina
TapaMa
Tapapatia
Verbal noun.
Taiurunga
Takahanga
Takalietanga
Takainga
Takapaunga
Takapuinga
Takarenga
Takatiitanga
Takau'inln'iningi
Takekenga
Takitakinga
Takinga
Takiringa
Takunf/ciinnga
Tamakinga
Tamenga
Taaminga
Tamoenga
Tamumunga
Tanenga
Tangihanga
Whakatangihanga
Taonga
Tapanga
Tapahanga
Tapapatanga
Whakatapehatia Whakatapehatanga
Tapenaiia
Tapiria
Tapoia
Tapenatanga
Tdpiringa
Tdpoinga
Tapokoria
Taporetia
Tapua
Whakatapua
Tapuhia
Tapokoranga
Taporetanga
Tnpunga
Whakatapunga
Tapuhinga
Tapuia
Tapuinga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
99
Verb active.
Whakatara, to provoke
larai, fashion with axe
Whakatare, to h^ng up
Whakatari, stir to action
Tatari, to await
Tarona, to hang by the
neck
Tatai, to trace (as
ancestry)
Tatua, to gird the loins
Tau, to settle, cease
motion
Tatau, to count, enu-
merate
Tauhiuhi, to sprinkle
Whakatawaiki, enunciate
a maxim
Taumau, to betroth
Taundha, to bespoak
Taunu, to taunt, revile
Taupiri, inseparably
joined
Taupuhi, betroth a virgin
Taupuru, to choke, block
up
laurangi, to promise,
pledge
laurima, take by hand,
foster
TautawTii, to assist
Tautapa, to name as
antagonist
Tautiti, to stick in
Tawae, to separate
Tawai, to jeer, scoff at
Tdwari, to contest
Taweke, to exhaust
Tawhai, to rival, excel
Tdwhiri,to wave farewell
Tdwhiuwhiu, to whirl
around
Whakatete, to oppose
Whakateki, to hang
beyond reach
WJiakateko, to carve (as
an image)
Whakatepe, do system-
atically
Passive or
Imperative.
Whalcataraina
Taraia
Wliakatarea
Whakataria
Taria
Taronatia
Tataia
Tatuatia
Tattria
Tauia
Tauhiuhia
WhaTcatawaikia
Taumautla
Taunahatia
Taunntia
Taupiria
Taupitliia
Taupu rua
Taurangia
Taurimatia
Tautdwhia
Tautapatia
Tautitia
Tdwdea
Tdwaia
Tdwaria
Taivckea
Tdwliaia
Tdwhiria
TdwMuwhiua
WJiakatetea
Whakatekia
Whakatekoa
Whakatepea
Verbal noun.
Whakataranga
Tarainga
Whakatarenga
Whakataringa
Tdringa
Tdronatanga
Tdtainga
'± Cituatanga
Taunga
Tauanga
TauMuMnga
Whakatawaikinga
Taumautanga
Taunahatunga
Taunutanga
Taupiringa
Taupuhinga
Toupurunga
Tauranginga
Taurimatanga
Tautdwhinga
Tautapatanga
Tautitinga
Tdwdenga
Tawainga
Tdwaringa
Tawekenga
Tdwhainga
Tdwhiringa
Tawhiuwhiunga
Whakatetenga
Whakatekinga
Whakatekonga
Whakatepenga
100
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Whakatere, to launch on
water
Tia, stick in (as a
feather in the hair)
Titi, stick in (as a peg
or nail)
Tlaki, tend, guard
Tlehu, to make lurbid
Tihe, matihe , to sneeze
Tlheru, to bale out
Tlhoi, to expand centre
Tihore, to peel, bark
Wlialcatika, to arise, to
correct
Tlkaro, gouge or scoop
out
Whalcatilci, deprive (as
of food)
Tiko, to evacuate
bowels
Timata, begin
Timo, to peck
Tinei, extinguish, sup-
press
Tinihanga, trick, device
Tipi, skim, pare (as
weeds)
Tipoka, to unesrth
Tlrdha, place out of
plumb
Tiri, to plant singly,
transplant
Tltama, to act between
Tiwai, ordinary, natural
Toto, to haul, tow along
Toetoe, to split into
strips
Whakatoe, to reserve, set
aside
Totika, direct
Toha, to serve round
Tohe, insist, persist
ToM, to baptise with
sprinkling
Tohipu, to be exact,
specific
Tohu, to show, preserve
Passive or
Imperative.
Whakaterea
Tiaina
Titia
Tlakina
Tlehua
Tiheia
Tlherua
Tlhoia
Tlhorea
Whakatikaina
TlkaroJiia
Whakatikia
the Tikona
Timataria
Timoa
Tineia
Tinihangatia
Tipia
Tipokaina
Tirdhatia
Tiria
Titamatia
Tlwaia
Tola
Toetoea
Whakatoea
Totikaina
Tohaina
Toliea
ToMa
ToMpuria
Tohungia
Verbal noun.
Whakaterenga
Tiainga
Tilinga
Tiakanga
Tlehunga
Tiheinga
Tiherunga
Tihoinga
Tihorenga
Whakatikanga
Tlkarohanga
Whakatikinga
Tikonga
Timataranga
Timonga
Tineinga
Tinihangatanga
Tipinga
Tlpokanga
Tlrahatanga
T-iringa
Tttamatanga
Tiwainga
Toanga
Toetoenga
Totikanga
Tohanga
Tohenga
Tohinga
Tohipuranga
Tohuranga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
101
Verb active.
Toko, to pole
Tokomauri, to enamour
Tomo, to enter
Tono, to solicit, send
Tongi, to nibble at
Tonu, to perfect
Tope, to cut away or
hew down
Toro, to visit, stretch out
WhdkatoroiiTca, to muse
Ton, to kindle, dip in
liquid
Tua, to fell (as a tree)
Tuaki, to disembowel
Tuha, to spit
Tuhatuha, to apportion
T'ahituhi, to write,
delineate
Tiihono, to join together
Tui, to sew or lace
TuTce, nudge with elbow
Tuki, to ram or butt
Tukituki, to pommel or
smash
Tukino, to ill use
Tuku, release, cede,
transfer
Tumanako, await in hope
and trust
Tunganga, to loosen
Tungehe, to be overawed
Tungou, to nod as sign
Tunguru, to lose influ-
ence
Tuohu, to stoop or bow
Tupato, to be cautious,
prudent
Tupe, check mystic power
Tupono, to chance upon
Whakatupu, to cultivate,
rear
Tupua, to cause dread
TuraJci, to throw or
knock down
Turama, lighten with
torch
Turi, stubborn, obstinate
Passive or
Imperative.
Verbal noun.
ToTcona
Tokonga
ToJcomauritia
Tokomauritanga
Tomolcia
Tomolcanga
Tonoa
Tononga
Tongia
Tonginga
Tonua
Tonunga
Topea
Topenga
Torona Toronga
Whakatoroukatia WJiakatoroukatanga
Toua Tounga
Tuaina
Tuakina
Tuhaina
Tuliatuhaina
TuhituTiia
Tuanga
Tilakanga
Tuhanga
TuhatuJianga
TuhituMnga
Tilhonoa
Tula
Tukea
Tukia
Tukitukina
Tuhononga
Tuinga '"*
Tukenga
Tukinga
Tukitukinga
Tukinotia
Tukua
Tukinotanga
Tukunga *
Titmanakohia
Tunganga tin
Tungehea
Tungoutia
Tungvrua
TuoJiva
Tupctloria
Tupea
Tuponoa
Whakatupuria
Tupuatia
Turakina
Turamatia
Turingia
Tumanakohanga
Tungangatanga
Tungehenga
Tungoutanga
Tungurunga
Tuohunga
Tupatoranga
Tupenga
Tupononga
Whakatupuranga
Tupuatanga
Turakanga
Tfiramatanga
Turin ga
102
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Whakatuturu, to fix,
confirm
Ttitaki, to shut off, to
meet
Whakatuwhera, to open
Tutara, to gossip
WJiakawd, to arraign
Waere, to make way
proclaim
Waha, to carry on back
Waivdahi, to divide, por-
tion out
WJiakawahi, anoint, con-
secrate
Whakawai, to entice,
beguile
Waia, be tired ct'
Waiata, to chant or sing
Waiho, to leav-3
Waikauere, omit ancient
custom
Waimarie, lucky, meek,
contented
Wairangi, deranged
WaireTca, to enjoy
Wana, to study (as a
problem)
Wananga, recite chrono-
logically
Wani, to brush, lightly
skim
WeTie, to divide or sepa-
rate
WhaTcawehi, frighten,
terrify
Wero, pierce, stab
Wewete, to loosen, untie
Wiri, tremble or shudder
Whakangd, to inhale,
breathe
NgdeJie, to rustle
Ngaeke, to tend, rear
Ngaeki, yielding to touch
Passive or
Imperative.
Whakatiitiirutia
Ttltakina
Whakatuwheratia
Tutaratia
WA.
Whakawakia
Waerea
Waliangia
Wawaahia
Whakawahia
Whakawaia
Waiatia
Waiatatia
Waihotia
Waikauerea
Waimarietia
Wairangilia
Wairekatia
Wanaia
Wanangatia
Wania
Wehea
Whakawehia
Werohia
Wetekina
Winia
NGA.
Whakangatia
Ngaehea
Ngdekea
Ngdekia
Verbal noun.
Whakatuturutanga
Tutakanga
Whakatu ich erata nga
Tutaratanga
Whakawakanga
Waerenga
Wahanga
Wdwdhanga
Wli akawaMnga
Whakawainga
Waidtanga
Waiatatanga
Wailwtanga
Waikauerenga
Waimarietanga
Wairangitanga
Wairekatanga
Wananga
Wanangatanga
Waninga
Wehenga
Whakawehinga
Werohanga
Wetekanga
Wininga
Whakangdtanga
NgdeTienga
Ngdekenga
Ngdekinga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
103
active.
Sgaere, to quake (as a
bog)
NgaMe, rip or burst
open
Tl hakangaliau, divert
amuse
Whakana, to satisfy or
gratify
Whakangakau, io brood
over
Ngdkait-kore, faint-
hearted
y ff&kau-nui, stout-
hearted
Ngaki, to work, operate
hgatata, to rattle (as
bones)
Ngateri, to vibrate
Ngata, to gratify
Ngatete, to creak
Ngait, to bite, chew,
gnaw
Ngaueue, to shake,
quake
Ngawhifto suffer penalty
Ngongoro, to gurgle,
snore
N gun guru, to grunt
Whawlia, feel for, grope
WTiai, to follow
Whakaangi, to fly (as a
kite)
Whawhai, to fight
Whawhai, to be ia haste
TFTzawTioia, destroy by
magic
Whai-a-ipo, to woo,
follow up
WhaSHonffa, to build,
construct
Wliakawhaiti, abridge,
compress
Wltawhaki, to pluck
Wharuilco, to steal, rob
Whano, to verge towards
Wlmnga, to await
Whangai, to feed or
nourish
Passive or
Imperative.
Ngaerea
Ngahaetia
Whakangaliautia
Whakanatia
Whakangakautia
Ngakaukorea
N gakauniiitia
Ngakia
Ngatatatia
Ngateria
Ngataria
Ngatetetia
Ngaua
Ngaueiietia
Ngongorotia
Ngungurutia '
WhmcMtia
Whaia
Whakaangia
Whaivliaitia
WJidwhaia
Whaiwhaiatia
Whaiaipotia
Whaihangatia
WhakatvMititia
Whawhakia
Whanakotia
Whanoa
Whangatia
WJiangaitia
Verbal noun.
Ngcierenga
NgaJifietanga
Whakangahautanga
Whakanatanga
Whakangakautanga
Ngakaukorenga
Ngakaunuitanga
Ng alcing a
Ngatatatanga
Ngateringa
Ngatanga
Ngatetenga
Ngaunga
Ngaueuetanga
Ngawhinga
Ngongorotanga
Ngungurutanga
Whawhatanga
Whdinga
Whakaanginga
Whaiohaitanga
Whmvhainga
Whaiwhaiatanga
Whaiaipotanga
WJiaihangatanga
Whakawhaitinga
Wlnawhakinga
Whanakotanga
Whanonga
Whanganga
Whangaitanga
104
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb active.
Whawhao, to stow in
Whakarawe, to provide,
furnish
Whakarauora, save from
death
Whariki, to carpet
Whawhati, to break off,
snap
Whatu, to weave finely
Whakawhere,to conciliate
Whakawhiwhi, to pro-
vide, supply
Whio, to whistle
Whiri, to plait, twist
Whakawhirinaki, to rely
upon
Whiti, to cross
Whitiki, to gird (as the
loins)
Whiriwhiri, to select,
choose
Whiu, to whip
Whakangaio, to pretend
Passive or
Imperative.
Whawhdotia
Whalcarawea
Verbal noun.
Whaifhaotanga
Whakarawenga
Whakarauoratia Whakarauoratanga
Wharikitia
Whawhatiia
Whatua
Whakawherea
Whakawhiivhia
Whioa
Whiria
Whakaivhirinakitia
Whitia
Whltikitia
Whiriwhiria
Whiua
Whakangaiotia
Wharikitanga
Whaichatinga
Whatunga
Whakakwherenga
Wha ka ivh iwhingn
Whionga
Whiringa
Whakawhirinakitanga
Whit in ga
Wlritikiktanga
WhiriwJriringa
Wliiunga
Whakanf/aiotanga
NOTE. — Some of the foregoing verbs require the prefix whaka,
as they are of a causative nature.
CHAPTER X.
ON COLOUR.
SHADES, HUES, TINTS, STAINS, ETC.
Para is the term most generally employed to denote
colour : —
Kd hou te para ki te rakau, nd ko ia te nd e puta na te
tde: The colour (ing) matter enters into the wood and
produces that stained appearance, or d}re.
Ko te para na te na e whakaputa na i ngd pudwai me
nga hiia 6 te rakau : That is the colour which appears in
the flowers and the fruit of the trees.
See also — "lie para kokowai," an ochre colour.
"JV^rt-para," resin from which the colouring matter for
tattooing was prepared.
The seven chief colours are thus expressed: —
Parawhero, red. Parakaraka, orange.
Parokowhai, yellow. Parakdkdriki, green.
Parauri, blue. Tuduri, indigo.
Tudpokere, violet.
Speaking of the hair of the head the first syllable
"pa" is used: —
P^-wliero, red hair, red head. P&-tito, scabby head.
PB.-hore, barehead. Pa-Hra, baldhead.
PH-keha, turnip (coloured) head, clear and white, or
pale.
P&pango, black-headed, Widgeon bird.
Pa/taw, beard. Pa-fcwro, red-headed as the Pukeko
bird, or Swamp-hen.
105
106 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Kakano or kano also denotes colour: —
And i no, kei te kakano o te pdua, even as the
beautiful varying colours of the pdua shell (HaUotis) .
He pounamu kakano rua, a bi-coloured greenstone.
He aha te kano o td-ou kuri, what is the colour of thy
dog?
(See also kakano, fruit or berries, coloured.)
Ahua, appearance, includes form and colour.
Ahua /i i/a, driaria, resemblance.
Kawiti, hue, hues : —
Kei te kawiti o te Pdua, the pdua shell whose many
hues confess,
Ano i na ko Kahukura tonu, the varied colours of the
Rainbow's dress.
Kaka, fibre or grain of wood.
Parapara, coloured. Parahua, many-coloured.
Paratea, light colour, clear. Parauri, deep colour, blue.
Parariki, rusty colour. Parawera, burnt colour.
Paramanawa, colour one loves.
Parangunu, roasted colour. Parawhenua, earth colour.
Parahoro, water discoloured by a landslip.
Para, coloured with pimples or blotches (of the skin).
Adtea, clear atmosphere of day; transparent, bright
world, space.
Aduri, day or light blue. '
Pduri, night or deep blue.
Pouriuri, twilight blue.
Mdanauri, blue ocean.
Adrangi, sky world ; light and intelligence. Divine.
Pdrangi, lower world ; darkness and non-intellectual.
Adtea, Manakotea
.- the Magellan clouds.
Ao-un, manakoun \
Taidd, force of light, life, intelligence, construction.
Taipd, force of darkness, death, destruction, oblivion.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 107
WHITE.
Ma tonu, perfectly white. Ma, white.
Mdrikoriko, to glitter.
Ko ma, pale grey, light coloured.
Md kotingtinqo }
„ '.spotted white, as animals.
Purepure ma
Md tuawhero, white inclined to reddish, pink.
Md whakahekeheke, striped white.
Md manangu, darkish white.
Waikurakura, rusty grey.
Ahua md, white appearance.
Kirilea, kahurangi, fair, or clear-skinned.
Hina or mdhinafrina, grey-haired.
Hurukehu, light-coloured hair.
Mdrama, clear; transparent as Ad Mdrama.
BLACK.
Pango tonu, ma,ngu tonu, perfectly black.
Pdngo, mangu, black.
Mangumangu, black for blacking with, ink; a negro.
Parauri, blue black, of the complexion.
Whero-mamangu, bay, dark red.
Pouri, dark blue. Po kapua, dark clouds.
Hinau, permanent black dye extracted from the bark
of the Hinau tree (Elceocarpus dentatus}.
RED.
Whero tonu, tino whero, intensely red.
Whero, red. Whero tangike, peculiar red.
Kurawhero, choice red. Whewhero, reddish.
Koivhero, pale red. Piiwhero, pink.
Whero mamangu, dark red. Wheriko, glittering.
Kura, choice colour, scarlet (see under kura}.
Pdkurakura, choice crimson (see under kura).
108 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Ngangana, bright shiny red.
Parakaraka, orange. (This colour is seen in the
Karaka, Poroporo, Kawakawa and Kohia berries.)
YELLOW.
Parakowhai, a rich yellow dye obtained from the bark
of the Kowhai tree (Sophora t et rapt era} .
Karamu, yellow (obtained from the bark of Karamu
tree).
Whanariki, sulphurous yellow.
BLUE.
Uri, blue. (See Aduri, po uri, moana uri, etc.)
(The colour that is seen in the feathers of the Pukeko,
Kotaretare, and other birds.)
GREEN.
Kakariki, green. (Name of green parrot and green
lizard.)
Pounamu, greenstone (also used for green).
PURPLE.
Pokere, purple. (Seen in the purple kumara, taro,
and in the flesh of the tawa, taraire and kohutuhutu
berries.)
Tuapokere, violet. (Seen most particularly in the
flowers of the koromiko or veronica.)
BROWN.
Parapararau, colour of autumn leaves; brown.
Paratanekaha, brown, from bark of Tdnekaha tree.
INDIGO.
Tiiauri, blue black or black blue ; indigo.
DYE.
Tde, dye. See parawetd and tutae.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
109
FADED.
Hdtea, faded. Kud hdtea te tde, the dye has now
faded.
In addition to the foregoing, there are innumerable
terms for varieties and modifications of colours and tints
— Kura-whero, choice red; kura-pango, choice black, etc.
INSECTS AND REPTILES.
Ikawhenua —
Ngdrara-huarau, a mam-
moth reptile with feet.
Ngdrara, insect and small
reptilia.
Tiiatara, N.Z. iguana,
mammoth N.Z. lizard.
Kuri or pero, dog.
Popokorua, ant.
Matuhitiwhiti, grasshopper
Ngata, slug.
Titiwaiora, K a p o w a i,
dragon fly.
Ngaro, common fly.
Pepe, butterfly.
Hauwaha, caterpillar.
Awheto, Hotete, large
caterpillar.
Hawato 1 vegetable
Awhato \ caterpillar.
Wen J
Pungdwerewere, spider
Kararehe, animal (plural.
kirehe}.
Tdtarakihi, locust.
Pupu-rangi, snail.
Eango-tarnumu, pair 11,
humming fly.
Purelmreliu, moth.
Piliareinga, cricket.
Katipo, venomous spider.
N.Z.
Amphibian.
Mumutawa, ladybird.
Wetd, N.Z. tree cricket.
Mokomoko, pdpd, lizard.
Rd-mantis, jackstraw.
Tunga, soft wood grub.
Kihikihi, chrysalis.
Tiingoungou, larva, grub.
Namu and Ndende, sandfly.
Riha, nits.
Toke, worm.
Purdtoke, glow worm.
Kiori ti: kiore ~] death
tangiwairuru \ watch
Tdkititri } beetle.
Neinei, midge.
Kiitukiitu, iro, maggots.
Pokopoko, frog,
Pokopoko, N.Z. frog (?).
Pokokere (?), Pangoke-
reia ( Whakatohea] .
Pekapeka, bat.
Wen, centipede.
Kdkariki, green lizard.
JliiJni, grub.
Mokoroa, hard wood grub.
Kekererit, black bug, cock-
roach.
Wderoa, mosquito.
Kutu, louse.
Tuiau, keha, flea.
Kiore, rat.
110
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
FISH.
Ika ngohi, fish.
Ed, hdkari, /ma, eggs,
spawn, roe.
Rdngai ika, shoal of fish.
Tutara kauika, ocean hosts.
Te ivehenga kauika, whale
family.
Kdhui-moana, denizens of
the ocean (collectively)..
Pardoa, sperm whale.
Kekeno, seal.
Takapane.
Tuatini, blue shark.
Mako-taniwha, tiger shark
(found off Mayor Island)
Mango-pare, hammer-
headed shark.
Urerua, strong and bold
shark, with double penis.
Kapeta, dog fish.
Tupoupou, upokorua, por-
poise.
Pakake, sea lion, also
whale.
Tohoraha or Tohord, whale
Mango, shark.
Ptoke, young dog fish.
Pdea, sword fish.
Warehenga, 'haku, kingfish.
Whdpuku, mammoth cod-
fish ( groper) .
Whai, Pdkaurua, (also
manumanu), stingray,
skate.
Tuoro, monster eel; or
Taniwha.
Wheke, cuttle fish.
Para, hiku, frost fish.
Ran, ling.
Ngii, devil fish, squid.
Kopiiwaitotara, porcupine
fish.
Kloretoropuku, kioreta-
whiti, sea horse.
Kanae, mullet.
Pdkmkiri, blue cod.
Mararl, butter fish.
Pdtiki, flat fish.
Upokororo, grayling.
Korowhdwhd, anchovy.
Makuwhiti, koheru,herrmg
Mdomdo, "Ditrema vio-
lacea."
Kahawai, N.Z. salmon.
Tdmure, schnapper.
Kohi, hokahoka, trumpeter.
Warehou, sea bream.
Papaki, large-headed fish,
unfit for food, bad smell.
Tarakihi.
Kina, "echinus," sea egg.
Pdua, mutton fish.
Pdpaka, crab.
Kumukumu, gurnard.
Reperepe, nautilus.
Kuku, kutai, mussel.
Piipu, periwinkle.
Inanga, whitebait.
Ngoiro, conger eel.
Whairepo, mammoth sting-
ray.
Nohu, ape fish ( ?).
Koura, crayfish.
Manga, barracouta.
Reperepe, nautilus, ele-
phant fish (see Koro-
pepe}.
Maroro, flying fish.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
111
PakuraUura, red mullet.
Moihi, smelt.
Parore, bream, black perch
Hake, sole.
Takihi, ihe, takeke, garfish.
Kourarangi, shrimp.
Aua, sprat.
Tawatawa, ature, mackerel.
Kuparu, johndory.
Maratea, red schnapper.
Araara, trevalli, yellow tail
Moki, "Latris eiliaris."
Hanu, turtle.
Toheroa, mammoth shell
fish.
Ngakiki, mutton fish
variety.
Tio, oyster.
Porohe, small variety
mussel.
Pipi, cockle.
Kopuputai, sponge.
Rimu, kelp, seaweed.
Tuna-heke, eel (fat).
Tuna, common eel.
P ilia r a u, puhikorokoro,
boneless eel, lamprey
(similar to Tuere) (from
salt to fresh water).
Papanoko, "Te ika huna a
Tdne," red fins, fresh-
water.
Kokopu, trout.
Kewai, crayfish.
Pahuhu, spotties.
Tuere, blind eel (from
fresh to salt water).
Karawaka, silver-bellies.
Kdkahi, freshwater shell
fish.
Matau, fishhook.
Aho, line.
Hi, to angle.
Kalio, fishing rod.
Mata, tara, barb, point.
Maunu, bait.
Huti ika, to catch fish,
catching.
Ron, with hook attached to
the rod.
Kdkano, seed.
Whakapihi, shoots.
Ko timu, stump.
Tupu, a plant.
Tinana, trunk, barrel.
Ran, leaves.
Pua, bud.
Hua, fruit.
Tamore } , ,
„,. - trunk.
linana i
Kduru, head.
Manga, peka, branch.
Hono, fork.
RAKAU— TREES.
Kauri, ' ' Agathis aus-
tralis."
Rimu, red pine.
Rdtd, ' ' Inland Metroside-
ros."
Puriri, ''Vitex littoralis."
Mai, ''Podocarpus spi-
cata" (?)
Manuka, mammoth teatree.
Pihi, sprout.
Pakiaka, Paiaka. root.
Putake, base.
Tata, stalk.
112
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Mahuri, plants.
Koare, Kauri sapling.
Ptiawai, blossom.
Maoa, ripe.
Mata. unripe.
Kotimu, stump.
Kaka, grain.
Pona, Puku, knob.
T 6 1 a r a, " Podoearpus
totara."
Kahikatea, white pine.
Pohutukawa, ' ' Coast Met-
rosideros. ' '
Maire, ' ' Soulatum Cun-
ninghami. ' '
Matal, "Podoearpus
speciata."
Kahikdtoa, tea tree scrub.
Akerautangi, "Dodonea
viscosa."
Eewarewa, ' ' K n i g h t i a
excelsis. ' '
Miro.
Tltoki, Alectryon (pro-
duces black dye).
Tdwhiri, Pittosporum (?).
Kowhai, (produces yellow
dye).
Kohekohe, cedar.
Aide, "Papyrifera."
Towai, "Weinmannia race-
mosa. "
Mdnawa, mangrove.
Parapara (Pisonia), a bird
and insect killer.
Tarata, Pittosporum.
Matipou, red birch.
Tdtaka, silver leaf birch.
Pukapuka, wliar angi,
rangiora, mammoth leaf.
Patea, Patate.
Horopito, ' ' Drimys axil-
laris."
Kaikomako, fire tree (bot.
' Pennant ia corymbosa')
Ramarama, myrtle.
Popokonuiahura, P ik i-
arero, clematis.
Tl kumu, Southern.
Karamu, Coprosma.
Tol "Cordyline indivisa. "
Koran, tree fern.
Koliutuliutu, N.Z. fuchsia.
Ti, cabbage tree.
To harakeke, Korari, flax
stalk.
Aka, climber, vine.
Pananehu, greens.
Keha, a kind of turnip.
Mokimoki, scented fern.
Pokue tororaro, wild con-
volvulus.
Taramea, a very fragrant
smelling prickly plant.
Toatoa |"Phyllocladus
Tdnekaha] trichomanoides ' :
Pukatea, Laurelia.
Tawa, "Nesodaphnetawa."
Whlnau, ' ' Elaeocarpus clen-
tatus."
Mangedo.
Kawakawa, "Piper excel-
sum."
Ngaio.
Karaka, also koroire.
Taupata.
Tawdi, black birch.
T a r a i r e, " Nesodaphne
taraire."
Horoweka, lancewood.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
113
Aka torotoro, creepers,
climbers.
Tl Pore (Northern).
Mdnore, white wood.
N%kau, N.Z. Palm.
Kokihi, N.Z. Spinach.
Harakeke, flax plant.
Koromiko, veronica.
Kawariki, a plant.
Puka, broad, green, smooth,
shiny leaf, mistletoe.
Kdretu, scented grass.
Taro, ' ' Arum esculentum. ' '
Rape, large variety.
Korinorino, mottled woods.
Wdo nui a Tdne, great
forest of Tane.
Te manu huna a Tdne, the
extinct bird of Tane.
Refers to the extinction
of the Moa, "Dinornis."
" is the tutelary deity of the forest. Lesser
tutelary deities are : —
Hani, of the totara (Te Taukai, of the Rimu.
rakau a Hani). Hukuao, of Koromiko.
Rurutangiakau, of Maire. Puwhakahoro, of Akerau-
Kurateahuru, of Horopito. tangi.
Taiiho, uho, heart. Taitea, sap.
"He riri ano td te taua ulio; lie riri ano id te taua
para": "The strength of the heart is greater than that
of the sap." Or, "The actions of a Chieftain are far
superior to those of a plebeian."
Hine kotau ariki, pet term
for the tender scroll of
budding fern.
Whau, olive, "Entelea."
Parataichiti (fern) "Ma-
rattia salicina."
Toetoe, giant grass.
Tl tawhiti, cordyline.
Kawariki, a plant.
Keha, nanl, wild turnip.
Kowhai ngutu kaka, Kaka
beak or red kowhai.
Runa, dock.
Rengarenga, h'ly plant.
Piihd, Rauriki, thistle.
Kiekie, "Freycinetia bank-
sii."
WItarawhara, " A s t e 1 i a
banksii."
Pouwaka, Avater lily.
Tdtaramoa, bramble.
Karedo, supplejack.
Tl Eouka,
Raukawa, scented plant.
Tamtaru, weeds.
Koheriki, a plant.
Rahurahu, common fern.
Wdoriki.
Mauku, smaller varieties
of pretty bush ferns.
114 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
"E koa c nga mauku o roto o te Motu, ka mate a
Maruwehea. ' '
"Rejoice 0 ye ferns within the wood, Maruwehea is
dead."
A very fragrant and lasting scent was prepared from
the crushed leaves of the mokimoki fern, and the karetu
flowering grass mixed with the gum (ware) of the Tarata,
and steeped in oil procured from Titoki berries. — hinu
topitopi. In little scent bags these were worn around
the neck, hei wliakakakara, and were much prized. Oft-
times have mothers sung of their infants, and lovers of
each other: —
Taaku hei piripiri — my piripiri circlet (scented moss).
Taaku Jiei mokimoki — my mokimoki circlet (scented
fern).
Taaku hei tawhiri — my tawhiri necklet (fragrant gum).
Taaku kati taramea — my taramea, pricklet (scented
plant).
Saying :—
"I rongo ano a au, he patunga mokimoki te wai o
Punakitau. ' '
To A LOVED ONE.
To uru i piua ki te wai o te Kakahi :
To kiri mirimiri ki te hinu Taramea,
Ripo ana te kakara, e —
Thy hair laved with the waters of purification :
Thy skin anointed with the oil of Taramea,
Whose rippling perfume —
In connection with their marriage services, the
Chatham Islanders, having first recited the antiquity
and sacredness of the principle of joining in matri-
monial alliance, sang to the young couple (Pol. Journal,
vol. vi., p. 146) : —
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 115
No Puriri, no Huatapu — te urunga nei
Matiketike te urunga nei, marangaranga te urunga nei,
E tapu: e kura.
No Karetu, no Taramea — te urunga nei,
Matiketike te urunga nei, marangaranga — te urunga
nei,
& tapu: e kura.
No Piripiri, no Pirinoa — te urunga nei,
Matiketike te urunga nei. marangaranga — te urunga
nei. ,-, ,
E tapu : e kura.
No Mokimoki, no Pat ere, te urunga nei,
Matiketike te urunga nei, marangaranga te urunga nei.
E tapw: e kura.
TRANSLATION.
Of strong Puriri, of vigorous Huatapu — is this
alliance,
Be fruitful this alliance, be prosperous this alliance,
Be sacred: be treasured.
Of perfumed Karetu, of fragrant Taramea, is this
alliance,
Be fruitful this alliance, be thriving this alliance.
Be sacred: be treasured.
Of odorous Piripiri, of aromatic Pirinoa — is this
alliance,
Be fruitful this alliance, be prosperous this alliance.
Be sacred: be treasured.
Of sweet scented Mokimoki, or spicy Patere, is this
alliance,
For bearing upward this alliance, for weaving
together this alliance.
Be sacred: be treasured.
116
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Some of the trees and plants mentioned in this old-
time marriage ritual are peculiar to New Zealand ; they
do not grow at the Chathams. But the Chatham Island
lily now grows freely in New Zealand.
Rdkau ivhakarde, evergreen trees.
Rake, uru, or puia, grove (Rake Mahoe).
Pukohu kakara, scented moss.
Motu Ngdherehere, isolated tree clump.
Ngahere, wood, bush, forest.
Tumu, clump of large trees.
Koraha, open fern land.
Huaranga, to transplant.
Tin, to plant at regular intervals.
(NOTE. — The Taupata and Tarata survive blizzards.)
BIRDS— MANU.
Moa, "Dinornis."
Hokioi, a mythical bird
(? eagle).
Kdhoperoa, Kawekawed,
long-tailed cuckoo.
Kdahu, hawk.
Kdrewarewa-tara, bush
hawk.
Kdkdkura, crimson and
white parrot.
Kdkdriki, green parrot.
Kokorimako, bell bird.
Huia, "Heteralocha acuti-
rostris."
Weka, wood hen.
Par era, grey duck.
Whiorau, blue duck.
Matapo, or Tete, teal.
Kokako, wattled crow.
Koitdreke, or koreke, quail.
Puweto, swamp rail.
Pdtaitai, striped rail.
Koukou, or ruru, owl.
Purourou, lark.
Toutouwai, Totoara, robin.
Tlwaiwaka or Plrakaraka,
fantail.
Miromiro, pied tit.
Klkltori, a bird (extinct ?)
Puauau, bush wren.
Matuhi, green wren.
Tuturiwhalu, plover.
Tltlpounamu, or pihipihi,
rifleman.
Tleke, Jackbird, saddle-
back.
Takahea, "Notornis man-
telli."
Kiwi, "Apteryx."
Piplwharauroa, shining
cuckoo.
Kdeaea, sparrow hawk.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
117
Kdkd, brown parrot.
Kdkdtarapo, night parrot.
Ked, mountain parrot.
Till, parson bird.
Kukupa, wood pigeon.
Pukeko or Pdkura, swamp
hen.
Putangitangi, p a r a d is e
duck.
Tarawhatu, brown duck.
Pdpango, widgeon.
Kotuku, white heron.
Toitoi, creeper.
Mohopereru, rail.
Kotaretarc, kingfisher.
Kawau, shag.
Plhoihoi, ground lark.
Upokotea, canary head.
Kiroriro, gray warbler,
tomtit.
Tdmoioio, a bird (extinct?)
Matuku, bittern.
Mdtdtd, swamp wren.
Whiorangi, blight bird (a
new comer).
Hihi, stitch bird.
Piopio, thrush.
MISCELLANEOUS.
Manu tuduru, a "rara
avis. ' '
Manu tute, leader of a
flock.
Hurumanu, the smaller
feathers.
Awe manu,ihe white breast
feathers with skin at-
tached.
Hua manu, the eggs.
Ahere manu, bird noose.
Mdhanga, a snare.
Pokai manu, flock of birds.
Manu mokai, decoy bird.
Houmanu, or piki, the
larger feathers, plumes.
Pi manu, the young.
Tdhere manu, bird spear.
SEA BIRDS.
Huianui, or, Toroa, alba-
tross.
Toroapango, dark alba-
tross.
Taranui, giant tern.
Matuku moana, sea bittern.
Kuia, brown gull.
Kiiaka, godwit.
Korord, penguin (blue).
Torea, oyster catcher.
Tuturiwhatu, dottrel.
Kdruhiruhi, pied shag.
Amokura, frigate bird.
(K, Gould's petrel.
Pdrerarera, sandpiper.
Hdkoakoa, seahawk.
Takupu, gannet.
Tara, tern.
Karoro, gull.
Tarapunga, mackerel gull.
Taiko, black petrel.
U'poko tiwha, or Tdwhaki,
crested penguin.
Pohowera, banded dottrel.
Kawau, cormorant.
Aroarotea, white-breasted
shag.
Titl, mutton bird.
Tutumata, stilt.
Weweia, dabchick.
CHAPTER XI.
PROPER NAMES.
Tama nui te ra, illustrious son (of) the day; ruler
of day; sungod; emblem of light, life (not to be con-
founded with Te Manu-i-te-ra, a comet).
Hine nui te po, illustrious daughter (of) the night,
ruler of night, moon goddess, emblem of darkness, death.
Tamahine, son and daughter, son of daughter.
As Tama represents the son. or male, so Hine repre-
sents the daughter, or female. These terms therefore
enter very largely into the scheme of Maori proper names,
thus : —
Tamarangi. Hinerangi, of the sky, Heaven.
Tamaao, Hineao, of the light of the world.
Tamaarangi, Hinearangi, heavenly, divine.
Tamakura, Hinekura, precious wisdom, divine.
Tainaata, Hineata, of the morning.
Tamapo, Hinepo, of the night.
Tamatea. Hinetea, fair.
Tamarua, Hinerua, duality.
Tamarau, Hinerau. universality.
Tamarapa, Hinerapa, to cling.
Tamaahu, Hineahu, of industry.
Tamaharangi, Hineharangi. of the breath of heavenly
life.
Tamatai. Hinetai, of natural forces.
Tamahau. Hinehau, of the winds.
Tamakapua, Hinekapua, of the clouds.
Tamawai, Hinewai, of the waters.
118
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 119
Tamamoana, Hinemoana, of the ocean.
Tamawera, Hinewera, of heat.
Tamaahi, Hineahi, of fire.
Tamaru, Hineru, of earthquake and volcano.
Tamamanu, Hinemanu, of birds.
Tamaika, Hineika, of fish. Merman, mermaid.
Tamamoa, Hinemoa, of the moa, Dinornis.
Tamarei. Hinerei, of treasure.
Tamatiri, Hinetiri, of the plantation.
Tamauri. Hineuri, of descent, darkness.
Tamarepe, Hinerepe, of the Nautilus.
Tamahiri, Hinehiri, of cycles.
Tamawhiti, Hinewhiti, of the crossing.
(Hinewai-maori. Hinewaitai.)
And so on through the realms of universal phenomena
and abstract conception. These terms (tama and hine)
may also be attached to verbs, adjectives, or nouns that
serve to illustrate natural or particular requirements,
conditions, or incidents.
Rangi. the apparent source of light and life furnishes
expressive terms: —
Rangimarama. of clearness. Rangihaeata, of the dawn.
Rangiora. of life. Rangituhi, of delineation.
Mapuhiarangi, purity of heaven.
The articles are also employed thus: —
Te Hau. Nga Hau, the wind, the winds.
Te Moana, Nga Moana, the ocean, the oceans.
Te Ua. Nga Ua, the rain, the rains.
Te Tihi, Nga Tihi, the height, the heights, the pinnacle.
Te Puhi. Nga Puhi, the plume, the plumes, the virgins.
Te ITuka, Nga Huka, the frost, frosts.
Te Waka, Nga Waka, the canoe, the canoes.
To Toa. Nga Toa, the hero, the heroes.
120 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Te Whare, Nga Whare, the house, the houses.
Te Maunga, Nga Maunga, the mountain, the mountains.
Te Rua, Nga Rua, the pit, the pits.
The article is also used to illustrate individual charac-
teristics or peculiarities : —
Te Hake, the hunchback; Te Haua, the cripple; Te
Whito, the dwarf ; and these in many cases supersede
such person's true name.
Nga iwi, Nga-Puhi, Nga-I- te Rangi, Nga-ti-Rangi,
compared with Te tini o Uetahi, Te tini o Tonga nui,
Te tini uri-o-Hua, Ko (te) tini o te Aawhe-tu-uri,
Te uri-Taniwha, Nga Tini uri, Tangata, sufficiently show
the various forms of the tribal prefix, conventionally
written, "Ngati." This suffixed ti is a contraction
of tini — numbers, numerous. A-ti-Puhi, A-ti-Awa, and
A-ti-Hau is another form of contraction. Ngati must
not, therefore, be confounded with tiri (descendant) ; it
is an abbreviation of nga tini.
ON PLACE NAMES.
"By lake, stream, shore, wood, or mountain."
Tairea, high spring tides.
Tidal waves.
Nehutai, sea spray.
Taihua, high prolific tide.
Taipakupaku, low tides."
Kohutai, sea foam. Muritai )
T^ „ i\r • • Vsea breeze
Karetai, sea surface. Muriwai }
Karewai, water surface.
Taiharuru, sounding sea. Taiauru, westerly sea.
Ngataitangirua, ' the sea's
duet.
Taingarue, sea billows. Taiapua, embraced by the
sea.
Huatai, sea froth. Tirotiromoana, ocean view.
M5anataiari. dashing ocean Tangaroa, the Sea God.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
121
Te Amai, sea swell, quiet.
Tai Tonga, South sea.
Waitangi, wailing waters.
Waiouru.
Waingongoro, gurgling
waters.
Waimarie, peaceful waters.
Waiwhakaiho.
Waimatomato, cool placid
waters.
Waipapa, vale of waters.
Wai tai, tidal water.
brackish water.
Waimakariri, cold waters.
Te Awarere, the flowing
stream.
Awatere, fast flowing
stream, or river.
Puamoeawa, sleeping river
blossom.
Waimarama, clear waters.
Waimate, dead (i.e., slug-
gish) waters.
Waituhi, pencilled waters.
Ngaruawaahia, the parting
(of waters) (see context).
Ngawaiwaahia, the parting
waters.
Hau-mihi-ata, "incense-
breathing morn."
Manu tai, sea bird.
Waimatuhirangi. wraters
pencilled by the sky.
Waiwhakata, water mirror.
water of reflection.
Waikowhai, waters of the
laburnum.
Waipunab.au, fount of
water and air.
Tai Tokerau, North sea.
Te Akau, the surf.
Wairipori'po, rippling
waters.
Wai-6-ngana.
Wai Maori, fresh water.
Waiwera, hot waters.
Wairarapa, glist'n'g waters.
Wairere, flowing waters.
Waimarino, calm peaceful
waters.
122
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Waitara, water flowing
from mountain peak.
Mangarua, twin branch.
Te Huinga wai, the joining
waters.
Wai-nui-6-mata, waters of
great weeping, of thy
great tear drops.
Waitemata, the obsidian
water.
"Waiarangi, heavenly
waters.
Ruawaahia, split in two.
Roto, lake.
Rotomahana, warm lake.
Rotoiti, narrow lake.
Waikare, water surface.
Rotokino, bad lake.
Puia ,Waiariki, hot spring.
geyser.
Whakarewarewa, melter,
dissolver.
Taupo, gloom, shrouded.
dark, shadowed.
Pukaki, scrofulous neck.
Te Kapo, the lightning.
Manowai, extermination.
Whakatipu, to cultivate, to
add increase.
Manawa-pouri, sad or
gloomy heart.
Te Anau, move to and fro
(as lake reeds in a
breeze) .
Waiharoto, lakelets.
Horowhenua. earth swal-
lower, earth sink, earth
slide.
Ngawaipurua,
the waters.
meeting of
Waipounamu, greenstone
water.
Wahanga, bursting (ap-
plied to Mt. Tarawera).
Haroto, lakelet.
Rotorua, crater, or twin
lake.
Rotokare, surface lake.
Rotoehu, turbid lake.
Rotoma, white lake (white
sandy shore and bottom)
Tarawera, hot peak (fiery
mount) .
0 Hau, Thy winds.
Waikawa, waters of bitter-
ness.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
123
Waitomo, water entrance
(caves).
Puna, fount, spring.
Puwaha, W a h a p u, K o-
pounga, mouth, empty-
ing into sea.
Omapere, to cut off, re-
move. (Antagonistic to
life.)
Ruapehu, to spout, explo-
sive crater, blow hole,
belching crater.
Naki. peak.
Taranaki. violent peak.
Pihanga, vent, ventilator.
Tongariro, the remote
South.
Ruahine. old lady.
Kaimanawa, heart eating.
Hikurangi. tail (last) of
the day; sunset on high
mountain.
Tutamoi, standing to sink.
Maunganui, great mount.
Houhora, spreading in-
terior.
Te rerenga wairua, the
spirit's flight (place).
Cape Maria.
Ohaupo, ye winds of the
• night.
Raumanuka, tea tree leaf.
Pua Tarata, tarata blos-
Kauru, head, source.
Tararua, twin peak, two,
or, double peak.
Rimutaka, fallen rimu.
Putauaki
Tautoro, burning height.
Te Reinga, the plunging to
Spirit land.
Paparata, rata vale.
Raukumara, kumara leaf.
Tongatapu, sacred south.
som.
Meremere. morning star. Kapuarere, fleeting cloud.
Venus.
Ohinemuri. thy dear ones
remaining behind. i
Ngahau-tangirua, the
wind's duet.
124
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
O hauhau, ye gentle winds.
Ruarangi, twin skies
(open).
Aiorangi, calm heaven.
Heretaunga, held at
anchor.
Whanga, bay harbour,
haven, refuge.
Pukerua, twin hills.
Whangarei, steady,
charge !
Papamoa, moa dale.
Motutere, drift island.
Motutapu, sacred island.
Whakaari, to display.
Aorangi, sky light, sky
world.
Aotea, clear, light, atmos-
phere.
Aoteanuku, clear light on
earth, clear earth world.
Aomarama, light clear
world.
Aotearangi, clear, light of
heaven, etc.
Whakaahunuku, e a r t fa-
ward, earthly.
Whakaahurangi, heaven-
ward, heavenly.
Aoaanuku, earth world,
light.
Ao, atmosphere, atmos-
pheric light.
'Awhionuku, earth circle.
Rongo-nuku-o-Papa, heard
of the moving earth.
Rongo-nuku-o-Rangi, heard
of the moving heaven.
0 kura, of precious wisdom
Ruanuku, twin earths
(open).
Aionuku, calm earth.
Tauranga, anchorage,
moorage.
Puketapu, sacred hill.
Pukemoa, moa hill (Tara-
naki).
Ruataniwha, den of a
monster.
Moturoa, long island.
Motukaraka, karaka island.
Hauturu, wind rest, perch,
spot.
Aonuku, earth light, at-
mosphere.
Aoaorangi. sky world,
light.
Awhiorangi, sky circle.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
125
Papa-tu-a-nuku, the steadily moving earth.
Orangi Kaupapa, Thy heaven's basis. Floor of
heaven.
Tapuimkau, collection of Nikau.
Matemateaonge, extreme solicitude, lonely despair.
According to tradition, a building called Kai-Miru-
miru, a Marae called Tarawa-i-nuku, a Whata called
Paeahua, and a grave yard called Arakari, were buried
on the site of Mount Taranaki, in the days of Tahurangi.
SOME INCORRECT
Incorrect.
Ohora, harbour.
Rangounou, bay.
Mongonui, harbour.
Remuera (station).
Papatoitoi, village station.
Eltham, station.
Ngaire, village station.
Wanganui, town and river.
Wangaehu, river.
Kaiwarra, station.
Ngahauranga, station.
Petone, village station.
Waiwetu, village stream.
Karori, cemetery.
Ohiro.
PLACE NAMES.
Correct.
Houhora, spreading in-
terior.
Rangaunu, moving shoals.
Mangonui, great shark
(fish).
Remuwera, burnt heel.
Papatoetoe, toetoe meadow.
(Arundo conspicua).
Hora-porera. spread gar-
ment.
Ngaere, quivering morass.
Whanganui, great haven,
bay.
Whangaehu, turbid
(water) haven.
Kai Wharawhara, Whara-
whara food, Astelia.
Nga-uranga (waka),
(canoe) landings.
Pito-one, sands 'end, strand
end.
Waiwhetu, Star water.
Ka Rore, then trapped (of
Ngati-kahungunu) .
0-whiro, night preceding
new moon.
126
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Poneke, Wellington City.
Terawhiti, cape.
Wakatu, Nelson.
Kaiapoi, fortress.
Tinakori, road. Tina kore, dinnerless roacU
("Tina" corruption of
dinner) .
Po Neke (alleged corrup-
tion of Port Nicholson).
Te ra-whiti, the sun cross-
ing point.
Whakatu, to erect, to set
up.
Kai-apo-hia. food greedy
(Beware).
Wanaka, lake, (Ngaitahu Wananga, historical re-
dialect) . citals.
Wakatipu, lake. Whakatipu, to rear, grow,
create, foster.
Kaikorai. Kaika Ra, sun eaten
(Ngaitahu).
Otago, harbour. 0-Takou, thy red ochre.
Waihola, lake. Waihora, spreading water.
Manapouri, lake. Manawra-pouri, gloomy
heart.
Monowai, lake. Manowai, extermination.
WHAKATAUKI MAORI— MAORI APHORISMS.
Ka hou ki te whenua, he Tungoungou: ka puta ki te
rangi he Pepe: Sink into the earth, as a chrysalis;
emerge (therefrom) to the sky (heaven), as a butterfly.
Said of body and soul.
He nui Tangata e heke ana ki te Po; he iti Tangata
e kake ana ki te Rangi: Many persons are sinking to
Darkness Eternal; few persons are ascending to the
Sky (Heaven).
He Kotuku rerenga tahi: a Kotuku (bird) of one
flight (i.e., like angels' visits, etc.).
Ki a rongo Koutou, hore mai he taringa, e ai ko
Tawhaki: "Kahore he Tira o raro, i hoki ake ki runga" :
"Hearken ye, turn hither an ear, thus spake
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 127
Tawhaki": "No company from below (death) has ever
returned upwards (to life)."
E koa e ngd Mauku 6 roto o te Motu, kd mate a
Maruwehea: Rejoice 0 ye ferns within the Woods,
Maruwehea is dead.
Me poupou te tahi aho, me korewa te tahi:~(Jse one
fishing line perpendicularly, the other floating near the
surface. (Do not put all your eggs into the same
basket).
He td kakaho e kitea, he td ngakau e kore e kitea:
Deviating and fanciful processes in reedwork are per-
ceivable, those of the heart (mind) are imperceivable.
He heu uta ka kitea, he heu moana e kore e kitea:
The traces of (a being) ashore may be discovered, those
upon the ocean may not.
"He tad huata e idea te karo, he tad kl e kore e
tdea" : While the thrust of a spear-shaft may be effec-
tively parried, that of a shaft of speech, may not.
Mua ata haere, muri tdtd kino: Front advance
leisurely, rearmost hurry incontinently (delay not).
E tata mate, e roa taihoa: While delay retards, death
overtakes.
Ka mahi rd koe, te riri a te "Taeo," ara, a te Too.
(He mango Urerua) Hdere i mua, moou Heretaunga:
(Haste in advance for thee Heretaunga (The early bird
gets the worm).
Ma tini, nid mano, k-d rapa te wliai: By many, by
thousands, the object will be attained. (Unity is
strength).
Hohonu kaki, pdpaku uaua: Deep neck, shallow
muscles, or "Greedy but idle withal."
Nd toou kahawai ngako nui, to aroaro tahuri ke:
'Tis the fatness of thy fish, which causes thee to turn
(from us). The wealthy scorn those of poor estate.
128 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
He tangata to Tu, lie tangata and to Rongo; ka koe i
ware-ware: Tu is a force, so also is Bongo — you forgot
(the latter).
Kd mihi au, ki te kowhatu i tunua ai te Moa: Now
I greet to the stone once used to roast the Moa (cook by
steaming in a Maori earth oven).
Ko te uri o te Rangi, e kore te Mango e tunua ki te
alii; ki te tunu te Tangata i te Mango, ka tde te piro
ki te ihu o Rangi, kd mate tend Tangata : The descend-
ants (Immortals) of the sky will not roast Shark with
fire; should Man (mortal) roast Shark, the smell thereof
will reach the nose of Heaven and that Man shall die."
("0 my offence is rank, it smells to Heaven").
Pu ana a roto, ke ana a waft 0: inwardly precise, out-
wardly otherwise — ( Un reliable . )
Ko te tokomaha o Rangiwhakaanyi : Tis the numbers
of lightness and ease. (Many hands make light work.)
He pakanga td te ngdrahu, lie pakanga ki te Motu-
motu; he pakanga td te motumotu, he pakanga ki te
ngdrahu : Charcoal battles with firewood ; firewood
battles with charcoal.
Kd kai kopu, kd iri whata: When hunger is satisfied,
store the residue. (Wilful waste makes woeful want.)
Te kakl ururua, d au mahi : Thy actions, O voracious
neck! (Greediness to choking).
A au mahi, e Ware! Thy actions, O slave!
A te Rangatira d ana mahi: the acts of a nobleman.
He Awhato koe na, Kia Tukeri iho, ka puta ake, Ara!
he Kumara! Thou art a caterpillar. To dig down
(sink) then reappear. Well, well, as a Kumara!
Hdere Koe i tc ara a Taihoa, ki a tde ai koe ki aua
atii: Go thou upon the pathway of by and by, in order
that thou mayst reach No-where.
Kapo rere te Kuri : The dog snatcheth suddenly.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 129
Ko te motuhanga i a Raumano : 'Tis as the severance
of Raumano. (A tract of land which suddenly dis-
appeared from the mouth of the Patea river.)
Ko te manu huna a Tdne : 'Tis the extinct bird of
Tane. (Refers to the extinction of the Moa. Also said
of a canoe lost at sea.)
E hara i te Toko, tu ake, he toka hdpai mai no ngd
ivhenua : 'Tis not a native or original rock, 'tis a rock
raised hither from other lands.
Kimi kau : vain search.
He wdewde tapeka ki te ara rlpeka: a foot which
diverges crosswise. (At right angles; from right to
wrong; from the pure to impure.)
Ngatitoka u, Ngatitoka Mere : Settled tribe, wandering
tribe.
E kore a Taranaki e ngaro, Tie harakeke tongai nui no
roto no Waiwiri: Taranaki (tribe) shall not perish,
decay will invigorate (them,) even as the flax plants
from within Waiwiri.
Kd pu te ruha; Kd had te rang at alii: age sinking to
the grave ; the youthful vigorous.
Ngaro d moa: lost to sight, extinct after the manner
of the Moa.
He taringa whitirua: ears listening to two things at
once; (and hence retaining nothing).
He taringa muhukai: Ears whose only interest lies in
food-calls.
He pounamu kakano-rua: A bi-coloured greenstone. (A
person of two minds. Two-faced.)
Rdngai Mdomdo kd taka ki runga d Nukutaurua, e
kore a miiri e hokia: A shoal of Mdomdo (ditrema
violacea) which passes to the south of Nukutaurua, does
not retrace its way. (Expresses a determination to
continue that which is undertaken.)
130 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Awhea rd te puta ai te Upoko tdona Marama nei:
ancient curse at the moon.
Kd ngaro i te ngaro a te Moa: disappeared, even as
hath the Moa.
Te ran o Piopio: name of a feather of the extinct
Moa. (The feather was worn as a plume by Kowhai-
kura.)
Moe ana te mata hi tuna, ara ana te mata hi taua:
The eel fishers' sleep is tranquil, that of the warrior
disturbed.
He aha te kai e whara i d iaf What harm can he do?
What can he accomplish?
Ko te Tai i whakaklia e Marutawhiti: 'Tis the sea
inundation act, of Marutawhiti. (Refers to a sub-
mergence, after the manner of a huge tidal wave, at
Hokianga.
E hara te Toa taua, he toa pdhekeheke; kd pa ko te
toa mahi kai, e kore, e paheke : The fame of the warrior,
is perilous (slippery) ; that of the industrious cultivator
is not so.
Te toa taua, ma te taua; te toa piki rdkau, md te
rdkau; ko te toa mahi kai, md te huhu, md te popo,
Md te hanehane : The warrior becomes a victim of war ;
the tree climber a victim of the tree; the industrious
cultivator sinks peacefully to the grave and his end is
a natural one.
E hara te kai a te tangata, he kai tongitongi; kd pd
nd tdona ringa ake, tino kai, tino mdkona: Food from
another person is not desirable (to be desired), 'tis eaten
sparingly; but that secured by one's own hand
(industry) is eaten with such relish as to prove com-
pletely satisfying.
He dha, to kai? He para to kai, taka ana ngd hua
6 te whakairo : What is thy food ? An Para were they
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 133
food, the traces of tattoo-ing should frisk upon thy face.
(Said of highly relished food.)
Kua mdda te Tdewa: The potato is now cooked.
Saying of Te Whiti, the Parihaka adviser and leader of
his people. The potato in question was a figure for
the Maori people, cooked by European fire-arms and
acts of confiscation. Being cooked the Europeans might
eat it, without further formality.
Kdkariki i tunua, kdkariki i otaina : 'Tis a parroquet,
whether roasted, or eaten raw. ("A man's a man for a'
that.")
Kd mate Ru kai horof kd ora Ru kai whakatonu:
The volcano swallows and destroys, the earthquake pre-
serves intact. (The wasteful glutton is condemned, the
frugal commended.)
Ko ngd kerikeringa o Ruaumoko: 'Tis the fissures
cleft by the volcano. (Said of the Whanganui river
channel, which, tradition alleges, was cleft open when
Ruapehu and Tongariro were active.)
Kd mau td Maid ki taana ringa, e kore e tdea if
ruru: That which Maui seizes, cannot be wrested from
his grasp. (Maui personifies the forces of attraction
and repulsion. He is a puller down and builder up.
In popular story he is credited with having recovered the
North Island, N.Z., from the deep; hence its name,
" 'Te ika a Maui"— the fish of Maui, and "Te ahi a
Maui" — the fire (volcanic) of Maui.
Ngdpuhi taniwha-rau: Ngapuhi's demons are legion;
(disturb not their peace.)
Te upoko rite 6 Hawaiki: the perfect headdress of
Hawaiki.
Atua kd kura i te Rangi: Waiho te mate mo Hapopo:
God manifests his power in the heavens, yet abandons
Hapopo to a miserable fate.
132 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
SELECTED PHRASES.
Tau ana te ivehi : awe inspiring.
Nga manu 5 Rehua: the birds of Sirius (locust and
cricket) .
Nga karere o Mahuru : the messengers of Spring,
(Kawekawea and Pipiwharauroa, Swallow and Cuckoo).
He kupu irirangi : words of divine import or sound.
Te Kura korero : the divine gift of speech.
E purutia paitia ana : held in willing claims.
Tangi te roria: Sounds the harp.
Te hoa o to-oku taitamarikitanga: the companion of
my youth.
He tangi noa : an empty sound.
Te moana riri: the angry ocean.
Matua kite, Mdtua rongo: first opportunity to see,
first opportunity to hear.
Ko ahau kua whakaorangia : my being is now pre-
served.
Kei a wai te pono : Who has the truth 1
Korero wahakore-. silent testimony, voiceless speech.
Hei 6 ake md tama roio : to sustain the inner man.
I te aroaro makanatanga o te Rd: in the warm
presence of the Sun.
Ka tangi mai te reo : The voice then sounds hitherward.
Whakarongo, whakarongo kite uru: List, list to the
surges of the West.
Ki a hei taakn ate i te tau o taana tiki: to encircle
my liver with the loop of its image (being) .
Ko te Whatitiri tuhia iho o ona ara ki te Uira: 'Tis
the Thunder whose pathways are recorded in Lightning.
Ka whakaraupeka i aku mahara: My fond reflections,
gathering, muse.
Ko koe, e Tail e arohatia nei e au : 'Tis thee, 0 Tai !
whom I thus sadly mourn.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 133
Te Atarau 5 Poutama, the moonlight of Poutama.
(Beautiful). (Said of fine moonlight in which to shell
karaka berries.)
Ed pa te Kdwatawata aroha: touched with the pangs
of sympathy, affection, love.
Te maid huatau : the face of beauty.
Kd tangi a au ki te hunga kua kopania atu ra ki te
Tatau o te Po: I mourn for those who are now enclosed
by the Gate of Night, (i.e., of death).
Te wa,ho, runanga, Too, ra ki te riri, e: the eloquent
in council and valiant in war.
Taaku hau-kdinga: my beloved home.
Taaku whenua tupu : my native land.
Kua nunumi atu nei i to-oku aroaro: now vanished
in silence from my presence.
Kia ora koe: Health, long life and prosperity unto
thee.
/ ngd tumanaako e whakarau noa nei : in the presence
of these piles of shattered hopes.
Ka rapupuku ngd whakaaro : The thoughts muse.
Tauwhdinga whakanunumi: vanishing hopes.
Ngd hihi o te ata : the beams of the morn.
Te Hau mihi ata: the "incense-breathing morn."
Tau ana te tlare i te rdkau: the pleasant fragrance
of the woods.
Kia tia pdruru ki te kotore Huia: to dress the hair
with Huia tail-feathers.
Tau ana te rangimdrie: Peace reigned supreme.
Te kakaratanga o nga mahi toa: the perfume of
heroic deeds.
Kia rewa noa iho ahua i te ahuareka: dissolve me into
ecstasies.
Ki te whai do, ki te do-mdrama: to the bright light of
eternal dav.
134 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Ka tatdo te koliu ki te motu : The fog drapes the woods.
Te tino koha, he atawhai ki te tangata: the precious
gift, humanity to man.
Ata whakahdhd e ngd hau, te ngaru e momoe mdriri:
Breathe soft ye winds, ye waves in silence sleep.
Ko te kupu-kl e kore rawa nei e tdea te whakahoki-
hoki : As the spoken word can never be recalled.
He arolio pumau : a fixed regard, an unending
devotion.
Ko ngd umu 6 Rongomai : 'Tis the ovens of Rongomai
(lunar craters).
Tihei mauri-ora, matihei, here i te kdkano o te rangi:
Sneeze living soul, sneeze, bind the seed of the sky
( heaven, life).
Te whakahiangongo o te ngd-kau : the aspiration of
the heart.
Te mata o te whenua : the face of the earth.
Hoki mai e roto ki te puia nui ki Tokaanu: Return
0 my soul to the precious waters of Tokaanu.
Kia urupu tdtou, kaua e taukumekume : Let us be
united and let not variance divide.
Kia kotahi te ki : Declare with one accord.
Ka koea te ara o Puanga: The advent of Rigel (in
Orion) is proclaimed and sanctified. (Rigel is the star of
' the Maori new year, June) .
Ko ngd tapu-wde o Rehua : 'Tis the invisible footfalls
of Sirius (peculiar rumblings "heard at nightfall, when
Sirius is on the meridian, midsummer).
Ka whakahua i taana tangi: Then sang his lament.
E Rua au, e Moe au, e Awa au : I am a descendant of
Ruanui, of Moerewarewa, and of Awanuiarangi.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 135
KORERO-TARA, or FABLES.
The Locust and the Ant.
Tdtarakihi : —
Hohoro mai, e te hoa,
Kaua e whakaroa, 6 — I;
A-ra-rd! ka turua td te Popokorua!
Rawe noa td ngd taki-whakahau.
Popokorua : —
U mai tdua ki te keri,
I te rua, mo te Ua o te rangi
Mo te Makariri wero i te Po nei, e;
Me te koJii mai and i te kdkano, e,
Hei 0 ake md tama-roto,
Kia or a ai, e — I — nd.
Tdtarakihi: —
He pai aha koia tdaku he noho noa,
Piri ake ki te peka 6 te rdkau,
Ina, ind noa ake ki te Rd e whiti nei,
Me te whakatangi Kau i aku paihau, e —
Ta ra rd ta, kita, klta,
Ta ra rd ta, klta, klta,
Wiri 6 papa, toene, toene,
Wiri o papa, toene, toene.
Or—
Locust : —
Haste hither quickly O my friend,
Do not delay, the call attend;
Wondrous the ant's creative skill.
Harmonious with instructor's will.
Ant:—
Come hither, and together bore
A pit, to shield from rains which pour
136 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
From wintry skies, with piercing blast;
And here collect the seed and grain,
Which shall our inner selves sustain,
To live till winter's night sweeps past.
Locust : —
What is my chief, nay, sole delight1?
To cling me close to branch of tree,
To bask in sunshine warm and bright
And rustle these my wings with glee.
(Singing — ) Ta ra ra ta, kita, kita,
Ta ra ra ta, kita, kita;
0 quivering sides sound your refrain,
0 quivering sides sound your refrain.
Moral, — pleasures are transient, permanent comfort
can be secured only by prudence and industry.
Note, — The songs of the locust and cricket ("Ngd
Mann o Rehua, or, the birds of Sirius, midsummer) are
very highly esteemed by the Maori.
Nga karere 6 Mahuru, The messengers of spring.
(Mahuru is spring personified. The messengers of
spring are the cuckoos; the Pipiivharauroa, or shining
cuckoo, and the Kawekawea, or, long- tailed cuckoo.)
CHAPTER XII.
ON THE TOHUNGA.
By tohunga is meant an initiate, a metaphysician, an
adept. Amongst the principal orders of tohunga
were the: —
Tohunga 6 Rongo, (of Rongo, god of Peace and
Plenty.)
Tohunga o Tdne (of Tdne, lord of light whose symbol
is the sun.)
Tohunga o Tu (of Tu, god of war.)
Tohunga karakia: ritualist, intercessor.
Tohunga kokorangi: astrologer, astronomer.
Tohunga-ki, or Matakite: seer, diviner, prophet.
Tohunga tuhi mata : fortune teller.
Tohunga whakakite ivairua: spiritualist (one who
produces spirits).
Tohunga ndnd : anatomist, physician.
Tohunga whakapd: specialist (one whose knowledge
enabled him, when so required, to prevent a fruitful
woman from further conceiving).
Tohunga tito ivaiata: poet and historian.
Tohunga mdkutu : magician, wizard.
Tohunga korero : orator.
Those were collectively the advisers, teachers, guides,
counsellors, historians, and law-givers of the people.
There were also the experts : —
Tohunga td-moko : expert tattoer.
Tohunga whakairo : expert carver.
Tohunga tdrai-ivaka : expert canoe-making instructor.
A tino tohunga (see "tino") was of the highest class;
a tauira was an acolyte, disciple, or subordinate.
137
138
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
PARTS OF THE HUMAN BODY.
Mahunga, the whole of the hair of the head.
Huruhuru, hair. Makawe, lock of hair.
Tumuaki, crown of head. Mdtenga, upoko, head.
Pane, takataka, noddle. Roro, brain, spinal marrow
Roro-iti, little brain (cere- Rde, forehead, brow.
bellnm).
Rahirahinga, a o ngd Pewa, hair-arched eye-
kanohi, temples.
Tukemata, eyebrows.
Kamokamo, eyelashes.
Ko.ru. eyeballs.
Kanohi, eye.
Ihu, nose.
Pongd-ihu, nostril.
Moremorenga, point
nose.
Ngutu, lip.
Ngutu raro, lower lip.
brows.
Rape ) r,
Rewharewha] eye
Pi-kanohi, corners of eye-
lids.
Karupango, whatu, pupil
of eye.
Mata, face.
Kaka o te ihu, bridge of
the nose.
Poniania, lower part of
nose,
of Pdpdringa, cheeks.
Ngutu runga, upper lip.
Kauwde, jaw.
Kauwde runga, upper jaw. Kauwde raro, lower jaw.
Mdngai, mouth. Waha, inside of mouth.
Pdkiwaha, inner sides of Kiritai, hiako, skin cuticle.
mouth.
Kiriwai, mucous mem- Putaputa kiri, pores of
skin.
Niho tapahi, incisors.
Niho matai, or niho kopua,
back teeth.
Tako, gums.
brane.
Niho, teeth.
Niho pu, molars.
Pdewai, visible gums.
Arero, tongue.
Ngdo horomi, epiglottis.
Korokoro, throat.
Pu-kauwde, chin.
Hoi, lobe of ear.
Piki-arero, roof of mouth.
Pona korokoro, or, tenga,
Adam's apple.
Taringa, ears.
Torino, ear drum.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
139
Pu-taringa, ear-tube.
Tdturi, wax in ear.
Kopako, back of neck.
Ua-mutu, nape of neck,
upper end of spinal
column.
Toto, blood.
Tahei, taumanu, pdemanu,
collar bone.
Tdkakau kikopuku, upper
arm.
Keke, armpit.
Ringa, arm.
Manawa-ringa, pulse.
Pona-ringa, knuckle.
Angaangamate, back of
hand.
Makaurangi, spirals of
finger-tips.
Toinui, koromatua, thumb.
U, nipple.
Rara, or, ivhiti-uma, breast
ribs.
Raramutu, or, whitimutu,
short ribs.
Pito, navel.
Iho, or, uho, umbilical cord
Hope, waist.
Whekau, bowels.
Manawa, breath.
Au, gall.
Ateroa, pancreas.
Whatukuhu, kidneys.
Matakupenga, net of fat
covering bowels.
Uaua, muscle, sinew, vein.
Kikokiko, flesh.
Tuara, back.
Kohamu, back of head.
Weto, wax in eye corners.
Kaki, neck.
Uaua toto, blood veins.
Pokohiwi, shoulder.
Kikowhiti, forearm.
Tuketuke, elbow.
Kauititanga, wrist.
Ringaringa, hand.
Kapu, paroparo, palm.
Toi, maikara, fingers.
Maikao, maikuku, finger
nails.
Uma, rei, chest, bosom.
Rara, or, whiti, ribs.
Rara, or, kapewhiti, seven
true ribs.
Kaokao, sides.
Kopu, belly.
Puku, stomach.
Kone, or, tia, pit of
stomach.
Ngdkau, heart.
Ate, liver.
Polio, diaphragm.
Whatumanawa, lungs.
Taupd, fat covering
kidneys.
Takapu, takapau, womb.
Taraihi, taraena, nerves.
Matii, ngako, hinu, fat, oil.
Aroaro, front.
140
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Ure, kiko, membrum virile.
Iwi tuaroa, spinal column. Whetia, or, iwi, bone.
Totoine, sacrum, lower end Tinana, body, trunk.
spinal column.
Mutu, lower end of spine.
Teke, tore, pudenda mulie-
bria.
Kin matamata, foreskin. Ngahu, sebaceous matter
beneath foreskin.
Paraheka, semen.
Tero, kotore, anus.
Kaho, testicles.
Tongdmimi, bladder.
Kumu, posterior.
Himu, hip.
Wde, leg.
Tupehau, part of leg be-
tween foot and knee.
Ateate, calf.
Pungapunga, ankle.
Papa, breech, hip.
Huhd, thigh.
Turi, knee.
Kauangawai, above ankle.
Wdewde, feet.
Raparapa, upper surface Kapukapu, lower surface
foot. of foot.
Rekereke, heel. Matimati, toes.
Konui, great toe. Koikara, toe nails.
Remu, back of the heel.
(Tapu-wde, footfalls. Takahanga, footprints.)
BONE-SYSTEM.
Koiwi, complete skeleton. Angaanga, skull.
Papa o te angaanga, roof
"of the skull.
Pii-karu, eye-sockets.
Pu-taringa, ear-cavities.
Pakoko, shoulder-blade.
Papahua, joints of jaw
bones.
Ponga-ihu, nasal passages.
Papakai, shoulder bone.
scapula.
Koko, socket.
Kokako, thigh bone.
Hononga, joint.
Pona, knuckle joint.
Iwi tuaroa, spinal column. Mutu, coccyx.
Tahau, tibia and fibula, leg
bones.
Pa hikoinga, hip bone, A o te kaki, collar bone.
pelvis.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
141
Rei 6 te tarauma, or, Mona-
mona, breast bones.
Turipona, knee bone.
Kapiti, small bone of fore-
arm.
AILMENTS AND
Kua mate, kua hemo, dead.
Kaikino, cold-b 1 o o d e d
murder.
Whakamate, put to death.
Roria, poisoned.
Whati poro, compound
fracture.
Whara, bruise, hurt, crush.
Nanati korokoro, to
strangle.
Materoto, still born.
Mate paerangi, chronic ill-
ness.
Whakakd, inflammation.
Kohi, or, kohi-d-kiko, wast-
ing disease, consumption
-(as waning moon).
Mate tuwhenua, dropsical,
leprous.
Ngene, goitre.
Polic, matapo, blind.
Nawe, scar.
Porangi, deranged.
Paremo, to be drowned.
Motu, cut.
Win, shivers.
Katirehe, quinsy.
Ringa kero, Avithered hand
or arm.
Wheua kakl, neck bones.
DISEASES.
Matemate, ailing.
Kohuru, murder.
Whakamomori, seek death,
suicide.
Whati, fracture.
Takoki, taui, out of joint.
Maru, badly bruised.
Whaturama, rupture.
Mate kirika, burning fever.
Mate urutd, epidemic.
Korue, Mate kongenege,
dying of old age.
Ngoio, Kume, manawarua,
huango, asthmatic, bron-
chitis.
Pukaki, scrofulous, tumour
Pakiivhara, Paipai, syphilis
(modern).
U'auawhiti, contracted
sinews.
Ira, birthmark.
Porangi, subject to fits.
Wera, burn or scald.
Tu, pierced.
Kupapaahi, pyrites.
Kikoliunga, gangrene.
Ringa kawiu, shrunken
arm.
142 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Einga hukihuki, contracted Ua kaki, ricked neck.
arm.
Niho tunga, toothache. Huahua, pimples.
Maremare, rewharewha,
wharowharo, cough, bad
cold.
Wharo, phlegm. Huhare, spittle.
Koipuipu, blisters. Komaoa, ulcerated.
Ngaruru, ngdhoahoa, head- Kiritona, wart, stye.
ache.
Mdngiongio, chilblains. Kanohi keko, squint-eyed.
Kikiki, to stammer, stutter. Pirau, tongako, matter,
pus.
Taematuku, purulent, mat- Whewhe, boil or abscess.
tery.
Hakihaki, itch. Iroiro, worms, thread-
worms.
Mate huia, cramps. Huiki, state of extreme
cold.
Toriwai, watery eyes. Muna, patito, ringworm.
Puku, swelling tumour. Ilaud, cripple.
Hake, hunchback. Wde-hape, bumble-foot.
Whito, dwarf. Mate ivahine, mate toto,
menstruation.
Tl nga taringa, ringing Kupd, flatulence.
noise in ears.
Koripi, koangi, mate tiko- Raoa, choked.
tiko, diarrhoea.
Marido, ulcer. Ruaki, vomit.
Tuwheke, covered with Mate rehea, paralysis, help-
sores, less.
Ringa mutu, lost arm. Wde mutu, lost leg.
Ngehengehe, weakly, faint. Toti, to limp.
Kanohi karapa, cross-eyed.
(NOTES. —
Mamde, pain. Inati te mamde, agonising
pain.
Whakamauru, to relieve of Mauru, eased of pain.
pain.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Whakakiha, to gasp.
Tiko, to evacuate.
Hamama to waha, open
your mouth.
Kukua to ringa, close your
hand.
Tit aha, turn (yourself).
Wharoro o waewae, stretch
out your legs.
Noho tu, sit up.
E tu ki rung a, stand up.
(The word mate, may
foregoing terms expressing
it is preferable to use it.)
Niho tetea, to gnash the
teeth.
Mimi, to urinate.
Kopia to mdngai, close
your mouth.
Whatero to arero, put out
your tongue.
Hupeke o waewae, draw up
your legs.
Takoto, lie down.
be prefaced to any of the
ailments, diseases, and so on ;
TAKARO, OR, SPORT AND PASTIME, DRILL.
Whakakite waewae, or,
Tutu ngarahu, war
dance or drill.
Whakahoro rakau, war-
spear drill.
Haka, male posture song.
Titl-tourea, drill with
staves.
Reti, sliding on land.
Moari, swing from pole
placed beside a cliff or
river-bank (an exciting
and risky pastime).
Whakaangi manu Aute,
scientific kite-flying (a
national sport).
Kotaha, stone slinging.
Tdkaro mamau, wrestling.
Tdkaro omaoma, foot races.
Whakarite rakau, mimic
duel.
Poi, female posture song
(with Poi ball).
Moki, surf -swimming with
planks.
Piu teka, dart throwing.
Whakatere Waka, canoe
racing.
Tdkaro tupeke, leaping.
Whawhai mekemeke, fight-
ing with fists.
144
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Poutoti, stilting.
Rukuruku, diving.
Kaukau, bathing.
Whakangau Kiwi, hunting
kiwi with dogs,
instru- Plrori, game of hoops.
Piki rdkau, tree climbing.
Wha k at angitangi,
mental music.
Td Potdka, top spinning.
Ti, Matimati, finger game. Karihi taka, finger game.
Koruru, played with five Whai, cat's cradle.
pebbles.
Tokoraurape, K e r et do, Purorohu, bull-roarer.
jumping Jack.
Purerehua, whizzer or Ripi, game of ducks and
buzzer.
Piupiu, skipping.
Korero tar a, story telling
(popular winter p'as-
time) .
Ruriruri, ditty contest
(ditties to be original).
Makamaka, panga, riddles. Kanikani, a dance.
Mu, draughts.
NOTES. — All games were termed tdkaro, but a house
or hall of amusement was termed a Whare Rehia.
drakes.
Taupupuni, hide and seek.
Papa, contest ground.
Toa, victor, winner.
Piro, end of any game.
LAW OF TAPU.
That the law of tapu (lit., ceremonial restriction,
conventionally sacredness) was universally observed
throughout Polynesia, the records of early observers
quite clearly establish. The head of a person of any
particular standing, was always regarded as being tapu.
But, in addition to the head, the whole person of an
Arilii (overlord) was tapu, and was so by birthright.
Similarly, the whole person of a powerful tohunga
(initiate, adept, priest) who in ritualistic practice
(karakia) maintained personal communication with the
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 145
gods of his fathers, was also tapu; for the secluded tuahu
(altar) which he daily visited was held in itself to be
an extremely sacred spot. Here, when communing (ko)
with the gods, a high priest would on the most solemn
occasions, provide himself with stone eye-covers (karu-
powhatu), a kind of stone spectacle-shaped arrangement,
balanced, similarly, on the nose, but without apertures
for the sight. He also used a stone mouth-piece (waha-
powhatu), a kind of stone lips, held over the mouth,
with an aperture for the emission of sound, i.e., the
words of his ritualistic address to the gods. The stone
eyes were used on the principle that should a god reveal
himself, the mortal eyes of the tohunga were unfit to
look upon him; the priest must see with the spiritual
eye only. The stone lips were used on the principle
that he must not expose to the gods his mortal, therefore
vulgar, lips. But, behind all this, there existed the firm
belief that the gods themselves both looked and spoke
through stone mediums. (Doubtless in the evolved or
created works of solid matter). Finally, those who
assisted the tohunga in the disposal of the dead and in
the subsequent work of exhuming (liahunga) the bones
and removing them to their permanent resting place —
were also placed under the more or less temporary ban
of tapu. So far then personal tapu.
In addition to personal tapu, articles of every con-
ceivable nature came under the law of tapu. This could
be imposed in various ways, but chiefly by the thing to
be tapued being formally ritualised or touched, whether
intentionally or not, by a person whose hand was
permanently or temporarily tapu. In its turn any such
article communicated such tapu to any person not other-
wise tapu, who had touched it, whether intentionally or
146 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
not. Thus, an ordinary person who (and this would be
unintentional) stepped on to a tudhu, or any sacred
burial place, would instantly become tapu. If such
person did not then die, as he sometimes did, he would
be isolated until the tapu was duly removed from him
(whakahoro) by a tohunga. It has been a matter of
common occurrence under these circumstances, for a
person to die before the services of the tohunga could be
brought to his aid. It may be laid down that all forms
of tapu, excepting that inherited, or that acquired by
a powerful tohunga, could be effectually removed by a
tohunga. And as it was the business of women to attend
to household matters and the dressing and handling of
food, very few women indeed were regarded as being
personally and permanently tapu, but some were.
Food was placed under tapu by means of ritualistic
observance; and there was a class of food which was
sacred to the gods. This consisted of the first-fruits of a
crop, the first bird of the season, the first fish taken by
a new and important canoe, and so on. Such were
known as popoa, or, koropd (sacred food), and were
taken to the tohunga to be dressed under his instructions,
and by him offered up to the national gods. That brings
us to our next point.
THE KOROPATU.
Food, in general, contaminated tapu. No person
whose hands were tapu might touch food, whether for his
own consumption or that of another. If he did so even
unintentionally a double wrong would be done, (a) An
infringement of his own tapu and (&) a wrong trans-
ference of tapu to an article which was one for ordinary
human consumption. It was therefore imperative for a
person under tapu to avoid places where food was either
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 147
stored or cooked. Indeed, if on a sunny day he noticed
by his pathway a basket of food, a calabash of drinking
water, or any food utensil, he would make a detour so
that even his shadow might not rest on the object. In
short, then, a person under tapu whose hands were not
tapu might feed himself with the aid of a fern-stalk
(used as a fork), but he may not touch the food with
his hands. He required to be fed by another, and in the
absence of a feeder, he might kneel down, then stoop and
pick up the food with his mouth. On the other hand
a person completely under tapu absolutely required to
be fed by an assistant. Apparently these facts led to
the adoption of the feeding, and drinking vessel, termed
the Koropatu. This is a funnel-shaped vessel the inside
top of which is fairly level so as to conveniently hold
food. Upon this top the feeder sliced the food with a
fern-stalk and then pressed it down through the funnel
into the open mouth of the one fed. By this means the
food did not even touch the lips of the eater, those lips,
for instance, which had recently conversed with the
national gods; food being gross might not touch those
lips. Any residue was promptly taken away and
deposited on the nearest sacred place, where it would
not be further touched or eaten by another; for it was
tapu and anyone eating of it would die. Drink was
taken through the funnel in the same way, being poured
into the funnel from a calabash; any residue in the
calabash was emptied upon a sacred place, just as was
done with food residue.
ON AEIK1.
A tribe is made up of a number of sub-
tribes, the members of which descend from a
common ancestor, or, ancestors. Each sub-tribe
148 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
is practically independent, its recognised chief,
by seniority of birthright, being known as the
Ariki. The term Ariki has the genealogical significance
of father-in-chief. One Ariki differs in power and
influence from another. For instance, a first-born son
of an Ariki marries a first-born daughter of another
Ariki. Their family is known as the whanau-Ariki, that
is, the Ariki family. The descendants of each of this
Ariki family are said to belong to the oho- Ariki, that is,
the Ariki-line ; but the descendants of the first-born take
precedence, owing to seniority. A tribe may be com-
pared to a tree whose branches represent its sub-tribes.
Each branch of the tree is independent of the other,
but all are dependent on the main stem or trunk. The
main stem of a tribe is composed of those who have
descended on the senior line from the ancestor or
ancestors from which they sprung. On this line is
found the Upoko-Ariki, head-Ariki, or the Tino-Ariki,
Supreme- Ariki ; who, as the terms signify, is absolute
Ariki-of- Ariki, or, lord-of -lords. He is the head of the
stem, and therefore of all its branches.
The Maori was a staunch believer in the law of
primogeniture. An Upoko-Ariki who was descended in
an unbroken male line for a number of generations, was
regarded as something divine. His person was abso-
lutely sacred. He was classed as Ariki-rangi, being
closest in descent to, and therefore representative of
Rangi, the sky-father. He was also known as the Ahu-
rewa, sacred-pillar; the Amo-kapua, cloud-bearer; and
the Pou-whenua, land-pillar, of his people.
As no efforts were spared to instruct such an one
in the past history, traditions, lore, philosophy and
science of the race the whole of the Orders of the
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 149
Tohunga, or, priestly, body, frequently vested in him.
He was exceedingly tapu, so much so that food which
his shadow has rested upon would not be eaten; it was
tapu. On occasions, in the midst of a battle, an
imminent reverse has been turned into a victory by the
bringing forward of an old Upoko-Ariki to the point of
danger. A desperate rally has ensued to save him from
falling into the hands of the enemy, and a defeat thus
averted.
ON FLAX-WOVEN MANTLES AND GARMENTS.
(Whakakdkahu, to dress.)
Kdkahu, a garment, dress, or robe.
Kahakaha, of finest silky-flax material.
Kahu-kekeno, of seal skin.
Kaliu-kuri, Kahu-waero, or, Mahiti, of dogs' hair.
Topuni, or, Kuparu, of dogs' skin, black hair.
Pdtutu, or, piiahi, of long white hair of dogs' tails.
Kahu-Uiwi, or, ari-kiwi, of kiwi-bird feathers.
Kahu-toroa, of albatross feathers.
Kdkahu-kura, or, kura-whero, of choice red feathers.
Kahu-kuku, of pigeon feathers.
Kahu-tdniko, of finest flax with deep ornamental
border.
Korirangi, having white thrums of untwisted flax.
Korowai, or, parairai, having black twisted thrums.
Piupiu, piliepilie, kaitaka, or. Jiitau, a girdle, or, kilt.
Maro, worn by girls.
Konekcneke, material dressed only at intervals.
Polteka, or. koka, of coarse material.
Ngeri, a rough mantle.
Piiweru, very shaggy mantle.
Ua-rua, a cloak and cape combination.
Pekerere, or dorere, a handsome cape.
150 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
WAR-WEAPONS, AXES, ADZES, ETC.
Mere Pounamu, or, Patu-pounamu, a well-shaped
polished greenstone club.
Patu-onewa, or, kurutai, of same shape, dark-grey
stone.
Tumere, or, meremere, of same shape in hardwood.
Patu-pardoa, of same shape in whalebone.
Kotiate, lobed weapon of hardwood, or, bone.
Waha-ngohi, whalebone battle-axe.
Tewhatewha, battle-axe of hardwood.
Pou-whenua, heavy club-headed spear.
Hani, or, taiaha, a handsome staff with carved tongue.
Kai-rdwaru, same unfinished.
Tdoroa, a long spear.
Tdo, or, tlmata, an ordinary spear.
Patu, a weapon of any kind.
Hoeroa, a kind of harpoon with dart attached.
Pardoa-roa, a weapon of whale's rib.
Pou-tangata, greenstone axe used as a weapon.
Kopere, kotaha, or, piu, a sling.
AXES, ETC.
Toki aronui, or, toki umarua, a broad axe of stone.
Toki tltaha, a stone axe somewhat X-shaped.
Toki panehe, or, toki pdnekeneke, a kind of small adze
for finishing work and for carving.
Purupuru, or, wluio, used as a chisel.
Matakautete, or mira-tuatini, saw-like knife made of
shark's teeth.
Pdoi, tuki, or, kuru, a stone pestle or pounder.
Toka, a sea-swept rock.
Kdmaka, rock.
Kowhatu, or, ichatn, stone.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 151
Pounamu, greenstone (the hardest and most service-
able variety).
Mata-a-tuhua, obsidian procured at Mayor Island
(Tukua).
Mata-a-waiapu, or, huatawa, dark-grey variety of
stone.
Kororariki, very dark and hard stone.
Kahurangi, light variety of stone.
Manutea, white hard stone, like quartz.
Koko-tangiwai, transparent variety of greenstone.
Inanga, dull whitish variety of greenstone.
Tutde-koka, dark-spotted variety of greenstone.
Kawakawa, common dark variety of greenstone.
Kuru-pounamu, or, tara-pouncmu, a greenstone
eardrop.
Koropepe, or, manu-mata-ka, a snakelike design in
greenstone.
Hei-tiki, or, tau-tiki, a greenstone image, or effigy.
MAORI HOUSES.
(The buildings of an ancient well-ordered village
comprised the following) : —
Whare, house.
Whare-kura, Whare wananga, college, or, temple.
Whare-maire, or, whare-ahiahi, residence of leading
priests.
Whare-runanga, council house, or hall.
Whare-whakairo, large building with heavily carved
woodwork.
Whare-manuwhiri, guest house.
Whare-puni, place of popular resort.
Whare-matoro, wooing house for young of both sexes.
Whare-tapere, or, Whare-rehia, play-house.
152 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Whare-huihui, meeting house.
Whare-kdkaho, superior reed house occupied by
chiefs.
Whare-Mdori, ordinary family dwelling house.
Whare-umu, or, Kauta, cook-house.
Whata, or Pdtaka, raised store-house.
Whare-taud, house of mourning.
Wharau, shed. Wharau-waka, canoe shed.
Komanga, or, timanga, a raised platform, unroofed ;
food-store.
Marriageable persons of either sex usually slept in
the family dwelling house. There were cases where a
half-dozen or more bosom friends of the same sex would
occupy a separate house. Such houses were known as :
Whare-Tamawah/ine, house of young women.
Whare-Tamatama, house of young men.
CHAPTER XIII.
ON THE TERM EURA.
The many references to the Kura to be found in chants
and the various ritualistic services, make this term one
of peculiar interest to the student. The Maori was a
great lover of wisdom and philosophy, and it is to these
subjects that the term Kura primarily applies and
always in a sacred sense: —
Kura, precious treasure; sacred wisdom and phil-
osophy; wisdom-culture; divine law and natural
phenomena.
Kura-korero, divine speech.
Kura-wananga, sacred recitals upon chronological,
historical and scientific systems.
Kura-Harakia, sacred ritualistic services and cere-
monials.
Kura-tawhiti, recitals of the ancient philosophic
teachings upon life and death: of first causes and prin-
ciples, and man's evolution and destiny. (Figuratively,
the Kura-tawhiti was a tree which stood on the centre
of the earth, the ancient sacred wisdom-tree. Divine
birds from heaven were fabled to visit it, as messengers
of the gods).
Kura-tangata, the divinity of man.
Whare-kura, the sacred college, temple or hall in
which Tohungas taught, practised, and expounded to
youth the highest forms of scientific and religious
philosophy and history.
Te Kura wawaaM-rangi, wdwaahi-whenua; the sacred
wisdom which treats of the known laws applying to
153
154 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
heaven and earth, and of man's capacity to use such
wisdom to the performance of semi-miraculous acts.
Papa-kura, tablets and figures of precious stones
displayed and used in the Whare-kura.
Whata-kura, precious stones or jewels used in connec-
tion with the most sacred ritualistic services.
Tohi-kura, sacred ceremonial and baptismal ritual.
The Aurora Australis phenomenon is known as "Nga
kurakura 6 nine-nui-te-Po,"ihe sacred splendours of the
illustrious goddess of darkness.
Te Kdhui-Kura.
E piki, e tama, i te ara tietie,
Ko te ara 6 Mahuru i eke ai ki runga ra,
Toetoea ngd harakeke ki runga 6 Huarau,
Whatua Mdnganui, tlhdoa te kau-whakakopuni :
Ka pahure ki reira te Kdhui-Kura —
Te Kura i pupuni ki runga ki a Rehua,
Te Kura i riro ki Tapono-o-te-rangi,
Te Kura i riri ki te anu-mdtdo, (the coldest regions of
earth)
Te Kura i tuhi, te Kura i liana,
Te Kura i rapa, te Kura i uira.
Kura-tdonga, the most valued material possession of
man.
A PHILOSOPHIC LAMENT.
(As it is to their universal custom of paying funeral
honours to the dead that we are indebted for the pre-
servation of much of the philosophical cult of the Maori,
a typical specimen is here given of a lament which is
sung to the assembled mourners, the deceased person
being meanwhile laid out in state.)
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 155
He Tanga-tawhiti.
E muri akiahi kia nohoia iho,
ArohiroM ana te rere mai a te do
Nd runga Pukawa, e — t.
Terd pea koe kei roto o Arakari,
Arakari atu, te whai riri koe, — I.
Atu te wai-nguha nd Tu-Puanga,
Ndana Puanga-nui d Rangi, koe, — I.
Tenei, e Koro, kd taka i d au
Whakararawa i te rangi,
Rangi-nui 6 te Po, e — i.
Hdere rd koe i runga te tukutuku,
He hekenga-d-rangi iho,
Kd rewa ko te motu nd — I.
Wdahia e koe ko te haku d te rangi,
Ka rarawa to waha, Whaitiri-mdtakataka,
E hau i runga ra, e — I.
A tahu atu koe te ahi a Tahu-rangi,
Whakautu i runga ra —
Ka ngangana i te rangi, nd — t.
Takahia e koe kd ru te whenua,
Kia whakaoioi nga kaha o raro,
Oidi te Po, e — I.
A tomo atu koe ki roto Kai-mirumiru,
Tdkiri manawa o Ranga-whenua,
Ka aranga te haunui, no Apaapdrangi, nd — I.
156 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Tangohia mai ai ngd whatu i reira,
Kd tu ki waho ra te whatii-kai-tangata,
Kd noho ki runga ra te whatu-kai-ariki,
Ko Kdkai-te-rangi, nd — t.
(Translated by the Author)
O shades of eve compose my wearied soul,
To contemplate the circling orbs of space;
Which round the lofty throne of Sirius roll,
To whom Pukawa* yields translucent grace.
Thy fitful path but sped thee to the tomb,
Perchance of Arakari't broad domain,
Once more to merge with all-primeval gloom,
Where earthly foibles as her powers were vain.
The pregnant fluid inhered the azure sky,
E'er Rigel was conceived, through whom thy birth;
Thou stood 'st a conscious drop commingled nigh,
Then turned to heaven disrobed of baser earth.
And thou hast soared along the path divine,
Which drew an AngelJ down to allot thy bounds;
For me, the buoyant earth shall tune my line
To the grand chorus of celestial sounds.
What tho' in solemn stillness you depart
To rend the womb Eternity and Time;
The pealing thunder, lightnings vivid dart,
Announce thy entrance to yon haven sublime.
Spark of immortal fire, thou shalt fan
That flame vulcanian, Tahurangi' fire,
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 157
When heavenward shoots its radiant-columned plan
And quakes the earth with subterranean fire.
Kai-mirumiru, should 'st thou choose, explore,
Earth's mighty heart shall throb to give thee way,
Deep whence primordial rocks their masses pour
In shattered fragments to the light of day.
And man their solid virtues wed to art,
In polished weapons vengeance to allay;
Thee higher triumphs sages taught apart,
Thou dew-drop tinctured with celestial ray.
*Pukawa-nui, te wai-whakaata o Eehua, or,
Pukawa-nui, the reflecting waters of Sirius.
\Arakari, a mythical burial-place.
%Se hekenga-a-rangi iho, or
A descent after-the-manner-of -heavenly beings.
MAORI FLUTE MUSIC.
(The words here set out were distinctly produced by
an expert player. The words are ordinary words, not
gibberish.)
Tdpdepde rd, ki te tu-d-pde tu-
ku atu ai rd, kdria e hara mai ki
a tdtari-d-tau kia kopa te Marama mu-
ri ake ai rd ka nunumi whakararo ki
Taaku matua rd i te ake-rautangi hd-
ra mai e te ran, ka titiro i d au nd,
E tia taaku kiri kei te anga kahitua, e-
tahi rdpea kei tde Ropeti ki
Raro o ngd muri, ki te hoa kowhatu
Ru-d-nu-ku.
158 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
(ID
E uru e uru ki kurakurdrangi
E uru ki wharaurangi, kdria au e pd-tu,
Kdria au e pdtu kia tdria atu
Te hau-taua i d Maru, ka pdtu ai au:
Kia oti, kia oti to koekoe ahorua,
Ka tahuti dke, ka tahuti dke, kei te Kiokio d au,
Kei te mahau-whare taaku kdinga,
Kdhore rd i te mahau-whare, kei te Horo taaku kdinga;
E whakamau atu ana, e whakamau atu ana,
Ki te hukahuka o te tai nei
E-^-Td—Tu.
NAMES OF MAORI SONGS, CHANTS, ETC.
Pike, most solemn funeral dirge.
Una, death-chant, introducing genealogy of deceased.
(Males only.)
Tangi-tawhiti, lament with references to original home
of Maori.
Tangi, lament.
Waiata tautitotito, history-teaching disputation song.
Waiata, song.
Waiata karakia, religious song.
Karakia, religious chant.
Waiata Poi, Poi song and dances, females.
Haka Haka, song and dance, males.
Puha, or, Ngeri, songs of defiance.
Whakatutu, or, Whakakitekite waewae, war-dance,
drill songs.
Kai~oraora, a curse-song, or, eat-you-alive song. (Some
of these are horrid.)
Waiata Hanihani, songs of irony and satire. (Some
of these are tragically comic.)
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
159
Waiata aroha, or, Waiata whai-a-ipo, love songs.
Ruriruri, or, Poo, short love ditties (very popular;
often extempore.)
Waiata taunu, or, Keka, jeering, reviling songs.
Whakaaraara Pa, sentinel songs.
Oriori, lullaby. (This means far more than the
English lullaby.)
MAORI LOVE-DITTIES, OR, RURIRURI.
(The translation preserves both the sense and the
rhythm of the Maori.)
Hokihoki tonu mai ko
Te wairua ora,
Ki te awhi-reinga lei
Tend kiri, § te tau.
I moea i te po t
Konei to tinana
Oho ake k\ te do
Papaki kau, S te tau.
Nei taaku hoe lea haruru
Te akau ki PSeroa
Kei reira ko te ipo e
Tangihia net, e te tau
He pikinga tu-tonu te
Pikinga i tua ra,
MS te nui o te aroha
Ka eketia, S te tau.
Fond spirit of my darling how
Oft me you re-visit,
Encircling my form with tender
Dream-embrace, my loved one.
Dreaming 'neath the starlight methought
Thy form was beside me.
Lo when I awakened how I
Missed thee, my beloved one.
My paddle shall soon sound by the
Coastline of fair Paeroa,
There dwells the one darling for whom
I now mourn, my loved one.
Steep are the cliffs yonder to him
Who fain would surmount them,
Love only may conquer and reach
Those heights of my loved one.
160
I tawhiti te aroha
E pai ana tend,
Panga mai ki te uma ku
~M.am.ae ana, 8 te tau.
O mata purotu ana
Me te whakakiki mai,
Noho ana te aroha
Rekakreka, e te tau
He moenga hurihuri
Te moenga i Ted raka,
Huri atu hurt mai ko
Nga mahara, e te tau
He kainga Tikareti
Nooku ki Poneke,
Mokemoke te rere a
Te auahi 8 te tau.
Pinea ko e au ki te
Pine o te aroha
Te pine e kore nei e
Waikuratia, 8 te tau.
Aikiha ma tena e mau
Mai na i to uma,
Naaku i here atu ka
Tino pai rau-a, 8 te tau.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
When love was unknown it was then
Well with this poor heart, love;
Now it wrings my breast, ahl the sweet
Pain of it, my darling.
Those beautiful sweetly-speaking
Eyes of my beloved one,
There beauty, love, pleasure lies
For me only, my darling.
Eestless was my sleep precious one
In yon sleeping chamber,
From side to side turning I felt
Lonesome and sad, loved one.
Lighting my frail cigarette I
Seek thee, ah how vainly,
Lone drifts its faint smoke-wreaths in
The city of my loved one.
Wilt thou be mine own in the sweet
Bonds of love eternal,
Sweet bonds such as rust not nor
Can e'er loosen, my loved one.
Snow-white the silk 'kerchief which
Adorns thy gentle bosom,
I tied its dear bow in s\ sweet
Ecstasy, my loved one.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 161
HE TANGI-TAWHITI.
(Ko Ta Turaukawa.)
Taaku tamaiti, e, kd whano ka wareware i a Au koe rd :
Kitvhea koe, e tama? kia wliakauru mai
Ki roto ki to whare ki Te Waha-o-te-rangi,
Ko te whare tend i taia ai Tonga,
Ki runga te tai-hoa, e rd.
Nd te Kdhuitara i hoehoe te Uhi.
Taia ki te rangi ka kikiwa kei runga,
Taia mai Whiro ki Wl-te-kai-whara,
Taia Maru ki roto Pdririta,
Kd kino toona moko, tapd o ona ingoa —
Ko Mokohukuwaru, ko Tu-tangata-kino, e rd.
Iri mai, e tama, i runga o Kunerangi,
Te waka o Rehua /:o Tdwhaki te ika,
He ngaki i te mate o te Whakatutu-o-te-rangi ;
Te waka rd rd te Nganginga-o-te-rangi,
Te Pakora-o-te-rangi, o Tu-wharekura,
1 mate mai ai a la ki Whiu-to-kawa e} rd.
Takoto kau Edkuru ki te ihu o te waka,
Ndana i kaid kdhore i whdki,
Rangona ki te tangi a Tautini-ariki.
Te Hoe o Rehua ko Raparapa-te-uira,
Toona Tata ko Whakawaha-taupata,
Toona Matira ko Matira-amoamo,
Toona Aho ko Tiritiri-ki-matangi,
Te Pdua ko Mai-rehua-kai,
Whakanohoia te Mata ko te Iwi-o-Rona,
Houhia ki te Here ko Pdepde-te-iria,
Te Ture-i o te rangi, e.
He lira Mere mai no Rupe ki te kimi mai i d Hina,
Tutaki mai 'no ki te roro o te whare,
Whakatorohia mai me ko Hirihiripua,
M
162 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Kd whati toona tara i whakangaua ki te timu,
Kd whiu te kaki tohungia he tangata,
Ko Rupe te rangi, e, rd.
Tend and rd te mea i hdere ai a la,
Tohungia ki te waha ka kotamu ngd ngutu,
Mdhiotia mai ko ngd korero i hdere ai la :
Whakaturia te tawhito, Rangiuru-te-ikiiki,
Whakahekea te wdewde ripeka,
Whakatakotoria ko Kauika, ko Tongitongi,
Tdwhiritia whakakopea ki te Kauhanga-nui,
Kua riro iho 'no i te pikinga-matua —
I a Taketake, rd;
Porotaka mai ai ngd pararau,
Ka kitea kakekakekd i te ngaunga a te taketakeroa,
Tapd 5 ona ingoa ko Paihau-kihia,
Ae d, e tama, ki' noho mai koe}
He wetenga iho taaku pu-terei:
Ahuatia mai ko te one-pdtaka,
Ko te tau ki tahaki, ko te peka ki tahaki,
Wlhakahekea te ngana ki wdenganui —
Ki te whdwhdrua —
Ruia atu ai te Kura-tawhiti hei whakautu,
Ki' kore e hunaia mai e Mahuia-i-te-rangi : —
" Nau mai e Rupe, e noho, kdria e Mere,
" Ki' rongo mai koe :
" E rua tau ruru, e reu tau wehe,
" E rua tau mutu, e rua tau kai;
' ' Ko ngd kai hei papare mdau :
" E rua 6 uta, e rua 5 tai,
' ' Kotahi to te Po, moea mai ngd mata :
" He tokotoko Tad kotahi te turanga,
" He tokotoko Rangi, —
" Kd ngaro te kai, kd ngaro te tangata.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 163
" Huna iho rd ki roto Rua-popoki,
" Roto Tureikura, ngd umu 6 Rehua,
" Te umu tangotango rua a Hauwaha,
" Itiiti, mdrekareka, e tama, kuru mahoki,
" Ko te umu tend o te Ao-kai, e."
Kd hua ahau, e tama,
Kua kotia atu' no te kaha mo te Po,
I to whdnaunga,
I rangd mai ai te au o te pukupuku,
0 te tonatona, o te tahumate, o te kundwhea;
Pukai rawa atu i te aroaro o Matariki,
0 Here-kikini, o Here-momotu-kai, momotu-tangata,
Ki runga Wderotd:
Nekea e Puanga ki runga 6 Rarotonga,
Whakaturia toona wliare ko te Maru-do-nui;
Nekea e Whakaahu ki runga o Hawaiki,
Whakaturia toona wliare me ko Rangi-d-io;
Ko ngd tokorua a Tai-ngarue i maku ki runga r«,
Hei tohu mo te rangi, e.
Eauaka, e tama, e hdere numinumi,
Aronui to Mere ki roto te Tatau,
Te Whare 6 Miru i roria ai a Kewa;
Tenei and a Au kei te whakaronga ake,
Tenei, tenei mutu —
Te toko i roto i toona whare paroparo nei ;
Terd and a mutu e tihei i a mauri-ora,
Ka rukuruku, a.
E kata mai, e tama ma, ngd iwi nei,
E kore e Kataina ka rongo' no a Au:
Nd Hukudo te Korohiko,
Ko te rdkau i tunua ai te Mod;
Kd rewa ona hinu ko te aitanga a te Rd turn.
A rongo ano a Au
164 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Nd Kura-te-ahuru te Horopito,
Ko te rdkau i tu ai a Weka :
He Rona te tde ki mua te Ahurewa,
Kl' kai' tti-hau, kl' kai' tu-pdoa;
Kl, whakaturia te tapu o te angina,
He whakahekenga atu toona wdewde too,,
Mo toona turanga i te tini 5 Tu-tonga-nui,
Kd hinga toona ika ko Te Matatu-no-Whiro,
Utaina ki runga ki toona waka —
Ki Mahurangi, e.
Ae a, e tama, ki, noho mai koe,
A whakdhua a Au ngd hlringa nei : —
Hlringa te hihiri, hlringa te mahara,
Hlringa te hotahota, hlringa ata-mai;
Hlringa wareware,
Kdhore he hlringa i te kai, no i a la:
Hlringa te manumea, hund ki uta ki a Tdne,
Hlringa te hohonu,
Makd ki tai ki a Tangaroa-matanui.
Heoti and, e tama, Tangaroa-kai-tai,
Kei roto o Wharerimu, kei roto o Whareone,
Kei roto o Wharepapa, o Ruaki-pduri.
Ko te whare tend i tltaria ai ngd ika rlki nei:
Ko Puna-te-waro i hdere mai ai te Kokopu ki uta,
Para-whenua-mea
I hdere mai ai te huku 6 Tunaroa ki uta:
Ndana i whdnau whare-huhi, whare-repo,
Te utuutu-matua te whakapoungd wai;
Ndana i kdwhaki au-kume, au-rona.
Nd wai and, e tama
A Tangaroa i hdere mai ai ki uta,
E whano ana a la ki te roto-d-Hau,
Ki Hawaiki nui rd, ki Rangiriri, e.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 165
E hara koe, e tama, i te wai nui nei,
No ngd matamata ki rung a Whatanganui,
No ngd kurde ki runga Haumdtdo;
He mdwhakitanga koe no Ngarue-te-rangi,
No ko Mdnawa, no ko Matamata-raututu;
A tau and koe te Ata-d-pohea,
I ka/ihoratia e 6 tupuna i roto o Tdrere,
Ed tupu koe, e Tama! e 1.
DIDACTIC LAMENT or EPIC POEM
(Of Turaukawa.)
(Translation by the Author.)
My son: (0 lessening memory depart),
By faith I bid thee, wheresoe'er thou art
Thy chamber enter, (blest immortal's lot) ;
Heaven's organ, whence Creation's dawn begot
The music of the spheres, whose glories grace
The southern orbs of circumpolar space,
Which down the stream of time with force divine
Hath shed a lustre on thy heaven-born line.
But Powers rebellious marred the wondrous plan,
They from the poles a duller process span,
'Fore heaven's azure front traced dark-limned clouds,
Till direful gloom the moving Earth enshrouds.
(So man in arts offensive truly apt,
Dark spiral lines with equal skill adapt.)
Such as at Wai-te-kai-whare, Whiro graced,
Whose deep-scored form their sable hues embraced.
At Poririta god-like Maru shared
Such doubtful honours as the "Moko" spared;
The badly-wrought design his surnames show —
"Mokohukuwaru," and " Tutangatakino. "
Cling fast O son, to Kunerangi's frame,
166 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
The soaring bark which Sirius gave to fame,
Which — when the wars of the Creation sped —
Bore Tawhaki, the first-fruits of the dead;
That bark of destiny whose names reveal
A history 's mystery one would fain conceal :
Thou, whiu-to-kawa, smote life's sacred breath,
Thou, bitter-anguish, saw Tawhaki 's death.
A naked thief, all prone upon the prow
Of the canoe, death's seal upon his brow,
Extends his length, unwilling to confess
His crime, Rakuru, paid the last redress.
Fate of a fallen thief, made history —
By the loud murmurs of Tautini-ariki.
The paddle of Sirius is named Raparapa^te-uira,
His bailing- vessel, Whakawaha-Taupata,
His cross-stay, Matira-amoamo,
His fishing line, Tiritiri-ki-matangi,
His Paua, Mai-Rehua-kai,
The bone of Eona provides a suitable barb,
Fastened with the lashing, Paepae-te-iria;
In a concordance with divine law.
So dove-like Rupe by fond love distraught,
O'er fields of space his sister Hina-(uri) sought,
At length, fast by the chamber's porchway met,
Where hostile-spear was thrust with ready net —
To slay the Irirdl, but th' impervious wing
Received the point, the barb all shattering;
Then tost his lordly neck, as man is wont,
'Twas Rupe-the-divine they thus affront.
(A larger purpose still his bosom fills,
His people to preserve from present ills,
Of famine, deadly plague and pestilence,
These, these had moved his god-like spirit hence.)
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 167
Their murderous skill thus passively opposed,
At once his beak (lips) his message now disclosed:
His words and acts the sacred truth display
Full to the light of that still-glorious day : —
He upraised the ancient and holy food-pillar,
He revealed the mystery of the cross-feet,
He displayed the symbols Kauika and Tongitongi,
He made a wave-offering towards the great-throne,
Such as had been ordained
From the time of the original ascent —
He described a circle with enfolded outspreading wings,
He deplored the direful effects resulting
From long-continued human transgression;
Therefore his surname, Paihau-kihia.
(Methought, 0 son, thou wouldst have stayed with me,
And I expound these mysteries to thee) ;
He fashioned the Circle in sand,
He illustrated the tendency to deviate
From a straight line,
He adjusted the plumb to the true centre of the
concavity :
He so advanced his soul's most earnest plea,
Discoursed the fruit of wisdom's sacred tree,
Divine Mahuia, by human woes imprest
Might not refuse to grant that prayer's request,
And He replied with solemn heavenly air
Addressing thus His suppliant Messenger: —
Come unto me thou weary Rupe, rest
Free from those sufferings of an anguished breast,
Nor vain shalt thou, all guiltless, intercede
For fallen man, yet hearken and take heed
To these decrees, by which the wrath of heaven
Shall be appeased and man's past sins forgiven:
168 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Two years the silent worm shall still devour
And waste the Earth with all-consuming power;
Two years for man all heavenly aid denied
To reap the food of folly, vice and pride;
Two years again whilst wrath divine shall cease
And man fear heaven, knowledge give increase;
Two years then harvests shall abundance yield
And heavenly bounty add to fruitful field ;
A tithe of which to heaven shall man bestow
And thus prove mindful whence his blessings flow.
All this ordained, heaven 's higher will declare
And bid meet dues your contrite people spare:
Two parts of those of land, two of the sea,
One, of the Night, forever sacred be.
Those few reserved, all else be theirs to claim,
Yet bid them reverence, also fear, our Name:
Teach them: When Mortal hands the furious spear
Launches in space, but one its thrust need fear;
Not so the heaven-directed staff when tossed,
Mankind and foods sink impotent and lost.
(Their efforts are but feeble who have erred,
Them heaven can blast with but a single word:
Robed with Infinity, unswayed by time,
Our ways are measureless, our heights sublime:
Man's ruling passion craves superior worth,
He scorns the Power to whom he owes his birth:
Let him from acts presumptuous forbear,
Nor yet again heaven 's wrath almighty dare ;
Whose pregnant mind material things immerse,
Gives force to Time, bounds the wide Universe;
'Stablished the Earth and its attendant good,
The Fount-of-life and all sustaining food.)
With that, O son, methought dark evil Powers
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 16{>
Had been repressed, even ere thy natal hour,
When, as divine Mahuia had decreed,
The germs of desolation did recede/
To hurl their masses 'gainst the Pleiades North,
Whose frigid caves engulfed their dreadful wrath,
Restrained their might to plague the torrid zone
At Waerota, and man and food dethrone.
O'er Rarotonga Rigel set her line, (Tropic of Capricorn.)
Her pillar, Maru-ao-nui, as ensign.
O'er Hawaiki, Castor flung his light, (Tropic of
Cancer.)
His pillar, Rangi-a-io, gleaming bright:
Bright pair of Tai-ngarue thus set on high
As glowing symbols for the Sun-swept sky :
Whose monuments dared further ills approach,
Nor 'twixt those lines their horrid powers encroach.
(Tropical lines of Capricorn and Cancer.)
Do not, my son, advance with timid awe
But boldly enter at the open door
To Mini's realm, where Kewa was betrayed,
For lo, even I perceive all undismayed,
This unseen atom of a vital flame
Still moves all-conscious in its earthly frame;
A struggling soul awaiting its release
To plunge with thee on thro' the shades — to Peace.
Whilst neighbouring peoples all-derisive laugh
(Whose vacant minds so fit them for dull chaff,)
My earnest purpose knowledge to secure,
Be my defence their tauntings to endure.
In earlier years with joy I fondly heard,
Our Patriarchs recite truth's sacred word:
How Hukuao became the deity
170 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Of Korohiko that once valued tree
Within whose folds such virtue found retreat
The Moa was roasted solely by its heat;
Its melting oil so flush all flowing run
With the low season and declining Sun.
How Kura-te-ahuru the patron grew
Of Horopito which famed Weka slew.
(When wars proud test fulfils our dearest vows
And Victory's circling wreaths adorn our brows,
Success in arms as due to his high aid,
Be to the god-of-war first honours paid ;
Before all other duties whatsoe'er,
This just observance be our anxious care.)
When Mahurangi saw their hosts retreat
And Tonga's valiant lay at Whiro's feet,
No thanks were offered, Weka failed his trust
And fell, the victim of an ill-timed lust.
Vain hope, O son, that thou wouldst linger nigh
And I recite how cycles ceaseless ply,
How cycles are by epicycles caught,
Such as the cycles of revolving thought :
Cycles of cheerless gloom, of tender hope,
Of oblivion, cycles with cycles cope.
Zoologic cycles Tane's forests sweep,
Cycles marine affect the vasty deep,
There Tangaroa abides all lordly grand,
Within his sanctuaries of kelp and sand,
Primeval rock-bed, darkness most profound,
Far from the sights of earth or human sound;
There the deep clefts, the gathering abyss,
Whence sudden poured the smaller-specied fish,
When submarine volcano forced the way
And saw those scattered to the light of day.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 171
The Carboniferous period's mottled sea,
Caused the bright trout towards our streams to flee :
<3reat heaving waters surged from main to shore
And landward brought the tail of Tunaroa.
That cataclysm shaped the deep morass
Whose fissures still disclose each mighty crash,
When fountains of the deep, heaved from their base,
Tore all-resistless o'er the ocean's face,
Diverting in their wild tumultuous force
The equatorial counter-current's course,
And sudden gave the sovereign of the sea
Dominion over great Hawaiki, —
Our ancient home whose loss we still deplore, —
Snatched to the deeps his sceptre stretches o'er,
With Rangiriri, lake which shimmered bright,
Lake-of -the- winds, now vanished from the sight :
Thus waters, son, brought Tangaroa inland,
Our lands, our lake are now at his command.
Mayhap, 0 son, thou wert not truly great,
Whatanganui 's summits thy old-time estate,
Haumatao 's headlands too as truly thine,
Branch of Ngarue-te-rangi 's sacred line:
Beyond Matamata-raututu, Manauea,
Thou glorious as Te Ata-o-Pohea,
Displayed by thine ancestors with just pride
(Where deeds of prowess could not be denied:)
Whose beauty graced Tarere as the Sun,
And made thee illustrious, O son ! 0 Son !
CHAPTER XIV.
ON MARRIAGE CUSTOMS AND LAND RIGHTS,
Woman and land, or, "He wahine, he oneone," are
two subjects which — from a Maori point of view — are
to be considered together. According to the Maori the
one is the exact and sole equivalent of the other. As
he prized the land above all other material possessions
he thus paid a high compliment to his women.
As to the land and the manner in which the original
right, or, "take," thereto is acquired, there is: —
1. The law of moral-force, or, "Mana."
2. The right of discovery and occupation, or,
' ' Whenua-kite-hou. ' '
3. The right of physical force, conquest and occupa-
tion, or "Raupatu."
4. The right of continuous use and occupation and of
successfully holding land against opposition and attack,
or, "Na te ring a toa."
5. The right of long-continued use and occupation,
free and undisturbed, or, "Te Ahi-ka-roa."
6. The right under cession, or, "Tuku."
1. The right under gift, or, "Koha"; marriage-
dowry, or, "Pa-kuwha"; and by adoption, or, "Tama-
riki whangai, Tamariki taurima."
8. Ancestral rights, or, "Take tupuna."
As to the right of moral-force, or, Mana. In the case
of a powerful section of a tribe ordering off another
section and occupying the lands of that section, where
such occupation continues through their children's
children, a first-class title of ownership is transmitted.
172
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 173
As to 2, the right of discovery and occupation. This
was a right which was universally conceded. It entered
into the proverbial lore of the race in such forms as:
Haste in advance and secure (the rights attaching to the)
first-anchorage, (i.e., of first arrivals), or, "Haere i mua,
moou Heretaunga"; in other words: The early bird
gets the worm.
As to 3, the right of conquest and occupation. It is
unnecessary to cite instances, obviously, Bight was
Might, and Might was Right.
As to 4, the right acquired by long continuous use and
occupation and of successfully resisting opposition and
attack. This was the right of the victorious arm, or,
ringa toa.
As to 5, the right of continuous occupation, free and
undisturbed, where permission is neither asked for nor
given, and where nothing is paid by way of tribute —
a first-class title of ownership is acquired.
As to 6, the right under cession. There are many
instances of land being held under the right of cession.
Where a chief in the presence of his fellow chiefs and
tribe cedes a parcel of his territory to another chief and
his followers, immediate and continuous occupation
under that cession establishes a perfectly good title.
Land was ceded to an ally in return for warlike assist-
ance ; it was also ceded as compensation for adultery, or
murder.
As to 7, the right under gift, such as marriage-
dowry, etc. This was perfectly valid, because recognised
by Maori custom; so also was the right acquired by an
adopted child — where the family or sub-tribe recognised
such adoption. Maori custom encouraged the adoption
of the children of blood relations, but discouraged the
174 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
adoption of those who were not the children of blood
relations. The adopted child succeeded to the lands of
an adopting parent, but, where the adopting parent had
a family, the adopted child would succeed in common
with the true children. Continuous occupation was
imperative.
As to 8, ancestral right, or take tupuna. Obviously the
rights of a grandparent descended to his grandchildren
and heirs throughout their generations, where continuous
use and occupation obtained. In the case of any dispute,
a claimant simply had to prove that his ancestor or
grandparent held a good title, and then proceed to prove
his genealogical descent and the fact of use and occupa-
tion being continuous. Having proved that, his claim
became perfectly valid.
FIXITY OP TENURE.
These necessarily brief indications as to the origin of
ancestral rights to land must serve to inform the student
as to the basis of Maori land tenure. Although the strong
Law of Right was admittedly pre-eminent, this form
of land tenure was by no means as changeable and vague
as some would lead us to believe. That cases of sudden
and sweeping changes of proprietorship were not
numerous is indicated by the incontrovertible fact that
the principal tribes of the North Island have from 14
to 30 generations held and occupied their respective and
original tribal territories. (See Government Map
1869) . The fact is that where such Law of Might existed,
each independent tribe fortified itself against attack,
and so returned blow for blow when that attack came.
Intertribal wars were many, but few were made with the
avowed object of land conquest. "War appears to have
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 175
been regarded as a national game, a thing to practice
and become proficient in. Far from fearing death the
Maori appears to have courted it, and none died with
more resignation than he who fell on the field of battle
whilst engaged in vindicating the honour of the tribe,
or injuries real or supposed; "He mate a ururoa."
We pass on to consider the questions of inheritance
and of the individual rights to land and to the disposal
of land. It has been urged that Maori land was held
by the tribe in common. To a certain extent this is true,
but it should be realised that there were individual as
well as tribal rights : that certain chiefs and individuals
disposed of their lands without consulting their fellows :
also that one chief held paramount rights and that fellow
chiefs held rights differing in proportion and degree.
The superior chief of a tribe may — but not necessarily
—be its superior land chief. Where a chief can trace
his descent back through a male line of firstborns to a
remote ancestor who was acknowledged to be the tribe's
superior landed and warrior-chief, his claims are para-
mount. Such a chief was recognised as the tribal land-
pillar, or, " Pou-whenua" ; his mana was absolute, his
word was law, his was the status of an Ariki.
This being understood we may proceed to a general
consideration of common or individual tenure. Each
individual member of a tribe held a separate and inde-
pendent right to the possession of the soil which he
occupied and cultivated. But — with important excep-
tions— such occupier and cultivator, being very properly
regarded as an unit of the tribe, might not dispose of
his holding without reference to his tribesmen. The
broad principle involved was this : no cultivator has the
right to dispose as he pleases of his holding, because the
176 MAORI-ENQLISH TUTOR
land iii general is the property of the collective tribe
which holds it against the might of another tribe.
Therefore, to allow an individual to dispose of his
holding as he thought fit would be contrary to good
tribal policy, he himself having a voice only in the
working and disposal of the tribal lands. As with the
tribe and sub-tribe so with the family. A family would
work a holding in common and each individual male
member possessed an independent right to a fair share
of that holding. He might elect to parcel this off and
work it exclusively, but, if he attempted off-handedly to
dispose of it the family would step in and forbid the
transaction. For, apart from the consequent complica-
tion of tenure which such a disposal would involve, a
new-comer might walk away in the face of outside danger
and leave the family in the lurch. An individual
member of that tribe requiring more land — outside of
the family holding — would be obliged to prefer his
request to the tribe, which would put him in possession
of a new available plot, mark off the boundaries and
leave him in possession. Constant use and occupation
secured this plot to his children and descendants, but
these no longer had a claim in the original family
holding, though they still had a voice in the general
management. In the rare case of a family dying out to
a single surviving and childless male member, custom
permitted him — without particularly consulting the
tribe — to place some of his next of kin of the same tribe
in possession. The land then descended to these as users
and occupiers; and they based their claims simply on
the fact of having been put in possession by the
hereditary owner. Their original rights in other lands
from which they might have parted were lost, and their
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 177
permanent rights existed only in the lands which they
now occupied. In the case of a family visibly dwindling
down, an aggressive chief holding adjoining lands, who
desired to enlarge his holding, sometimes arbitrarily
forced matters by taking — or attempting to take — a slice
of that family's holding. A particular instance may
here be given of such a proceeding as it serves to prove
— amongst other important things — that an individual
held specific land rights and also that he guarded those
rights most zealously. A certain minor chief in passing
over his holding noticed a rudely-carved and ochre-
smeared post erected some two hundred yards inside of
his boundary — a running stream. He at once recognised
it to be what is known as a land-taking post, or, "Poit-
tango whenua." Now the act of setting it up there was
an unjust act, for it was contrary to the settled principle
that allowed to the individual or family the quiet
occupation of lands within certain boundaries or
holdings. That being so the course to be taken by our
chief was clear — he could summon a council of the tribe
which would promptly order the offender to remove the
post. Our chief was, however, a man of some spirit.
Having correctly attributed the act to his neighbour,
he carefully considered the matter and decided to remove
the post himself. In further considering the most
effective way of removing and destroying the post, it
presently occurred to him that the post might be encased
in a species of tapu an interference with which might
react in some shape of evil upon himself (as a matter of
fact the post was tapu, for it had been the subject of
most potent ritualising by a tohunga) . In this dilemma
he very properly sought the assistance and services of a
tokunga. Having made his arrangements our chief
178 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
at dawn took a digging implement, an axe, a few raw
potatoes, or uwhi, and with his granddaughter, a girl
of thirteen, proceeded to the spot where the post stood.
Arrived there he directed the girl to dig around the post
until it was loosened. He in the meantime busied him-
self in procuring kindlers, oven-stones and water, and
in digging a small oven-hole in the ground, into which
he placed the kindlers. He then, by the method of
friction, produced fire, and applied it to the kindlers.
By this time the girl had succeeded in loosening the post,
and he pulled it down. Taking up his axe he then
proceeded to cut from the post sufficient wood to heat
the oven-stones, and placing this on the fire he carefully
spread the oven-stones over all. Ere long the wood had
burned away leaving a few hot cinders and the now
glowing oven-stones. These were sprinkled with
cleansing water, rearranged, and some half-dozen washed
potatoes were nicely spread thereon. A liberal applica-
tion of water now caused the steam to rise in a column
from the heated stones which were then quickly covered
over, steam-tight, and the pent-up steam was left to do
its work of cooking. After the expiration of some half-
hour the coverings of the oven were removed, and taking
up one of the cooked potatoes the chief flung it into the
hole from which the post had been withdrawn. He then
asked the girl to eat the rest of the potatoes, which she
did. She thus literally ate of the tapu • for, the food had
been cooked by means of firewood obtained from the
tapu post. Then leaving all traces of his retaliatory
work as it was, the chief took up his tools and conducted
the girl straight to his tohunga. A canoe was then
launched upon which the trio embarked and the chief
paddled it to the deep mid-stream. There the tohunga
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 179
immersed the girl bodily in the water, after which she
was taken on board and the canoe was returned to the
bank. The tohunga now took the girl to the family
pdepde where she was made to bite the cross-bar, the
toJiunga meanwhile reciting a ritual as follows: —
Ngaua i te pde
Ngaua i te pu
Ngaua i te more,
Ngaua i tua
Ngaua i waho
Ngaua i te upoko 5 te atua,
Ngaua i a Rangi e tu nei.
Ngaua i a Papa e takoto nei,
Koia ngd tapu nei,
Ka kai koe i te upoko 6 te atua,
He atua kahu koe
He tere te wiwl,
He tere te wawd]
Hdere i te rangi nui e tu nei,
Mahihi ora.
Or—
Bite of the barrier (which the opposing tapu set up),
Bite of the base,
Bite of the trunk.
Bite of the far side,
Bite of the outer side ;
Bite of the head of the (opposing) god:
Bite it as Rangi stands above us (the sky-father) ,
Bite it as Papa lies beneath us (the earth-mother) ;
Therefore these ceremonial restrictions,
So, thou eatest even of the head of the (opposing) god,
Thou (the opposing god) art but an effeminate god!
(of little power)
180 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Which hovers anigh
Anon hovers afar-off:
Avaunt, in the light of this day !
(My daughter) thou art saved.
That being ended the girl was again taken and
immersed in the stream, and with this final cleansing of
the tapu the proceedings closed. In this way the girl
medium who had, as it were, offended the gods by
desecrating the tapu of the post was considered to be
absolved from guilt by ceremonials proper and complete.
In these ceremonials both sexual-forces, male and female,
or, te hau tama-tdne, and te hau tama-wahine, had
been represented, and necessarily so. The sky-father
and the earth-mother had been invoked and propitiated ;
and fire, water, tree and stone, those necessary purifying
elements, had been freely used. The gods were thus
propitiated, and those taking part might then regard
themselves as having been freed from harm or evil. As
it had not been convenient to go to the distant tribal
tuaahu, or, sacred altar specially set apart for services
to, and dedicated to, the gods, the girl had been taken
to the pdepde. There, domestic fires had not burned
neither was cooked food taken; for, where tapu was
involved, the burning of ordinary domestic fires and the
presence of ordinarily cooked food was an abomination.
The presence of the cross-bar served as an eternal
symbol of the barrier which the presence of the tapu
imposed. The whole proceedings were done with a view
(a) to destroy the force of the opposing tapu, (&) to
free the girl and party from any baneful influences,
and (c) to appease the anger of the gods for the trespass.
Incidentally, these ceremonials presented a very formid-
able bar to any further proceedings on the part of the
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 181
original offender who had set up the post. No further
proceedings were, in fact, taken by him, nor further
intrusion made. The post remained to rot on the ground,
and these particulars were incorporated in the history
of that land and its boundaries and served as a useful
lesson to posterity.
HEREDITARY TENURE.
European authorities have declared that prior to the
advent of Europeans there was no such thing as a
settled system of Maori land tenure. But an adequate
knowledge of the subject discloses the fact that there
have existed, from the remotest times, well defined and
settled boundaries, as between tribes, sub-tribes, families
and individuals. Moreover, the right least open to dis-
pute is the ancestral right of land. It is a common
occurrence for a Maori to establish his individual right
to certain lands as being inherited from the admitted
rights of an ancestor of some fourteen generations before
him. A system which ensures, throughout fourteen
generations, the transmission of rights to lands whose
boundaries are well known and admitted, is surely
"settled" enough for anything. Furthermore, if such
precise references to land and boundaries as those here
following, references which were daily heard in every
Maori village long prior to the advent of the European —
have any meaning at all, they indicate a settled system
of recognised land-tenure; for instance: My land, your
land, their land: my boundary, your boundary, their
boundary: the inland boundary, the sea boundary, the
hill boundary, the river boundary: boundary post,
boundary rock, boundary tree, etc. Note also the exist-
ence of bird reserves, rat reserves, fishing reserves, fern-
182 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
root reserves, etc., etc. ; together with such references as
just rights, or, "take tika," and unjust rights, or,
"take he"; and also the old-time custom of "Owhaki,"
by which a dying chief verbally bequeathed his lands
and possessions to his representatives. It is necessary
to emphasise this, because, as already indicated, marriage
customs and the system of land-tenure are to be con-
sidered— and must stand or fall — together.
LAND TENURE IN ITS RELATION TO
MARRIAGE CUSTOMS.
Hereditary tenure then was based upon the rights of
an ancestor or grandparent, who was recognised as being
the root, or, "take," to the land. In such rights, grand-
daughters— in common with grandsons held apparently
good domestic claims. Yet, as to the disposal of the
land, the rights of the granddaughter were very much
restricted. Primogeniture was so exclusively confined
to the male line, that a female who had grown sons had
much more voice therein than one having merely
daughters, and this latter had more authority
than a married woman who was childless. Notwith-
standing these facts, however, a grandson was proudly
referred to as the grandson of such and such a chief-
tainness; and a granddaughter was just as proudly
referred to as the granddaughter of such and such a
chief. And now as to the disposal of lands. A dying
chief usually made a verbal disposal, Owhdkl, of his
property and lands in this form : All of my lands and
cultivations are for my sons, with the exception of my
piece of land at Wai-kowhai, that is for my nephew
Hura absolutely. My eel-weirs, bird-reserves, slaves and
personal property are all for my sons. My wives are for
my brother. Although the chief had daughters it will
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 183
be observed that they were not included in the inherit-
ance, and this has its explanation. By marrying the
young men of the tribe, who under these customs were
the real holders of the property and lands, the chiefs
daughters would be properly provided for. Yet that
was not the sole reason for their being thus excluded,
there was another and, — to the Maori, most excellent
reason. It was necessary to provide against the con-
tingency of a daughter electing to marry into another
tribe, thus weakening her own tribe and, by bearing
children, strengthening that other tribe and probably
future enemy. The lands and properties were therefore
bequeathed to and held by the male children and
grandchildren only, for these usually remained with the
tribe and assisted to hold the lands against those who
would forcibly take it from them. It was also clearly
foreseen that if daughters and granddaughters were
allowed equal land-rights with the males, they would,
by marrying into other tribes, cause very serious com-
plications in matters of land tenure, which would other-
wise remain simple enough. There was, however, a
custom known as Pa-kuwha, under which a daughter or
sister marrying a stranger, — with the sanction of her
family, — was provided with a marriage dowry compris-
ing a well-defined area of land. This custom necessitated
her husband remaining with her tribe and assisting it
in every way, even against the attacks of his own tribe.
Should he go off himself, or carry off his wife and
family, the lands so given reverted to the brothers and
cousins male of his wife, and neither the husband nor
wife could lay further claim thereto. It is proper to
add that brothers invariably took a leading part in the
question as to the marriage of a sister.
184 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
As we have seen, a dying chief in making his verbal
will said : My wives are for my brother ; and we may now
proceed to consider the very interesting Maori custom
of the bestowal of widows. There was a recognised
obligation imposed on the brother of a deceased husband
to marry his child-bearing widowed sister-in-law, or, if
past child-bearing to be her legal guardian. Therefore
when a man's brother died leaving a widow or widows,
she or they remained at the immediate disposal of the
elder surviving brother of the deceased chief. He alone
might wed the widow or else waive his right in favour of
a younger brother or cousin male. No mere stranger
might wed the widow, for this would amount to a whaka-
heke tupu, or, a lowering of the dignity of the male
relatives of the deceased. The widow's marriage
ceremonial took place after the lapse of a fitting interval
following the death of her husband, during which
interval she wore widow's weeds. In the interval should
an outsider dare to attempt liberties with the widow, a
council was summoned by the affronted brother-in-law
and the offender would be mulcted in a heavy fine, which
would include lands, as satisfaction for his trespass, and
in very serious cases he would be killed outright.
Widows therefore did not enjoy the free disposal of their
persons, and they suffered the consequences attending
either unintentional or deliberate attempts to do so.
A dying chief in a farewell address or kupu poroporo-
a-ki, might leave his widow to a favourite and younger
brother. In this disposition an elder brother would not
interfere, — provided that such younger brother did not
proceed to dispose of the widow in any manner opposed
to custom, or, good tribal policy. In this we have the
main reason why widows were not allowed to dispose of
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 185
their own persons as they might please, just as we have
seen that a man might not dispose of his own land as
he pleased. Such liberty in either ease would tend to
conflict with, and be opposed to, good tribal policy;
for, in the case of a widow and family, she might elect
to join another tribe taking her children with her, and so
weaken her husband's tribe whilst strengthening that
other tribe. In all of which we find a simple and com-
monsense reason for a custom which gives to surviving
male relatives complete authority over widows. Writers,
possessing for the most part a merely superficial know-
ledge of the matter, have striven to show that such a
custom points to a condition of female slavery, declaring
that such women are regarded as merely goods and
chattels and similar property. Nothing could be further
from the truth. Far from being regarded as a mere
property of her new lord, a widow was commonly
honoured and treated with deferential respect, if not for
her own sake, then, as the relict of the deceased chief,
whose memory is revered. To treat her otherwise would
be, from a Maori point of view, to offer insult to their
own dead; few Maoris indeed would do that. Moreover,
in a majority of cases, widows had already borne
children to their deceased husbands, a fact which in
itself gave them influence and authority in Maori eyes.
This question need not be further argued.
It has already been indicated that in the case of
adultery, when an injured chief is willing to accept and
demands compensation, land is included as compensation.
The Maori considered that land was the only true
equivalent to woman; that, in short, women and land
are similar or identical in value or nature. The
following statement of an old and experienced chief
186 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
puts the case frankly and clearly: "Ki a au
nei, e rua tahi ngd wdhine o tenei Ao; ara, ko
te wahine tangata nei, nd, ko te wahine one-
one. E rua enei mea e rite tahi ana; te wahine, te
whenua. Ma te wahine kd tupu ai te hanga nei te
tangata, md te whenua ka whai oranga ai. Whai hoki,
ki te tangohia to ivhenua e te iwi ke, kd ngau te pouri
ki roto ki d koe; nd, ki te tangohia to wahine e te tangata
ke, kd tupu hoki ko taua pouri and. Ko ngd putake
nunui end d te whawhai. Koia i kiia ai : He wahine, he
oneone; i ngaro ai te tangata." Which being translated
reads : I hold that in this world there are two species of
woman, namely, the human woman and the earth woman.
Woman and land are two very similar things, for, while
woman is the medium which gives mankind being, land
is the medium whereby that being is nourished and sus-
tained. It therefore follows that if thy land be taken
from thee by another tribe, gloom will gnaw into thy
vitals; similarly, if thy woman be taken from thee by
another man, the selfsame kind of gloom grows within
thee. These are the principal causes of warfare. And of
them it is said: Woman and land have caused man to
disappear (by slaughter).
From all of which the reader may gather, as should
writers on the subject of aboriginal or native marriage
customs, that a knowledge of aboriginal systems of land
tenure is a first essential. A full and proper investiga-
tion of the whole subject would probably show that the
evolution of a regular system of land tenure and the
evolution of the custom of marriage and re-marriage are
parallel; that, in short, the evolution of a regular system
of land tenure and the evolution of the system of mar-
riage and re-marriage are parallel and one; and that
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 187
marriage connections were formed with a strict regard
to the stability of land tenure.
KINSHIP AND MARRIAGE CONNECTIONS.
Men married to sisters are denominated hoahoa-tdne,
or, male- (married) comrades, and women married to
brothers are termed hoahoa-wdhine, or, female- (married)
comrades; perhaps, husband-comrades and wife-com-
rades. A wife referred to her husband as her hoa-tdne,
and a husband would refer to his wife as his hoa-wahine.
A man, however, generally referred to his wife as his
whdereere, literally, the mother-of-his-children, from
whdea, mother. The sisters of a man's wife are termed
his au-wahine, i.e., wives by courtesy, or, prospective
wives; for he might wed the unmarried ones either
before or after his wife's death. Similarly, the brothers
of a woman's husband are termed her au-tdne, i.e.,
husbands by courtesy, or, prospective-husbands; for, as
already noted, on the death of her husband she becomes
the wife of a surviving brother. A man 's brother-in-law,
or, tdokete, is he who marries a man's sister; a woman's
sister-in-law is one who marries that woman's brother.
A man's sister is his tualiine, a woman's brother is her
tungdne. A man's elder brother is his tuakana and his
younger brother is his teina. A man does not, as
Europeans do, speak of his "brother" merely, leaving it
an open question whether he speaks of a younger or an
elder brother; Maori terms are much more specific. A
woman 's elder sister is her tuakana, her younger sister is
her teina; here again there is no plain "sister."
With the Maori, collateral kinship with uncles and
aunts came to be considered as almost identical with
the actual kinship of brother and sister. A brother
188 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
referred to his brother's children as "my children," and
not as "my nephews and nieces"; similarly a sister
referred to her sister's children as "my children," and
not as "my nephews and nieces." A brother referred
to the child of his sister as his irdmutu, or, nephew;
a sister also referred to the child of her brother as her
iramutu, or, nephew. Children referred to the brothers
of their parents as matua, or, fathers; and to the sisters
of their parents as whdea, literally, mothers. Con-
sidering the social and domestic system of the Maori,
it is but natural that things should be so. For instance,
when a child's father died the mother wedded the
brother of his dead father; and when a child's mother
died, the child's father wedded the unmarried sister of
the child's dead mother. So that, apart altogether from
the question of consanguinity, the brother of a father
and the sister of a mother came to be regarded as the
future father or mother of a child, and not merely as
an ordinary uncle or aunt. A child's actual uncle was
his mother's brother, for he could not become anything
closer — for instance, a parent by marriage; on the same
principle a child's actual aunt was his father's sister,
who could not effect a closer relationship.
Parents largely held their children in trust for their
immediate relatives and the tribe generally. If a child
that was under the care of its parents met with an
accident and lost its life, a taua-muru, or raiding party,
was organised against those parents by the relatives
and tribe. This party proceeded to the parents'
residence and stripped them of their possessions. The
object thus served was a two-fold one; it was a warning
to other parents to be careful of the children, and it
secured compensation for the loss of a member of the
tribe.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 189
Parental control was rarely of a strict nature ; because,
if children had reason to complain of it to their uncles
and aunts, these promptly severely scolded the parents
and in many instances relieved the parents of further
control by taking off the children. On the other hand,
the discipline practised by uncles and aunts was usually
very strict, they being more particularly responsible
to the parents, and also to the tribe, for the proper
upbringing of the children. From this discipline the
children realised that they could not escape. They also
discovered that their uncles and aunts had more
authority over them than had their actual parents, con-
sequently they became amenable to this discipline.
A father had little to do in regard to the disposal
by marriage of his son or daughter, the matter being
one for the assent of his male relatives. In this dis-
ability we are reminded of the disability of the male
land-owner to dispose of his own share of land as he
pleased ; for, in either case he might do something which
was opposed to good tribal policy. The cases appear to
be on all-fours. A fond father might otherwise consent
to his daughter going off with a suitor from some
distant tribe, and that would be opposed to good tribal
policy; marriage with a distant tribe was commonly
discouraged. A maiden who evinced a disposition to do
so would be warned in a friendly way in such words as
these: Marry one of your own tribesmen; then, if you
happen to be thrashed by your husband, it will be by one
of your own kindred. Whereas if you marry a stranger
and be thrashed by him, he may exult over you by
submitting you to such indignity: 0, the shame of it!
Put in that way the argument was usually effective.
Owing largely to his knowledge of tribal lore and policy,
190 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
and to his experience, a grandfather had peculiar privi-
leges as to the betrothal of a granddaughter.
A grandfather has disposed of the question
of the immediate — and perhaps not wise — be-
trothal or marriage of a granddaughter by saying:
"Waiho mdaku and e huhuti taaku pu-mauku," or, let
me attend to the plucking of my tender tree-fern, (I will
consider the matter). When a youth or maiden
exhibited a natural desire to associate with one of the
opposite sex, the elders at once arranged to have such
an one married. In this way free intercourse between
the sexes with its kindred vices was guarded against.
Whilst the propagation of the physically or mentally
unfit was rigorously discouraged, that of the fittest was
in every way encouraged. Slaves were mostly enforced
to celibacy and none dared force or assault a female
slave of a chief, for this offence punishment was swift
and certain. Adultery was commonly punishable with
death. A well-born child was baptised with the most
solemn ceremonials ; a child that grew up without being
so baptised was regarded as a common or unhallowed
child.
PLURAL MARRIAGES.
Husbands did not continue intercourse with wives
during the period of gestation, a separate dwelling being
provided for, and occupied by the wife. This was done
on the principle that the child would otherwise become
a mentally deficient weakling. This practise accounts
in part for plurality of marriages, without which the
observance would be inconvenient not to say impossible.
The following incident serves as an illustration: Paora
Tuhaere, a well known and highly respected Maori chief
of the Auckland district, when about to pay an extended
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 191
visit to the Province of "Wellington, was interviewed
by the Ven. Archdeacon Maunsell. Although a Maori
scholar himself, the Archdeacon secured the services of a
capable interpreter, apparently for the purpose of
making his communication more formal and weighty.
The following account of what then took place is verbally
accurate : —
"Say to Paora," began the Archdeacon, "that I hear he
is going far South, and that he will be away for some
time." This was done.
The Archdeacon resumed : "Say to him that he and I
are now old men and that, consequently, we may never
meet here again." This was done.
The Archdeacon continued: "Say to him that I have
something very serious to ask of him, and that I do so
owing to his being a lay-reader and a consistent church-
worker, and because of his influence." This was done.
The Archdeacon went on : " Say to Paora that the bad
custom of having two wives ("moe punarua") is still
going on amongst his people, and that I want him to
give me a solemn assurance that he will in future do
everything in his power to stop it." This was done,
and, after an interval of silence, Paora asked in a piqued
tone of voice:
^Has that European finished speaking?" The Arch-
deacon replied that he had.
"Now, you tell him," said Paora," that I am unable
to give him the assurance that he asks for." This was
done.
Paora continued : ' ' Tell him that, as he himself knows,
it is a custom of the Maori and has been a practice
from time immemorial." This was done.
192 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Paora resumed : ' ' Tell him that far from being a ' bad
practice,' as he says, it was a good practice, a practice
infinitely preferable to that of the Pakeha people."
This was done.
Said Paora: "Tell him that by our custom when the
wife of a Maori becomes pregnant, her husband ceases
to have intercourse with her; that she is carefully put
away until her child is born and baptised." This was
done.
Paora continued: "Tell him that by this custom the
Maori was enabled to grow a race of chiefs, of noble
and handsome men and women, physically and mentally
strong, a race of rangatira and tohunga." This was
done.
Paora had now risen to his full height and his voice
vibrated with the passion and eloquence of racial pride :
"Tell him," thundered Paora, "that whereas the birds
of the air and the beasts of the glades cease to pair when
the female is fertilised and for long intervals, to my
certain knowledge the Pakeha, with his model one-wife
system continues to occupy the same apartments till
within a very few nights of the birth of a child. Such a
practice as that is to the Maori most abhorrent
("rihariha rawa"} and I will not advocate it, come what
may." This was done.
After a short interval of perfect silence the Arch-
deacon, realising that Paora had concluded, turned
away and slowly left. They never met again.
CHAPTER XV.
ON TIME.
Past :—
7 te Po atu, when primeval darkness still prevailed.
I-na-mata ke atu, ages and ages ago.
I-na-tnata noa atu, ages ago.
I-na-mata, an age ago.
/ a Nehe ra and, at the dawn of history.
7 mua ke, long, long ago.
7 mua, formerly.
I te oranga o tooku tupuna, during the lifetime of my
grandfather.
7 te oranga o tooku matua, during the lifetime of my
father.
7 tooku whdnautanga, at my birth.
I a au e ora nei, during my own lifetime.
7 era atu tau, some years ago.
7 enei tau nei, a few years ago.
7 terd atu tau, the year before last.
7 tau houanga, early last year.
7 tenei tau, this year.
7 era atu Marama, some months ago.
7 enei Marama nei, a few months ago.
7 terd Marama atu, the month before last.
7 te Marama kua pahure nei, last month.
7 tenei Marama, this month.
7 enei ra nei, some few days ago.
7 tetahi ra atu, day before yesterday.
I-na-nahi, yesterday.
I-na-po, last night.
/ wdenganui po nei, last midnight.
193
194 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
7 te ata-po nei, ere this day broke.
I te pu-dotanga nei, at this day-dawn.
7 te ata-tu nei, early this morning.
7 te ata nei, this morning.
7 te ata dd-atea nei, towards this noon.
7 te Ed poupou nei, at noon to-day.
7 mua tata ake nei, a short time since.
7 no, kua nei nei, a few moments since.
Present : —
7 nd i a nei, now.
7 na i a nei tonu nei, at this precise moment.
Future : —
A kua nei nei, presently.
A ko ake nei, shortly.
A i a nei, to-day.
A te tu-ahiahitanga, at early eve.
A te ahiahi, at evening.
A te newhatanga o te Ed, when the Sun rests on the
horizon.
A te toremitanga o te Ed, when the Sun sets.
A te ahiahi po, at nightfall.
A te po nei, during this night.
A wdenganui po, at midnight.
A te ata-tu dpopo, early to-morrow morn.
Apdpd, to-morrow.
A tetahi rd, day after to-morrow.
A. enei rd nei, during the next few days.
A tenei Marama, during this month.
A tenei Marama ake, during next month.
A enei Marama, during the next few months.
A tenei tau, during this year.
A ton hoii, at the new year.
A tenei tau ake, during next year.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 195
A tera tau atu, at the year after next.
A enei tau nei, during the next few years.
A mua ake nei, at some future time.
A te wd 5 tooku oranga, during my lifetime.
A mua lie ake, at some distant future.
Ake nei, henceforth.
A-ke, d-ke, d-ke ake, future unending, on until time
fails.
Tera tu-mua, the day before.
Te rd tu-muri, the day after.
SUN, MOON, STARS; PLANETS AND
CONSTELLATIONS.
MAORI LUNAR CALENDAR.
(Night, the Moon, was the time measurer. This lunar
calendar — with slight variations — is recited in New
Zealand, the Chatham Islands, Tahiti, Earotonga,
Hawaiki and Easter Island; thus proving a wide use
and common origin.)
1. 0-Whiro, (hiding away 16. Rdkaunui.
as Whiro, the robber.) 17. Edkau-matohi.
2. Tired, first visibility. 18. Takirau.
3. 0-Hoata. 19. 0-Ike.
4. 0-Uenuku. 20. Korekore.
5. 0-Koro, or, Mdwete. 21. Korekore-turua.
6. Tamatea-kai-ariki. 22. Korekore-piri-ki-Tanga-
1. Tamatea-wdnanga. roa.
8. Tamatea-d-io. 23. Tangaroa mua.
9. Tamatea-ivhakapau. 24. Tangaroa roto.
10. Huna. 25. Tangaroa kiokio.
11. Ariroa. 26. 0-Tdne.
12. Mdu-haru. 27. 0-Rongo.
13. Maurea. 28. Mauri.
14. 0-IJua, Atua, or, Atua- 29. 0-Mutu (lost to sight).
ivhakahdehde. 30. Mutu-ivhenua.
15. 0-Turu, or. 0-Hotu. 31. Takataka putea.
196 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
STARS RULING MONTHS.
The New Year was ushered in by the heliacal rising
of Puangarua, the beautiful star Rigel in the constella-
tion of Orion. It was a time of thanksgiving, feasting,
joy and merriment throughout the Maori area of the
Pacific: "Ka koea te ara 6 Puanga," or, The advent of
Puanga was praised and proclaimed with prayer.
1st June, Puanga, Rigel in Orion. 2nd July, Puanga-
hori, Procyon. 3rd August, Whakaahu, Castor.
4th September, Te Kakau, Regulus. 5th October,
Whitikaupeka, Spica. 6th November, Rerehu, Antares.
7th December, Eaiwaka. 8th January, Urudo. 9th
February, Poututerangi, Altair. 10th March, 0-tama-
rdkau. llth April, Whetu-kaupo. 12th May, Whetu-
kura, (End of year.)
THE MONTHS BY NUMBERS, OR, AGRICUL-
TURIST'S CALENDAR.
June, He tahi, ko Puanga tenei. July, He ruat Tie
mama Takurua. August, He torn, mate whd. September,
Ko te whd tuturu. October, He rima Ko, he rima
Ketuketu. November, He ono tahitahi (weeds).
December, He ma-rua whitu. January, He warn, he
iwa iti. February, He iwa. ("Ko te warn me te iwa,
kp Urudo ki te Po, (bringing dews), ko Matiti kai-wai
ki te ad. Te tomairangi, te hauku, na tend, tangata na
Uruao"). March, Ko te Ngahuru tenei, ko te Kura-tuhi.
April, Ko te Ma-tahi o te tau, ko Ngahuru taitahi, tenei.
May, Ko te Md-ruaroa, ko Ngahuru tairua, tenei; ko
Matariki tdpuapua.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 197
THE SEASONS OF THE YEAR— Nga wd (or, ao)
o te Tau.
Hotoke, Makariri, winter. Mahuru, Koanga, spring.
Raumati, summer. Ngahuru, autumn.
Matiti 'kali-wan,, midsummer Takurua, midwinter.
It is said that Sirius (Rehua) under the name of
Takurua, presides over the midminter days, (he is then
a day star) ; and that under the name of Rehua, he
presides over the midsummer nights, (he is then at the
zenith at nightfall. It is, however, certain that Takurua
is a name commonly applied to midwinter, and Rehua
(as well as Matiti kaiwai) is a name commonly applied
to midsummer. What appears to be certain is that
Rehua is the name for Sirius, and that Te Putahi nui o
Rehua, is the true name for the constellation of Canis
Major.
Tau kai, year of plenty. Tau tuku roa, year of scarcity.
WINDS.
Mata-wJid ki te rangi, or, the four cardinal wind-
points ; literally, the four faces to the sky, also Nga wha
o te rangi.
Tonga, south. Uru, west.
Marangai, east. Pd-whakarua, north-east.
Pdrera, north-west. Pu-tonga-marangai, south-
Tonga-ma-uru, south-west. east.
Pounui, southerly. Tu-d-raki, northerly.
Tu-d-uru, westerly. Tu-d-marangai, easterly.
Hau-whenua, land breeze. Muritai, sea breeze.
Kotiu, or, Tokerau, north.
Pderoa, wind blowing along the shore.
Whakadri, wind which rises at night, blows with great
force, and ceases before morning.
198 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Runga, literally, up, south. Raro. literally, down,
north. The reason for south being up, and north being
down (Maori style), is because the Sun apparently
sinks down to the north (winter), and then gradually
rises up to the south (summer).
"Tdne provided two permanent winds, the north and
the south."
Rd-whiti, sun-crossing; name for the equator.
THE PLANETS.
From the fact that planets are perceivable
before dark and after dawn and when sunlight has
caused the brightest fixed stars to disappear, planets
are known to the Maori as Whetu-do (lit. dawn, or, day-
stars). For the same reason they are also known as
Whetu-mdrama (lit. the clearest, most readily perceived
and distinguished).
Whiro, Mercury (steals off as a thief and hides).
Venus, as morning star, Meremere; as evening star,
Meremere tu ahiahi (ahiahi, eve). These names are
commonly applied in winter. As a morning star Venus
is also known as Tdwera, and as evening star Rere-ahiahi.
These names are commonly applied in summer.
Mars, Mataivhero (Red-face).
Jupiter, Kopu-nui (lit. great-paunch). That descrip-
tive name sufficiently indicates the Maori appreciation
of the apparent size and bulk of Jupiter. But there is
more, for of Jupiter the Maori says: "Ko Kopu-nui te
whetu nui, ma, e whakawheturangi na i d ia; e whaka-
dhua ana i d ia kia rite ki a Tama-nui-te-Rd" : or, That
great white star travelling in the daytime is Kopu-nui;
he would divide the honours with the great ruler of the
day (the Sun). Kopu-nui is classed as a male star.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 199
Saturn, Paredrau (lit. chaplet). Of this planet the
Maori says: l'Ko Parearau te whetu karu-pounamu na.
He pouaru tend no reira i kdkahu ai i toona pare" : or,
That green-eyed star is Parearau. She is a widow; that
is the reason why she wears her (widow's) circlet.
By a study of the present work and from other infor-
mation which is abundantly accessible, the student may
learn that Maori names are in the main essentially
descriptive names. They are descriptive because the
Maori intended them to be informing, and this they are
to a degree. To this rule their names for the different
planets offer no exception, and it can be readily shown
that these names apply to the planets as shown by the
recognised European names. That the Maori has a repu-
tation for extreme keenness of vision is a widely known
and accepted fact. It is recorded that he has easily
distinguished, with the naked eye, two of Jupiter's
satellites. It is therefore a matter for legitimate enquiry
as to how he came to name the planet Saturn the
"Chaplet," or perhaps, the "Circlet-wearer," seeing
that science has revealed the fact that Saturn is sur-
rounded with a ring. In the meantime there is no doubt
whatever that the Maori names for the planets are both
ancient and original. So far as is known Maori know-
ledge of the planets ended, as is shown, with Saturn.
Meteor, known as a Tu-mata-kokiri, and Matamata-
kokiri.
A comet was known scientifically as a Pu-
ihiihi-rere. a Pii-rere-ahuj and au-ahi-roa; (embryonic
fire-current) ; names indicating its cometary character.
A comet is also familiarly known as "Te Manu i te Ra,"
or, the Bird at the Sun. What the European knows as
a "double tail," the Maori preferred to describe as
200 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
wings. Therefore the reference to "the bird," winged
bird. There is reason, to believe that Halley's comet
is known to the Maori under the proper name of Rongo-
mai. That the Maori apprehended some danger from the
close presence of a comet is shown by the caution: "Kei
werohia korua e nga kihi a Te Manu-i-te-Rd," or, Be
careful, lest you two be pierced by the bright points of
the bird at the Sun. Children were taught to call a
comet Upokoroa, or, Long-head.
THE MILKY WAY AND CONSTELLATIONS.
The Milky Way was known to the Maori as "Te Ika-
matua a Tangaroa" or, the Parent fish of Tangaroa;
also as Te ika o te Rangi, the fish of the sky. It is also
known as Te Mangoroa, or, the Long Shark. Tangaroa
is Lord of the deeps of space, familiarly Lord of the
Ocean deeps. But, it is his mythical son, Tinirau, who
is the local deity presiding over the ocean ; he resides on
the mythical sacred isle of Motutapu. It is to Motutapu
that Hinemoana, otherwise Hinauri (sister-wife of Maui)
swims, to join Tinirau. It relates to a solar lunar myth.
The constellation Orion is recognised as Tau-toru.
Its principal star is Puanga, or in full, Puanga-rua
(Rigel). The Maori classes Puanga as the most beautiful
star (or, double-star, Puanga-rua} visible. Tautoru, or
Orion, is described as being a mighty hunter, and he
figures in the Constellation in the capacity of a bird-
snarer, (kai-dhere, or, kai-tdkiri manu). His Pewa, or
bird-snaring apparatus, is easily distinguished. Its
shaft (or, tatd o Tautoru) is the perpendicular row of
stars below, and to the right, of Rigel. The joint (or,
tuke o Tautoru) is the star immediately below Rigel; it
forms the necessary elbow to the before mentioned tatd.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 201
The blossom-cluster (or, pua-tawhiwhi 6 Tautoru) which
the hunter uses to attract the birds to the top of the
Pewa is Puanga itself (Rigel). Puanga-rua is thus said
to be a cluster of beautiful and attractive stars, which
at times display a white, anon a golden, but principally
an azure light; thus constituting a blossom-cluster. Of
Puanga it is said: "Puanga is the Aiiki-st&r of the year.
From the signs shown at its annual re-appearance in the
east, the Tohunga were able to foretell the nature of the
coming spring and summer season. Should its rays flash
southward, it was the sign of a bad season; but, if the
rays were directed northward, it was the sign of a very
good season.
Rigel, in Orion, and Castor, in Gemini (or, Puangarua
and Whakadhu) are described as the pair of twins of
Tai-ngarue (Ngd tokorua a Tai-ngarue) :
"The pair of Tai-ngarue cast up above,
As signs, for man, in the sky."
Of Whakadhu (Castor) it is said: Whakadhu is the
star and Wlwkaahu is the month. The reason is, because
Whakadhu ushers in the Spring, when plants and foods
of all kinds are stimulated to growth (whakadhu), and
man himself is stimulated to cultivate foods.
The Constellation of Canis major is very well known.
Its leading star is Sirius (Rehua). The attendant train
of Sirius (i(Te putahi nui 6 Rehua") is the line of stars
leading southward and culminating in the great star-
triangle. That triangle enframes the mirror, or reflector,
of Sirius, known as Pukawanui, (Pukawa-nui, te
wai whakaata o Rehua). Te Taumata o Rehua,
and Te Huinga o Rehua, are also familiar references.
Of Sirius it is said: Sirius made his appearance
originally as a flaming star from out of the
202 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
dark-hole (coal-sack) in the Milky Way, and he
flew with lightning speed athwart the sky. After a
prolonged interval of flying he settled down where we
now see him, and gradually assumed his present well-
defined form. In midsummer, when Sirius was in the
ascendant at early evening, if thunder-rumblings were
heard, the old-fathers would cry out : Hear the rumbling
of the footfalls of Rehua-: "Get on, Sir, and take some
of us poor mortals with you. ' ' The reason why the old-
fathers said this is, that the season of midsummer is a
most trying time for the aged and physically weak ; and
many then die. Again in the early mornings of mid-
winter Sirius appears above the eastern horizon. This
being coincident with severely cold and stormy weather,
the season is known as TaJcu-rua. The name Te Kdhui-
Takurua (or, the Takurua group) apparently then
applies to Canis major. At this period, too, death was
busy carrying off the aged and the physically weak, and
the cry would be heard : Go, loved one, go, taken by the
Takurua group. For these reasons Rehua, (Sirius) is
apostrophised as Rehua the man-destroyer. Mythologic-
ally, Rehua is said to be the most brilliant of the sons
of Rangi.
Of the constellation Aquila, or, Pou-tu-te-rangi, it is
said: Pm^tu-te-rangi is the house of Taranga, the
parent of Maui by his wife Mahu-ika. Mahuika also bore
the hawk-bird, which is a fire-god. That is the reason
why the feathers of the hawk-bird are ruddy coloured.
Maui east his father's house down to the first heaven.
The constellation of the Southern Cross is known as
Te Putea-iti-d-Reti (Tamarereti) , and also as Te Kahui
Rua-mddhu. This "Maahu" is the star of the South
which : ' ' has left its place in pursuit of a female. When
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 203
it secures the female, it will come back again to its true
home. ' ' The Coal-sack is known as Te Rua 6 Mdahu, or,
the Pdtiki.
The constellation of Argo is known as Te Waka o
Tamarereti, or the canoe of Tamarereti. Its leading
star, Canopus, is known as Au-tahi. Tamarereti is said
to have sailed away to the ice-barriers of the South in
very ancient times. He did not return, and after many
years the ancients professed to recognise his canoe in the
constellation of Argo.
Te Huihui 6 Matariki, or, the group or assembly of
Matariki, is the name universally applied to the Pleiades.
Matariki is apparently the name of the star Capella:
mythology seems to connect the Pleiades with Capella.
Canopus is known as Au-tahi, or Ao-tahi, literally,
the lone one. It is said that it is so called because it
avoids accompanying the stars of the zodiac. It is
regarded by the Maori as being a particularly sacred star.
As already indicated, a constellation is known as a
kdhui-whetu, literally star-group, also Huihui, literally
assemblage.
The equator is known as Te Whitianga Rd, or, Te Ra-
whiti, which literally signifies the Sun-crossing place.
This explains why so many of the equatorial islands are
known by some form of Whiti. For instance :Tahiti,
Tawhiti, Te Whiti, Tonga-whiti, Fiji, apparently a cor-
ruption of Whiti. Ra-whiti is thus quite properly a
name for the East. It is, however, incorrectly inter-
preted to mean Sun-shine, whereas it literally signifies
Sun-crossing; Rd-hana means Sun-shine, also Rd-ura.
Referring specifically to sunshine, sun-glow, or, sun-
heat, the word whiti does not occur. For instance, the
summer-group " Kdhui-matiti," has as its members:
204 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Matiti-kura- Matiti-hana- Matiti-mumura; Matiti-kai-
wai; Matiti-raurehu; Matiti-rau-tapatu; and Matiti-rau-
dngina. These are said to have three homes, doubtless to
correspond to the three months of summer: —
1. "The first house is named Te Ata-uraura. The
home is named Te Ata-i-toea. The Kdhui-Matiti is the
presiding Ariki."
2. "The second house is named Pii-wewera and the
home Pu-mahana. The Kdhui-Matiti is the presiding-
Ariki."
3. The house is named Rangi-tuhia and the home
Rangi-whakaawa. The Kahui-Matiti is the presiding
Ariki."
In this we have a complete Maori statement of the
various aspects of the Sun in all its splendour, and the
term whiti does not occur.
The Kdhui-Takurua presides over the winter months.
Its members are Wero-i-te-ninihi; Wero-i-te-kokoto ; and
Wero-irte-whakataka Pungarehu. Also Tukurua-d-
uru; Takurua-d-ngana, and Takurua-d-io.
(Extract from letter, to "Te Wdnanga" newspaper, of
Aperahama Taonui, dated from Kaipara, 16th August,
1877.)
"Terd tetahi Whetu, ko Matariki. E klia ana kdhore
0 ona kdinga, whakataukltia ana ko "Matariki kdinga-
kore." Heoi kua mdtauria he kdinga and tdona. Ka
rumaki a Matariki i nga Tangaroa o Mei 16, kd tde ki
Maukahau, po-whitu ki reira. Ka hdere ki Tararauatea,
po-whitu ki reira. Ka hdere kd tde ki Papa-whakatangi-
tangi, pd-whitu ki reira. Ka hdere kd tde ki Titore-
Mdahu-tu po-whitu ki reira. Ka whakaputa a Matariki
1 nga Tangaroa 6 Hune 16. Puta pu ake ko te hiku o
Mangoroa; kd puta ano hoki a Whdnui, te whetu o te
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 205
hau-raro. Ko te wehenga tenei o te tau a te Maori, koia
te waiata: —
Kd puta Matariki, kd rere Whdnui,
Ko te tohu o te tau, etc.
Ka pdtata mai te Ao, kd huri te hiku o te Mangoroa,
kd whai ki te torengitanga o te Ed. Ko te mdtenga kd
huri ki te marangai, ki te tatari atu ki te putanga mai
o te Rd. E klia ana e te korero tara: Ko te Mangoroa,
te teina ko te Rd; koia i aroha tonu ai kia rdua."
Translation :
There is a certain star known as Matariki ( ?the
Pleiades). It has been urged that it has no home;
therefore the saying: "Homeless Matariki." However,
it is known that it has a home. When Matariki dis-
appears with the waning moon of the 16th of May, it
then goes on and spends the seventh night at Maukahau.
It then goes on and spends the seventh night at Tararau-
atea. It then goes on and arrives at Papa-Whakatangi-
tangi, where it spends the seventh night. It then goes on
and reaches Tltore Mdahu-tu, where it spends the seventh
night. Matariki then reappears with the waning moon
of the 16th June. It reappears exactly in the tail of
the Milky Way; co-incidentally with the reappearance
of Whanui (the star Vega), the star of the North. This
is the division of the Maori year (that is, of the Old year
from the New year). Therefore the song: —
Matariki reappears, Whanui starts its flight,
Being the sign of the (new) year, etc.
When dawn approaches the tail of Mangoroa (long-
shark, the Milky Way) turns towards the West. The
head (of the Milky Way) then turns towards the East,
to await the rising of the Sun. It is fabled that the Sun
is a younger brother of the Milky Way, therefore their
affection towards each other.
206 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
TE RA. TE RAUMAT1. TE RANG1.
Nd, ka rewa ake a Tdwera.
Ka pu-do te Rd.
Ka ngakde te at a.
Ka do atea.
Ka ata-tu.
Ka whakaputa ake te Rd i te pde.
Ka Moiri ake te Rd i te pde.
Ka totoro hdere ngd hihi o te Rd.
Ka kanapa te Rd.
Ka Plata ngd hihi.
Ka hahana te Rd ki runga ki ngd toropuke.
Ka maiangi Mere ake te Rd.
A ka hahana ki roto ki ngd rdordo.
Kd ura te Rd.
Ka mdrama ake te kikorangi.
Ka ivhakamdrama te Rd i te do.
Ka whakamahana te Rd i te do.
Ka poutumdrotia te Rd.
Ka tikdkd te Rd.
Ka ngatata te whenua.
Ka tit aha atu te Rd ki te pde ki te uru.
Ka tu-ahiahi.
Ka tdiri atu te Rd ki te pde.
Ka newha te Rd ki te pde.
Ka toremi atu te Rd ki tua o te pde.
Ka pouriuri.
Ka whakaputaputa ngd Whetu.
Kua po.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 207
THE SUN (also Day). THE SUMMER. THE SKY
(also Day).
Now floats aloft Tawera (Venus, as morning star).
Then dawns the daylight.
Then breaks the morn.
Then (it becomes) clear light.
Then 'tis early morn.
Then appears the Sun on the horizon.
Then rises the Sun above the horizon.
Then stretches forth the rays of the Sun.
Then gleams brightly the Sun.
Then glisten the beams.
Then shines the Sun on the hill-tops.
Then rises the Sun still higher aloft.
And then shines into the valleys.
Then glows the Sun.
Then the firmament becomes transparent.
Then gives light the Sun to the world.
Then gives warmth the Sun to the world.
Then the Sun attains the meridian.
Then scorches the Sun.
Then cracks the earth.
Now declines away the Sun towards the horizon
of the West.
Then 'tis early evening.
Then droops away the Sun to the horizon.
Then perches the Sun on the horizon.
Then sinks away the Sun beyond the horizon.
Then dusk supervenes.
Then appear the Stars.
Now 'tis night.
208 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
TE PO. TE MARAMA. NGA KAHUI WHETU.
Nd, lea to a Meremere-tu-ahiahi.
Ka kitea ake nga Whetu.
Ka kimokimo nga Whetu.
Ka nekeneke hdere nga Whetu-mdrama.
A Whiro, A Meremere, a Matawliero, a Kopu-nui, a
Parearau.
Ka ngaro ko Mdahu-Tonga.
Ka nohonoho nga kdhui-whetu.
Te Mangoroa, te ika-matua a Tangaroa.
Manaako-tea, Manaako-uri, nga Pdtaritari
hau.
Te Kdhui Rua-Madhu.
Te Rua o Mdahu-Tonga.
Te Rua-pdtiki.
Te Punga o te waka a Tamarereti,
Te waka a Tamarereti.
Te tauihu o te waka a Tamarereti.
Te taurapa o te waka a Tamarereti.
Te Putea-iti a 'Reti.
Autahi, te whetu tapu.
Rehua, te putahi-nui d Rehua.
Tautoru, te tuke a Tautoru.
Te Pua-tawhiwhi o Tautoru.
Pitangarua, Puanga-kori. Whakadhu.
Nga tokorua a Taingarue, ara, a Puangarua,
a Whakadhu.
Matariki, te Huihui o Matariki.
Te Kakau, Whitikaupeka, Rerehu.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 209
THE NIGHT. THE MOON. THE STARrGROUPS.
Now, sinks away Meremere-tu-ahiahi (Venus as evening
star) .
Then are seen aloft the stars.
Then twinkle the stars.
Then move along the planets:
Mercury, Venus, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.
Maahu-Tonga is invisible (the star of the South).
Now the star-groups resume their positions.
The Milky Way, i.e., the Parent-fish of Tangaroa.
The light Magellan cloud, the darker Magellan cloud:
(the wind-sifters.)
The group (adjoining) Maahu's chamber (the Southern
Cross).
The chamber of Maahu-Tonga,
The Flat-fish pit,
(The Coal-sack, or dark pit.)
The anchor of the canoe of Tamarereti.
The canoe of Tamarereti, Argo.
The ornamental stem of the canoe of Tamarereti.
The ornamental stern-post of the canoe of Tamarereti.
The Little (jewel-) casket of (Tamare-) 'Reti, (the
Southern Cross).
Canopus, the sacred star.
Sirius, the great train of Sirius (constellation of Canis
Major) .
Orion, the flower-vase of Tautoru.
The flower-cluster of Tautoru (the beautiful star Rigel).
Rigel, Procyon, Castor (in Gemini).
The Pair of Taingarue, namely, Rigel and Castor.
Capella, the Assembly of Capella (the Pleiades).
The constellation of Leo ; Spica, Antares.
210 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Ruawahia, Pou-tii-te-rangi.
Me. te mano tini 6 nga Whetii,
I tihakanohoia atu e Tdne.
Kia tau ai te matua, a Rangi,
Koia "Te Kahui o te Rangi."
Ka ioaenganui po,
Ko te weheruatanga o te po.
Ea kumekume mai te ata.
Ka ngarongaro ano nga tini whetu,
Ki raro o te uru-pae.
Ka morewa ake te Marama,
Pukoroa ana te Marama,
Kua kohi te Marama.
Ka tata pu-ao te ra.
Ka pu-ao te ra.
Ka ao-atea (carelessly written "Awatea.")
Kua rewa ake te Ra i te tu-a-pae.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 211
Arcturus, Altair (in Aquila).
And the many thousand of the stars,
Planed thither by Tane (Lord of Light),
To adorn the sky-father, i.e., Rangi,
Known as "The groups of the Sky."
Now 'tis mid-night,
'Tis the equal division of the night.
Then draws hitherward the morn.
Then disappear again the many stars,
Beneath the western horizon.
Then soars upward the Moon.
Haloed is the moon,
Waning is the moon.
Then approaches the early dawn of day.
Then dawns the light of day.
Then 'tis clear dawn.
Now soars aloft the Sun from the (eastern) horizon.
CHAPTER XVI.
WHANGA. TATARI. TAIHOA.
These semi-allied terms with different degrees of
force convey the sense of wait awhile and by and by.
Whanga and tatari speak of waiting1 during a reason-
able and fairly well understood length of time, which
time is invariably shorter in the case of whanga and
longer in the case of tatari.
As a verbal noun Whanga speaks of a Haven, a Bay
or a Harbour into which canoes run to temporarily
await the passing of a storm or the subsiding of rough
seas. As a verb whanga speaks of an action which is
proceeding and which, as it were, opens and closes with
a single act ; of something which is near and impending.
Tatari is more elastic than whanga as to time-limit.
It invariably speaks of an interval of time during which
several acts — quite foreign to its particular subject —
may be attended to. But. and this is important, in the
cases of both whanga and • tatari it is understood that
in reasonably due course the particular matter in
question will receive attention.
The term taihoa, or, by and by, speaks of a time so
absolutely indefinite as to allow for a total lapse of
any further attention being given by the speaker to
the subject referred to. In particular then taihoa
speaks of to defer, to procrastinate, to delay.
The following may be accepted as good examples of
native usage and of the lexical meanings of these
terms: —
212
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 213
Whanga. — Hoake ki mua, ka whanga mai an, koutou i a
mdtou: Go along in front, then if necessary
you may wait-a-little- while for us (to overtake
you).
Tatari. — E hoki koe ki te kdinga, ki reira tatari mai ai
i a mdtou: You may go back home and await
us there. (We shall be there in a day or two) .
Taihoa. — Ko taaku Uupu tenei ki a koe, taihoa ; mdaku
e ata whakadro ake to mea: My word to you
is this, bide-the-time ; my careful consideration
will be given to your matter. (Some day.)
TABLOID TRANSLATIONS.
INTEKPKETATIONS OF CERTAIN MAOEI TERMS.
(Meanings shown by the words in heavy type.)
WHANGA.
I wait a little while and then
Am joined by friends I would not miss;
Gregarious, man must mix with men
Or wanting those lacks frendships' bliss.
TATARI.
I wait for one short day or two
Or may be more or may be less;
Time comes and goes as I and you,
But I'll be with you in the stress.
TAIHOA.
I stay my hand, delay the while,
What needs this furious rush and roar —
Whose frantic haste I view? and smile,
I bide the time and breathe: Taihoa.
MAN A.
I speak of potency, the right
To order things as I may deem;
I, nothing wanting, have the might
Which clothes authority supreme.
214 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
TAPU.
By ceremonial usage I
Become a sacred entity;
A thing forbidden, that the eye
Alone may dwell upon and see.
MINAMINA.
I like, enjoy full many things
Towards which my senses me incline;
The cult of taste most surely brings
Such joys as may be deemed divine.
HIAHIA.
My only wish (I do aspire,
Alas that it is vain),
Is that which wells the sweet desire,
To see thee once again.
HO A.
Friend of my youth companion of my days,
Wife, husband, sharer of our mutual ways.
TENA KO KOE.
That being you I greet you, 'tis a treat
To greet those whom we know or chance to meet.
TAUHOU.
I greet you, stranger, welcome to our gates,
Come, share the cheer provided by the fates.
KAI-TOBO.
A visitor approaches here
And him we greet in tones sincere.
MANUWHISI.
Most welcome guest, of all our board and cheer —
Be thou partaker through the rolling year.
TAN GAT A.
Man mostly human is, his part divine —
Oft sunk too deeply in that inner shrine.
KUEI.
Thy acts are vicious and I call thee dog,
A beast who sets even callous souls agog.
MATE.
I speak of illness and (with fcwa),
Of death, which comes alike to rich and poor.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 215
MOHIO.
I speak of knowledge and of one who knows,
Who gains experience as he comes and goes.
KA PAI.
'Tis good I say and know it so to be,
Pai rawa, very good, 'twixt you and me.
KA KINO.
I say, 'tis bad, because it so appears,
And badness is a source of stress of tears.
KIA OEA KOE.
Health unto thee and ever prosperous days,
May life's best treasures be with thee always.
KIA OB A.
py, happy
Of joys and comforts and indeed of wealth.
I speak of life, of happy, happy health,
HOMAI.
Give (unto me), accept my blessings too,
And thanks which show deep gratitude to you.
HOATU.
Give (unto him), he needs it more than I,
I've noted that by many a longing sigh.
AEOHA.
Here dwells a sympathy, a love for thee,
A sorrow, pity, sweetest charity.
TAAKU AEOHA KI A KOE.
My love towards thee is truly great,
In life no thing can this abate.
TU-TANGATA.
Strange man art thou of manners bold,
Of ways and speech by none extolled.
KA PAI KOE.
You are so good, I know not why,
But you are good and so am I.
E NOHO BA.
Bemain in peace, I must away,
A fond farewell to all who stay.
216 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
HAESE BA.
You take your leave, I say: depart,
Farewell then, go in peace, my heart.
EAEEE MAI.
Come here (to me), I want you so,
Need I add that, you surely know.
HAEBE ATU.
Go away, be off, I need thee not,
Nor for thy presence care one jot.
MO AN A.
I call thee ocean and across thy face,
My forefathers canoed their watery pace.
TAI.
The sea which girts New Zealand's isles,
Are fair and sweet as beauty's smiles.
WHENUA.
Land of my sires and my dearest joy,
I love thee better now than when a boy.
ONEONE.
This soil is my inheritance from those
Who held it 'gainst the assaults of mortal foes.
ONEPU.
The sands of life when running low,
Give food for thought: where do we go?
MOEMOEA.
I am a dream a common thing you know,
Yet none may understand me, that I trow.
NAU MAI, NAU MAI.
Approach, come forward, welcome too,
A happy welcome we extend to you.
MOE MAI.
Sleep on fair lady happily dream
And soft as fairy footfalls seem.
TANGI.
Weep on and for thy lost one mourn,
That loved one from thy presence borne.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 217
KATA.
I love to laugh, I would be gay,
Why not? life's but a transient day.
TAAKU IPO.
Thou art my love, all else to me
Is naught, since I can love but thee.
WAI AT A.
A little song I send to thee,
A song and you'll remember me.
EHEIEUEI.
Love-ditties very welcome are,
When rayed by one's bright distant star.
WAIATA-POI.
A Poi-song and dance of grace,
A dream of girlish sinuous pace.
HAKA.
A posture song and dance which gives,
An end to care; man joys and lives.
KOTIEO.
This is a girl of tender years,
With ready smiles and ready tears.
KORINE.
A maiden this maturing fast
Whose maidenhood shall soon be past.
WAHINE.
A woman this, a wife to scan,
Far differing from her fellow, man.
WHAEA.
They call me mother, even so,
It speaks of heartfelt joys and woe.
MATUA.
A parent, father, filled with pride,
To family duty e'er allied.
TAMA.
They call me son, tamaiti, boy,
To some a pest, to others joy.
218 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
TAMAEINE.
A daughter and a timid one,
Who looks with awe on life begun.
THE SUN, MOON AND PLANETS.
BA.
Lord of our day the Sun on high,
The mighty one which rules our sky.
MAE AM A.
The Moon, moonlight, at night supreme,
The lover's joy, the poet's theme.
WHIEO.
Faint Mercury of silver sheen,
Lost in Sun-fires and seldom seen.
MEEEMEEE.
Venus whose bright and quivering rays,
Announce the dawn and eve of days.
MATA-WHEEO.
The planet Mars, red-face, unkind,
A sign of war when Moon-aligned.
KOPU-NUI.
Hail, Jupiter: rotundly -great,
Who walks by day to seek thy mate.
PAEE-ABAU.
Green Saturn, garland-wearer thou,
A widow, as our myths allow.
WHETU.
Distant and beautiful to sight,
Star of the evening, star of light.
KAEAKIA.
A ritual this of reverent awe,
Propitiate to the gods and law.
IN GO A.
'Tis but a name, as chanticleer,
For hatred or for love Sincere.
TAB A.
A mountain peak, as "Tararua, "
And "Taranaki, " to be sure.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 219
TO-TAEA.
A tree of spiny leaves is here,
So tara point and barb and spear.
TATAEAMOA.
Tie bramble this whose prickly shoots,
Are sore to those who pluck its fruits.
TABAMEA.
The fragrant spear-grass this, and hung
A scented-necklet for the young.
TARAKIHI.
A spiny fish, to palate good,
Most excellent of finny food.
KAI.
Kai is to eat, 'tis also food,
For: what is eaten must be chewed.
KAINGA.
Home of our childhood and our tears,
For tender thoughts of passing years.
TAKABO.
We play and gambol in our youth,
Become more staid with age and truth.
KANIKANI.
Dance on in youth with lissom limb,
And supple body's added vim.
KOBE BO.
To speak and, what we needs must, say,
Our thoughts and meanings to convey.
LAKE NAMES.
TAU-PO.
A settled-gloom hangs o'er this lake,
Whene'er our distant view we itake.
EOTO-BUA.
Thin-crater-lake (a wondrous name),
Once subject to volcanic flame.
220 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
EOTO-IT1.
A narrow-lake when brought to view,
And narrow 'tis, I say to you.
EOTO-MA.
White-lake, with shell and limestone strewn,
All white beneath the Sun or Moon.
BOTO-EHU.
They name thee turbid-lake aright,
For thou art turbid to the sight.
BOTO-MAHANA.
Warm-lake, thou too are rightly called,
Whose waters boil and melting scald.
EOTO-A-IBA.
A dotted-lake of isles is here,
Well known to hardy mountaineer.
WAI-KABE.
Expansive-surfaced-water, this,
A lake of beauty, myths and bliss.
BUA-PEHU.
The belching-chamber of this Mount,
Is snow-wrapped to its steaming fount.
TABA-WEBA.
This lake the adjoining mountain names,
Whose heated-peak gave fiery flames.
WAI-WEB A.
Hot-water, neither less nor more,
Discharged at time with belching roar.
HOBO-WHENUA.
Earth-swallower thy subsidence shows,
A subsidence thy shores disclose.
O-MA-PEBE.
Of and for Pere, ejecting force,
When Pere runs her fiery course.
TAKA-PUNA.
Rim-cratered-spring whose awesome deeps,
Eeveal old Vulcan's busy steeps.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 221
EOTO-KAKAHI.
Prolific lake in shell-fish food,
Fresh-water bivalves sweet and good.
WAI-EAEAPA.
This lake its flashing-waters show,
To those who cross its steeps of snow.
BOTO-MAKABIBI.
Cold-lake, and cold it is to me,
Its bathers shivering bodies see.
MANA(WA)-POUEI.
A gloomy-heart, I'd have you know,
A heart distressed by war and woe.
MANOWAI.
Exterminated, we are done,
•Conquered by foes our race is run.
HAWEA.
Thy name is: 'Feared,' I know not why,
(Fearsome of foes in days gone by?)
WAITAKI (Waitangi).
Here sounding-waters dirge and moan,
Though heard afar they weep alone.
WHAKATIPU.
To add-increase, to make-to-grow,
To foster-well this name doth show.
TE ANAU.
The swaying-reeds thy shallows grace,
And lend a name to run thy race.
WAIHOLA (Waihora).
Here outspread-waters find a place,
Not difficult nor hard to trace.
WANAKA (Wananga).
The orator 's-recital, spent
On cosmos and divine descent.
MAEINA-PUA.
Here moonlight-blossoms greet the sight
And brighten up each passing night.
CHAPTER XVII.
0 TE TAMARIKITANGA, KI TE TANGATA-
TANGA, Kl TE KOKOHEKETANGA.
Whanau. Na, Ka whanau te tamaiti.
Tangi. Ka tangi te tamaiti.
Ngote. Ka ngote u te tamaiti.
Moe. Ka moe te tamaiti.
Ara ake. Ka ara ake te tamaiti.
Noho-tu. Ka nohu-tu te tamaiti.
Tupu. Ka tupu te tamaiti.
Ngaoki. Ka ngaoki haere te tamaiti.
Tu aku. Ka tu ake te tamaiti.
Hikoi. Ka hikoi haere te tamaiti.
Haere tu. Ka haere tu te tamaiti.
Oma. Ka oma haere te tamaiti.
Taka.ro. Ka takaro haere te tamaiti.
Kata. Ka kata te tamaiti.
Hamama. Ka hamama te waha o te tama.
Au-e. Ka au-e te tama.
Mamae. Ka mamae te tama.
Takoto. Ka takoto iho te tama.
Whakatika. Ka whakatika ake te tama.
Hiakai Ka hiakai te tama.
Kai. Ka kai te tama.
Hiainu. Ka hiainu te tama.
Inu. Ka inu te tam,a.
Korero. Ka korero te tama.
Kaukau. Ka kaukau te tama.
Whiwhi. Ka whiwhi hoa te tama.
Rahi-hdere. Ka rahi-liaere te tama.
Mahi. Ka mahi te tama.
222
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
223
OF THE CHILDHOOD, TO THE MANHOOD,
TO THE OLD-MANHOOD.
(Verbalised phrases.)
Born. Now is born the little son.
Cries. Then cries the little son.
Suckles. Then suckles breast the little son.
Sleeps. Then sleeps the little son.
"Wakes up. Then wakes up the little son.
Sits erect. Then sits erect the little son.
Grows. Then grows the little son.
Creeps. Then creeps along the little son.
Stands up. Then stands up the little son.
Steps. Then steps along the little son.
Walks. Then walks erect the little son.
Runs. Then runs along the little son.
Plays. Then plays about the little son.
Laughs. Then laughs the little son.
Bawls. Then bawl the vocal organs of the son.
"Wails. Then wails the son.
Suffers pain. Then suffers pain the son.
Lies down. Then lies down the son.
Rises up. Then rises up the son.
Hungers. Then hungers the son.
Eats. Then eats the son.
Thirsts. Then thirsts the son.
Drinks. Then drinks the son.
Talks. Then talks the son.
Bathes. Then bathes the son.
Secures. Then secures friends the son.
Increases. Then increases in stature the son.
Works. Then works the son.
224
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Kaha-hdere. Ea kaha-hdere ake te tama.
Whiwhi. Ka whiwhi mohiotanga te tama.
Pakari-hdere Ka pakari-hdere ona whakaaro.
Ka tai-tangatatia a ia.
Uru. Kd uru a ia ki ngd huihuinga kaumdtua.
Whakarongo. Ka whakarongo a ia ki 6 rdtou akoranga.
Tohungatia. A, ka tohungatia a ia.
Whakauru. Ka whakauru ia ki ngd take korero.
Whakapuaki. Ka whakapuaki i ona whakaaro.
Whakadri. Ka ivhakadri a ia i toona mohiotanga.
Waiata. Ka waiata i taana waiata.
Whakahua. Ka whakahua a ia ki ngd tikanga 6 mua.
Whakamau, Ka whakamau, ka pwi i taana Patu.
plot.
Kua tangatatia a ia.
Wawata-puku. Nd, ka wawata-puku te tangata nei.
Titiro-matatau. Ka titiro-matatau a ia ki te Puhi.
Titoa. Ka titoa e ia taana waiata whai-a-ipo.
Pai-mai. Ka pai-mai taua Puhi nei ki a ia.
Tonoa. Ka tonoa e ia hei wahine mdana.
Whakadetia. Ka whakadetia e ngd whanaunga.
Taumautia. Ka taumautia rdua.
Whakaritea. Ka whakaritea he Hdkari.
Huihui. Ka huihui ngd whanaunga, te iwi hoki.
Whai-korero. Ka wliai-korero rdtou.
Whakamoea. Ka whakamoea taua toko-rua
Whdnau. Ka whdnaii d rdua tamariki.
Pakari. Ka pakari ake ngd tamariki.
Whakamoemoea. A, ka wliakamdemoea atu rdtou.
Whdnau. Ka whdnau d rdua nei mokopuna.
Kaumdtuatia. Ka kaumdtuatia te tangata nei.
Kuiatia. Ka kuiatia hoki taana Makau.
Pd. Kd pa te mate kongenge ki te kaumdtua
nei.
Piko-iho. Ka piko-iho taana tuard.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
225
Increases. Then increases in strength the son.
Acquires. Then acquires knowledge the son.
Matures. Then matures apace his ideas.
Becomes. Then becomes a youth doth he.
Enters. Then enters he the assembly of the elders.
Hearkens. Then hearkens he to their teachings.
Becomes-wise. And then becomes wise doth he.
Enters. Then enters he to the subjects debated.
Declares. Then declares his opinions.
Displays. Then displays he his knowledge.
Sings. Then sings of his song.
Refers. Then refers he to the practices of yore.
Grasps. Then grasps, brandishes his weapon.
He has now become a man.
Amorously- Then amorously-inclines this man.
inclines.
Scans-ardently. Then scans-ardently he the maiden.
Composes. Then composes he his song of love.
Favourably Then inclines favourably the said maiden
inclines. unto him.
Solicits. Then solicits he (her) as a wife for himself.
Agreed-to. Then (it is) agreed to by the relatives.
Betrothed. Then betrothed (are) they two.
Appointed. Then is appointed a (marriage) feast.
Assemble. Then assemble the relatives, the people also.
Make-speeches. Then make they speeches.
Put-to-bed. Then (are) put-to-bed the said couple.
Born. Then (are) born their children.
Mature. Then mature upward the children.
Put-to-bed. And then put-to-bed (wedded) also are
they.
Born. Then born are their grandchildren.
Becomes-aged. Then becomes aged this man.
Becomes. Then becomes aged also his wife.
Touches. Then the infirmity-of-age touches this old
man.
Bends-down. Then bends down his back.
226
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Pin.
Tata.
Huihui.
Marere.
Poroporo-a-ki.
Hemo.
Tangi.
Au-e.
Whakakdka-
huria.
Whakanohoia-
tutia.
Tiaina.
Whakatakotoria.
Whakaturia.
Tukutukua.
Huihui.
Tau-pu.
Vhungatia.
Tataia.
Rangona.
Tangi.
Karakiatia.
Mahia.
Whakanohoia.
Kauhoatia.
Whakatata.
Knrakia.
Whakanohoia.
Nehunga.
Eiro.
Hari atu.
Kd piri a ia ki taana moenga.
A, kd tata taana mate.
Nd, ka huhui mai ona whanaunga, te iwi
katoa.
Ka marere te kaumatua nei.
Ka poroporo-d-ki te kaumatua nei.
Kd Jiemo te koroheke nei.
Kd tangi taana whdnau,
Ka au-e te iwi nui tonu.
Ka whakakdkahuria te tupdpaku nei.
Ka whakanohoia-tutia ake te tupdpaku nei
Ka tiaina ki te hou-manu te upoko.
Ka whakatakotoria atu ngd Mere-pounamu
me ngd Patu-rdkau ki te taha.
Ka whakaturia atu ngd Taiaha, ngd Tdo.
Nd, ka tukutukua ngd Karere.
Ka huihui mai ngd rangatira maha.
Ka tau-pu te aroha ki runga ki a rdtou.
Ka uhungaiia te tupdpaku.
Ka tdtaia ngd korero whakapapa.
Ka rangona ngd tangi-tawhiti.
Ka tangi tonu ngd wdhine.
Ka karakiatia ngd karakia tapu.
Ka mahia te kauamo.
Ka whakanohoia te tupdpaku ki runga.
Ka kauhoatia atu e ngd Tohunga.
Ka whakatata atu rdtou ki te Ana.
Ka karakia hdere te upoko-tohunga.
A, ka uihakanohoia atu te tupdpaku ki te
Ana.
Nd, ko te nehunga tend 6 ioona tinana.
Ko te wairua i a, kua riro ki te Beinga,
Me te hari atu i te Hdmano.
Clings.
Approaches.
Assemble.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Then clings he to his bed.
Then approaches his death.
227
Now then assemble there his relatives, the
people all.
Sinks. Then sinks this old man.
Speaks-farewells Then speaks farewells this old man.
Dies. Then dies this old man.
Mourns. Then mourns his family.
Wails. Then wail the people altogether.
Dressed.
Sat-up.
Set-in.
Deposited about.
Stood about.
Despatched.
Assemble.
Settles-keenly.
Lamented.
Recounted.
Heard.
Weep.
Recited.
Then is dressed this corpse.
Then is sat up this corpse.
Then is set the head with the bird-feathers.
Then are deposited about the Greenstone-
Meres and the wood-weapons to the side.
Then are stood about (it) the staffs, the
spears.
Now then are despatched the news-bearers.
Then assemble there the chiefs many.
Then settles keenly the sadness upon them
Then lamented is the corpse.
Then are recounted the historical genealo-
gies.
Then are heard the ancient epic poems.
Then weep continuously the women.
Then are recited the rituals holy.
Constructed. Then constructed is the litter.
Placed. Then is placed the corpse thereon.
Shouldered. Then it is shouldered away by the adepts.
Approach. Then approach they to the Cave.
Ritualises. Then ritnalises along the head priest.
Placed. And then is placed away the corpse m the
Cave.
Burial Now is the burial that of his body,
Gone. ' But, the spirit it has already gone to the
Reinga,
Conveyed. And has conveyed away the soul.
228 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
RHYMING SLANG, OR, KORERO HUNURU.
A. kind of rhyming slang obtained among certain
sections of the young. This slang was formed by the
intrusion of a consonant, and the increase and repetition
of the vowels. Its practice may be illustrated by taking
an ordinary sentence such as: — Me hdere tatou ki te
kaukau, nel (We shall go to bathe, shall we?), a phrase
which — with the aid of the consonant r — by the process
indicated becomes: Me-re-ere hd ra-ara-ere £<z-ra-ara-to-
ro-oro-wru Jh'-ri-iri £e-re-ere fca-ra-wru &a-ra-wru, ne-
re-ere? Again, with the aid of the consonant w, the
phrase: E pa mai koia, becomes: J£-we pa-wa-wa-wa-
i-wi fco-t-wi-a-wa.
In which examples, as will be noticed, the letters and
syllables in black type are mere verbiage.
By this simple if cumbersome method the speakers
concealed their subjects of discussion from the unin-
itiated. But such forms are speedily acquired. More
technical systems were therefore formulated, amongst
which it is found that a whole sentence is reduced to one
or two words and then treated in the foregoing or some
similar manner: E hdere ana koutou ki heal, is reduced
to "ki hea?", and this is secreted away in the following
verbiage: TJCi-ri-era tiri-era M-ri-era? It is quite
impossible for the uninitiated to understand this form
of slang. The following patter is practised: Hlniri,
hdnara, honoro, henere, hunuru, thence the term:
"Korero hunuru."
Tempting though it be, an enquiry as to the probable
history of this secret gibberish, jargon, or cant, is
beyond the scope of this work. Some declare it to be
an adaptation of Fairy language, others, that it was
used by priests.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 229
MAORI HYMN TO THE CREATOR.
Composed by the Author.
Lord whom our wandering fathers bore
From sea to sea, from shore to shore,
And sacred Mana gave;
When far upon the trackless main
They cried aloud to Thee, nor vain
Thou didst their wearying hearts sustain;
Oh Eangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Be with us Lord, nor set at naught
The precepts our forefathers taught
As our inheritance;
Thy deeds recited oft and sung
In ancient home and mother tongue
Ere seeds of bitterness had sprung:
Oh Eangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Thy many titles Lord are found
Above, beneath, and all around —
Oh Eangi, "Heavenly One,"
Thy name of Rongo, "Prince of Peace,"
Tane, 'who lifts the world with ease,"
Tu, "where dread vengeance sets her crease":
Oh Eangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Lord, Thou hast known us thro' all time;
Of every sea, and land, and clime,
Thou art the pilgrims' hope.
Our infant lives were vowed to Thee
230 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
With sprinkling branch of sacred tree,
"Me tohu e koe ton Iwi" :*
Oh Rangi! Bongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Shrine of the Kura, treasure rare,
The seal of truth in earth and air
Prom Hawaiki's font;
Lord of the city, camp and plain,
Lord of the mighty guard maintain,
Hear us, the flax fast smokes amain.
Oh Rangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Lord of the nations 'twas to Thee
Our fathers earthed the sacred tree,
The ever blessed Toi;
In Thee our tribes were blessed of old,
Thy boundless greatness e'er extolled,
This remnant pitying Lord behold!
Oh Rangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Our twilight burdens, Lord of day,
Pierce with a shaft of brightest ray,
Shine in our aching hearts;
Support us with Thy guiding hand,
Teach us to know, to understand
Thy power and wisdom, wrought and planned!
Oh Rangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Lord teach us still to watch and pray
For that blest time when owned Thy sway
^Preserve Thee Thy people.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 231
In all the toiling earth;
From Hawaiki's old estate,
Oh may Thy wisdom permeate
Throughout our councils small and great :
Oh Rangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Lord take our struggling spirits hence,
And lay not up our soul's offence
For future punishment;
But to Thy mansions in the skies
Oh bear us swift as lightning flies,
To share Thy home in paradise:
Oh Eangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
Lord, when our circle is complete,
Be Thou our centre of retreat,
Its pillar and its base;
Even as our spirits sink to earth,
Oh grant our souls that bright re-birth,
To blend in pureness with thy worth :
Oh Rangi! Rongo! Tane! Tu!
Be with us still, however few.
APPENDIX.
CEITICAL NOTES ON THE
EEV. E. MAUNSELLS' " GEAMMAE OF
THE NEW ZEALAND LANGUAGE"
(FOURTH EDITION, 1894.)
(BY THE AUTHOR)
When one has put his hand to the plough there is no looking
backward.
Not even a sentiment of reverence for the author, resulting
from long acquaintance, can, for one moment, influence the
candid criticism of a work which not only abounds in minor
defects, but is marred by fundamental errors and exhibits in
a very marked degree the most irreconcilable matter.
A number of the examples given by the Archdeacon consist
of careless phrases picked up from indifferent speakers, or
those using in an endeavour to make themselves understood by
the Pakeha a species of "Pidgin" Maori, as the English do
in speaking to the Chinaman of Hongkong. Again, many are
drawn from imperfect translations in the Maori Bible, while
not a few are ordinary English idioms, put into Maori, and
therefore often meaningless, — ' ' Te pelieatanga i meatia at
(page 18), stated to mean. "The manner in which it was
done, ' ' being an example of meaningless Maori.
Throughout this work, the want of a clearly-defined system
of instruction is strikingly observable, and obviously, it must
be a matter of great difficulty to write a regular connected,
and intelligible criticism upon material brought together in such
confusion as has been done in the book referred to.
Referring to the pronunciation and letters of Maori, he
says, Page 1: —
NAME.
A. — a, as in fall, fat.
E. — e, as a in acorn.
Now with regard to the letter a, neither of these sounds is
proper to it.
232
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 233
As to the letter e, the student must especially avoid giving
to it the dipthongal ce sound, so distinctly heard in the a of
acorn.
Mr. Maunsell proceeds to show that a has three sounds,
and he gives a "classified list" of words to illustrate this,
in columns marked 1, 2 and 3, respectively. In the first column
he indicates the uses of the a in "hat" sound, e.g., "Patu —
to strike." There being no such sound in Maori, his examples
are altogether wrong. In the third column he insists that the
a in "wall" should be used, as "whana — to kick," and this
sound being not proper to Maori, his examples are consequently
wrong.
He passes on to e, and assures us that it, "Is pronounced
as a in bate, hate, etc." Further comment is unnecessary.
It is sufficient merely to note that he expresses himself quite
confident as to the "Diphthongal character" of Maori vowels.
There can be no diphthongs in a tongue such as Maori, in
which each vowel demands and receives its full independent
measure of sound.
Passing on to consonantal sounds, he asserts that the letter h
"Is not known on the western coast of New Zealand, to the
southward of Mokau, in the district of Taranaki."
Let us pass along this west coast, from Mokau southward,
and note what are actually the names of principal places,
streams and tribes, en route: —
Mowhakatino, Pukearuhe, Parininihi, Huirangi, Ngatirahiri,
Te Hua, Waiwhakaiho, Te Henui, Huatoki, Ngamahanga, Ahu-
ahu, Haurangi, Hangatahua, Punehu, Ngatimoeahu, Ngatite-
whiti, Waiwheranui, Pungarehu, Parihaka, Waitaha, Okahu,
Ngatihaupoto, Ngatituhekerangi, Ngatikahumate, Pukeko-
whatu, Puniho, Tawhitinui, Otakeho, Mangawhero, Te Inaha,
Te Aroha, Te Hokorima, Mawhitiwhiti, Waihi, Owhangai,
Ketetahi, Hawera, Tawhiti, Tangahoe, Hapotiki, Whareroa,
Manutahi, Taumaha, Whenuakura, Te Ihupuku (at Waitotara),
and so on to Whanganui.
We have throughout indications of the free use, by these
people, of the letter h. Furthermore their land grants disclose
the fact that their tribal and proper names are as well fur-
nished with this letter as are any others over a similar area,
in any part of the Island.
One need only remark, that in the names of the two Tara-
naki chiefs and leaders of Parihaka, names as familiar as
household words for the past thirty years, h, is included:— Te
Whiti and Tohu, or more fully — Te whiti-6-Eongomai, and Tohu-
Kfikahi, in which latter we notice two of these letters. These
chiefs are connected with the Ngamahanga, Ngati-te-whiti, and
Ngatimoeahu and Ngaruahine tribes, and the bulk of their
lands are situated at Parihaka, Fungarehu, Onetahua, Hanga-
tahua, Ahuahu, Hauranga, and Patuha. There is no lack of h's,
234 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
one notices, connected with these representatives of the "West
Coast" and "Taranaki District" people.
Moreover the genealogies and songs of these people abound
with this letter. And finally the following terms can be heard
by anyone in the daily speech of the Taranaki people: Haere,
noho iho, Kei whea? Eei aha? Kei te whare, Hoa, Whenua
Pakeha; while the names of Tohu and Te Whiti are forever on
their lips.
Sufficient examples have now been given to prove that
Mr. Maunsell's statement is incorrect.
Mr. Maunsell falls into error in the use of the letter 7i.
His readers will find the necessary h uniformly omitted from the
words whakatoi, whakatakariri, whenua, whanaunga, whakama,
whakatekaina : (whakamakia evidently being regarded as
the passive form of whakama) whakatokia, whakatongia,
whakauria, whakakdkahuria, whakamakanga, wTiakatekanga,
whakarere, whakarongo, whakarangona, whare, whakamana,
whakamdtau, whakapaia, whakapaingia, whakatangata, and
whakatupu. All of these terms, with the one notable exception,
are words of ordinary use. The exception is Wakamakia, a
term which is not used by the Maori at all.
Eeferring to the letter t, he states (page 8): — "It is not
pronounced like the t in temper, tea, etc." As to the first
in point of fact, t is, in many instances pronounced similarly
to the t of "temper" (as in our definite article te for
instance); while in the case of "tea" it exactly approximates
in sound to that of "Tl" (name of the New Zealand cabbage
tree), and to Ti-ti, (name of the New Zealand mutton bird);
terms, it may be added, of universal use. In some instances,
the Maori tongue being laden with vowels which pive to its
words a soft, musical and rhythmic flow, the subsidiary sharp
hiss, common to the European pronunciation of t is corre-
spondingly softened. In pronouncing t the tongue should not
touch the teeth, as in this, or in that, or in any other way.
Mr. Maunsell's remarks as to sub-dialects are apposite
although somewhat exaggerated; for "One swallow does not
make a summer." Nor does lie state in instancing elided
letters that a marked emphasis usually fills the place of such
elisions.
As to the uses of the definite article, he quite wrongly
states, page 10: — "Sometimes it is employed instead of the
English a: for example, He mea kaha te Hoiho: A horse is a
strong thing." In this sentence, however, the Maori is definite,
and not indefinite — The horse is a strong thing.
Indeed in each example given the refuted article should
appear in the translation, " T.e tini o te Kaipuke": the number
of the ships.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 235
Of the indefinite article he, he also wrongly states (page 12)
that: — "It is used sometimes where no article would be em-
ployed in English, e.g., "A hoatu ana e ratou he moni Tci a ia:
And they gave him money."
This would be read by a Maori to mean, and should be
translated: And they gave some money unto him.
If Mr. Maunsell's interpretation of the sentence be re-
translated into correct Maori, the article will not be found
included: — A hoatu moni ana ratou Tci a ia": And they gave
him money, literally, and they gave money unto him.
Speaking of a as an attendant of the personal pronouns, he
says: — (13) "I runga i a Hone, above John."
The proper expression is "upon John." I runga alee, is
"above." On nouns he says (18): —
"Ko tona moenga tena: That is where he slept."
Correct reading: That is his bed.
' ' Te pumautanga o te whakaaro : the full assurance of
hope. ' '
Correct reading: the fixity of the thought. Neither assur-
ance _nor hope is expressed in the Maori text.
' ' Te whakangarungarunga o te wai : the troubling of the
water. ' '
Correct reading: the wavy-ing (making wavy) of the water.
The verbal ngaru, wave, has nothing to do with "trouble" in
Maori.
"Te peheatanga i meatia ai: the manner in which it was
done."
This alleged Maori phrase is meaningless. Te ahua i mahia
ai correctly expresses his English. Compare the Maori texts.
Again: — "Te patunga poalca: the place where the pigs are
killed. Correct reading: the pig-killing; place, waahi, is not
mentioned, nor is it inferred in the Maori text.
"7 taku oranga: while I live."
Correct reading: while I lived. The 7 here, is distinctly
the sign of the past tense. The Maori phrase is therefore
more suitable as the motto for a tombstone than as the expres-
sion of a living person.
Of nouns, he continues (21): —
"In some trisyllables the first syllable of the plural is
pronounced long: as in matua, tupuna, wShine, tangata.
Note: — Examples of these two latter heads are not of
frequent occurrence."
All this is misleading. In the first syllable it is imperative
to use the long sound in expressing the plural, and it is equally
imperative in expressing the singular to use the short sound,
which sound he does not give. These two rules are absolute.
Of the pronouns he says (28): —
There is no word in Maori to denote the pronoun
Its place is generally supplied by some artifice of the construc-
tion, as will be shown in the Syntax.
236 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Now if we take a plain every-day case, we will find that
this positive assertion is quite opposed to facts: —
First speaker: "Ko to toki tenei? Is this your axe?
Second speaker: Ae, Ico ia tend: Yes, that is it.
So that instead of "some artifice of the construction" being
necessary, we see from this plain and simple instance that
unquestionably the pronoun "it," ia, exists in Maori. One
might give a hundred instances.
With respect to tense, he says (35) : —
"Tense. — Maori abounds in a variety of forms for denoting
modifications of time. They are designated by verbal particles,
adverbs, prepositions, and the articles he and te placed in
connection with the verb. The force of these, again, is, in a
large majority of cases, determined by the context; and we
believe ourselves to be correct in saying that there are, in this
language, but few absolute forms for determining tense. For
example: — I reira e moe ana: There was he sleeping, or there
he slept. ' ' The first false impression that unusual care marks
the translation, seeing that two versions are given, is dispelled
by the fact that the pronoun he which appears in each, is not
justified by the Maori text.
By was and slept, we are evidently to understand, that we
are here presented with a genuine example of the past tense,
which is not the case; for two absolute and distinctive tense
signs, are crowded into the example. It is as though a Maori
teaching his people English, were to say: —
"These English have no idea of expressing time. Here
is an English sentence: There had been, was, is sleeping; and
then the teacher proceeds to translate this into equally aimless,
hopeless Maori.
I now translate his English, "There was he sleeping, or
there he slept," into correct Maori: —
"I moe and a ia lei reira: I moe a ia i reira.
Again: —
Mo te aha Jcoe i riri mai ai Jci a au? Why are you angry
with me?
There is no with in the Maori text, and its correct rendering
ia: — What did you anger unto me for?
Again: — "Ka haere ahau: I will go."
It is sufficient to state that Tea is not a tense sign. He
goes on to instance the tense in compound sentences: — Akuanei,
tae rawa atu, Icua mate: It will come to pass, that, when I have
got there, he will be dead — a remarkably free interpretation,
which discovers two persons "I" and "he" neither of whom
is referred to in the Maori.
Again: —
"Kua mate ahau, e ora ana nga rakau nei: I shall die
before these sticks decay."
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 237
Here the Maori text is outrageously bad, and the inter-
pretation entirely differs from it in sense. Let us have the
literal translations of each, first the Maori: —
Kua mate ahau, e ora ana nga rakau nei: Me now dead,
these sticks are living (sound).
"I shall die before these sticks decay": Ko au e mate
wawe, Tea pirau ai nga rakau nei.
Again (41) : —
"7 reira ahau i te ata nei: I (was) there this morning."
In this case it is difficult to understand why the past tense,
i, is only assumed — (was), its sign i being so clearly in its
proper place.
Again: — "Ka liaere a Ihu: "Jesus went."
As already stated, Tea is not a tense sign at all; neither
can it of its own force, indicate tense.
Again: — He tini aku korerotanga ki a ia: Many (have been)
my conversations with him.
Correct reading: My speakings (nga) unto him have been
many. There is no with in the text, and the substantive
speakings, refers to the past; this is only, however, assumed
by Mr. Maunsell ("have been").
Again: — Ka haere' ahau: "I will go."
Here ka is wrongly supposed to indicate future tense.
Speaking of verbs, he says, (52) : —
"Indeed (as we have already observed), our impression
is that, the more we examine, the more we shall be led to
think that a genuine verb is by no means a common thing in
Maori, and that substantives, adjectives and other classes
are the fountains to which most of the verbs of the language
may be traced (see also his paragraph, page 34)."
In brief, what he wishes us to understand is: —
1. That a genuine Maori verb is rarely found.
2. That Maori verbs are mostly derived from substantives,
etc. Now, scholars will readily admit, that there exists in
Maori a wealth of substantives. A careful examination of
these will show, that fhe large majority of them are apparently
directly derived from verbs, in the following manner: —
Verb. Passive. Substantive.
Takeke, to mesh a net Takekea Takekenga (meshing)
Kupe, to inclose Kupea Kupenga (fish net)
Hi, to hook up fish Hiia Hlnga (fishing place)
Tango, to take Tangohia Tangohanga (taking)
Tono, to send, demand Tonoa Tononga (sending)
Hoe, to paddle Hoea Hoenga (paddling)
Tiri to plant Tiria Tiringa (plantation)
Totoa, to excel Toloatia Totoanga (excelling)
Titiro, to look Tirohia Tirohanga (looking)
Kite, to see Kitea Kitenga (seeing)
238 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Verb. Passive. Substantive.
Korero, to speak Korerotia Korerotanga (speaking)
ATco, to teach Akongia Akongo (student)
Mohio, to know Mohiotia Mohiotanga (knowledge)
Matau, to learn Matauria Matauranga (-ing)
Moe, to sleep Moea Moenga (bed)
Tanu, to bury Tanumia Tanumanga (burial)
And so on with a number of genuine verbs, numbering
thousands, from which we form our substantives, by the fore-
going natural process, from the simple to the complex.
Mr. Maunsell would teach us that we have few genuine
Maori verbs, and for this few we are entirely indebted to sub-
stantives, and other things; whereas the very reverse is the
fact.
Indeed, the most common nouns, are traceable to verbs.
Take, for instance, the various names for a slave:- —
Pononga, to be entirely subject to the will of another.
Herehere, bound, held in bondage.
Ware, to adhere, adherent.
MoTcai, for (to) eat.
Taurekareka, to embody satisfaction, a pleasant tie, captive.
Tutu-a, to attend commands.
All of these terms, or verbal expressions, from which the
noun, slave, is derived, demonstrate the inaccuracy of Mr.
Maunsell's statement of the principles relating to verbs and
substantives.
Of the prepositions he says (54) : —
E, by (applied to the Agent, not to the instrument) is
always fixed to the agent when a passive verb precedes; e.g ,
(1) Kua kainga e te kuri: was devoured by the dog. Now Kua
is the sign of the perfect tense, not that of the past "was":
moreover kainga is a substantive, not a "passive" verb,
neither does it mean "devoured."
E is the auxiliary verb "do" prefixed to nouns, pronouns,
proper names, and substantives, when the leading verb is
either active or passive, to indicate the "doer" of an action.
Correct reading: —
The dog has now eaten (it).
(2) Kua kitea e Hone: was seen by John.
Kua perfect tense, is again made to do duty for the past
"was." Kitea means "found, discovered, traced, detected,
solved"; not "seen."
For instance: — Kua kitea e Foil te waka: Pou has now
found the (missing) canoe.
Kua kitea e Tai te tikanga o te maka: Tai has now solved
the scheme of the puzzle.
Correct reading: "Kua kitea e Hone." John has now
found (something). Unfortunately this, as many other
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 239
examples is such broken Maori, that we can only speculate as
to whether John found; he may have traced, detected, or
solved anything.
Again: — Kua patua te ngaru e te ua: The waves were
beaten down by the rain.
Here for the third time (page 35), the perfect kua is used
for the past or imperfect "were."
E as usual points to the doer.
Correct reading: — Eain has now beaten (tranquilised) the
waves.
Again: —
" Kangia e te ahi: kindled upon by the fire." Here kangia
is the passive form of lea, scorch. See his next example: —
' ' Ngaunga e te ra: scorching by the sun. ' ' Ngaunga is the
substantive of ngau, bite; it has nothing whatever to do with
"scorching," for which see previous example. E indicates
the "doer."
Again: —
"E Tcore e ahei te hapai e ahau: The lifting cannot be
accomplished by me, i.e., "I cannot lift it."
Here ahei is made to do the work of a totally different
term, that is, taea, the important difference in sense being that
the speaker tells us that: —
"It will not do for me to lift (it); or, 7 must not lift (it).
Mr. Maunsell's translation would lead us to understand that
the speaker declares, that he is, owing to its weight or bulk,
"unable to lift it."
Passing on to i, he says: —
With:
Ki a haere atu ahau i a koe: Shall I go with you!
Correct reading: —
Am I to depart at thy instance? "I" does not mean
"with."
Again: —
Ka riro mai i a au: will depart with me.
Of this translation, three, of the four words, are quite foreign
to the context: —
"Will" indicates a tense, which does not exist.
"Depart" is diametrically opposed to mai, of the text.
Compare: — Ka riro mai i a au te waka: Then I obtain and
bring hitherward the canoe.
Again: —
3 From: I hea koe? From whence do you (come) I
Correct reading:— Where were you! "From," is neither
expressed nor implied.
Again: —
4. To: I a au tenei kainga: This is my larm (or
possession).
240 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Here i, the sign of the past tense, by Mr. Maunsell is
entirely ignored. The correct reading is: — I had this home
(formerly).
Again: —
Kahore he maripi i a an: There is no knife with me.
Correct readings: — I have not had a knife. I did not have
a knife.
(Note: — The "To" of these subjects, can neither be dis-
covered in the original, nor in the writer's translations.)
Continuing he says: —
Under this head (i.e., i) may be classed some instances
that cannot well be reduced to any of the above rules: —
E hara Icoe i te rangatira nolcu: You are not my master.
Correct reading: — You are not it, the master of me. In
such cases i largely assumes the office of ia, the pronoun of the
neuter gender. Can anything be more simple or to the point
than this?
Again lei, with (denotes the instrument), e.g.: —
Patua ki te raTcau: beaten with a stick.
Here 'beaten" assumes a tense, which does not exist in the
text, moreover te is the definite article the, not the indefinite
"a."
Let us translate the translation back, into its true
equivalents: I patua me he raTcau; and now give the exact
meanings in English: Beaten as if it were a stick.
Let us now put his English into a line with the original
text, thus: Beat with the stick; put this into exact Maori:
Patua me te rakau, and present the exact Maori meaning and
sense of this in English thus: Beat, together with the stick.
Tried by these simple rules, which include the assistance
of me, our direct form of with, we find the whole thing to be
radically wrong.
Correct reading: — Patua "ki te rakau: beat to against the
stick; to the stick, beat.
The Maori does not use the expression "beat with a stick."
As we have just seen, when the Maori equivalents of these
terms are joined in a sentence, and re-translated, they convey
an entirely different meaning from that. The reason for this
is that ki, "to," preserves its true character of ' ' towards, ' '
and "against," which is quite in accordance with the require-
ments of Maori idiom.
Thus the sentence — I akina ki te kuri — te kowhatu: (The
stone was cast to (against) the dog), has the same meaning
as I akina ki te kowhatu te kuri.
The word with, finds a place in such sentences, only as a
translator's expedient. Translators' expedients, however, are
not calculated to properly define first principles of grammar.
What the student requires are meanings based upon the root-
ideas of words, so far as ascertainable.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 241
Continuing the discussion of "with" he says: —
E kore e ora ki tena: will not be satisfied with that
quantity (of food).
Correct reading: — That is not sufficient to satisfy (hunger.)
Again: — •
E korc e oti ki tena: will not be completed with that.
Correct reading:— That (quantity of material is not suffi-
cient to complete (the work in hand.)
He goes on : —
"It should, however, be noticed that lei is sometimes found
in other uses of the word with, in which no instrumentality is
designed, e.g.,
"Takti matting a ki a koe: my working with you, i.e., my
work in your service. ' '
Correct reading: — My working unto you.
Again: —
E riri ana ki a koe: is angry with you.
Correct reading: — is angering unto you.
He continues: —
This last example, however, might perhaps be most cor-
rectly translated at, as in the following: —
E titiro mai ana ki a koe: is looking at you.
Correct reading: (He) is looking hitherward, unto you.
Having given further erroneous examples, he concludes by
presenting "a few" which he declares to be "difficult to
reduce to rule." The first example will serve to illustrate
all:—
11 E noho ana koe ki te kai man? Are you staying from food?
Correct reading: Are you abstaining, to the food for
yourself. ' '
By the proper use of "to," "unto," and "in reference to"
the student will readily gather the meanings of the phrases
containing the alleged difficulties.
Again: —
Ko, at.
Ko reira noho ai: at that place stop.
As this sentence stands, ko means "is to" not "at." The
phrase, however is sadly imperfect; it requires the inclusion
of one, or more persons, to complete the sense: e.g.
Ko rcira a ia noho ai: He is to stay there.
Again: —
"Ko reira korero ai: Then speak."
Corrected: — Ko reira ratou korero ai: They are to speak
there.
Compare his version with— Ka korero: then speak.
Ka korero ai koe: You may then speak; or the imperiously
defiant, Tt'na korero: Now then! speak!
Having thus erred with ko, our verb substantive, he proceeds
thus (101):—
242 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
"The student lias already seen that Maori is defective in
particles of illation, comparison, and copulation. The want of
a verb substantive, which is so useful as a copula in other
languages, will often, where accuracy is desired, cause both
clumsiness and obscurity of construction. ' '
Xo statement could be more misleading than this, "Here we
have in Maori an abundance of particles, which serve to clearly
define all shades of thought, and also to illustrate the similarity
or difference existing, to the most minute detail, in observed
phenomena; and a verb substantive par excellence."
He says (23): —
Xote: — Comparison in Maori, is formed by periphrasis, for
which vide Syntax.
Premising, for the benefit of the uninitiated, that peri-
phrasis is to go roundabout in expressing an idea, we will
consult this "Syntax, " remarking as we pass along that the
following forms of comparison are absolute: —
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
Pai, good Pai ake, better Tino pai, best
Mua, fore Mua atu, former To mua, foremost
Iti, little Iti iho, less Tino iti, least
(See alee, upward, and iho, downward.)
We now reach the "Syntax'' (page 119), and note the
leading explanatory clauses, and examples hereon, seriatim: —
The comparative degree is denoted in various ways in
Maori: —
(a) The first, and most common, is similar to that adopted
in the Hebrew, viz.: — by putting the preposition i (from) after
the adjective, e.g., e Jcaha ana a Hone i a Pita: John is stronger
than Peter.
Remarks: — The "Preposition" i (from) as has been demon-
strated, is, instead of "from," the sign of the imperfect past
tense, signifying were, had, did. The foregoing hybrid example
is noticeably encumbered with e. .ana, the twin signs of present
progressive action. When this tense rules the sentence, as in
the present case, the verb which they embrace, if correctly
translated, will in every reasonable instance include the
terminal-Mi#. The form of the text is inadmissible, but, such
as it is, it reads that "John is strongwu/ than Peter."
(&) Sometimes there is joined to the adjective some adverb
of intensity, e.g., e kaha rawa ana a Hone i a Pita: John is
much stronger, etc.
Bead: — John is very stronging than Peter.
(c) Sometimes it is denoted by the adjectives ngari and
Rangi, the verb following in epanorthosis: e.g., e ngari a Hone
i a Pita, e kaha ana (Untranslated).
Of these bad examples, the last is probably the worst.
What Mr. Maunsell intended to show, is presumably that,
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 243
"John is stronger than Peter." In order to express this cor-
rectly we say: Kalia alee a Hone i a Pita. If John is ever so
much stronger we should say: Kalia Ice a Hone i a Pita.
(d) Sometimes, the comparative is denoted by some
approbatory, and the positive by some disapprobatory term,
e.g., e pai ana tenei paraikete, e kino ana tera: This blanket
is good, that is bad.
In this fresh subject, we again notice, e-ana, in the leading
position; and that the final tera "the other," is translated
"that." (Note page 88 where ena is translated "the other.")
Compare with: — He paraikete pai tenei, he mea kino tend:
This is a good blanket, that is a bad one.
As Mr. MaunselJ's remaining examples are largely scriptural
translations, which, it will be readily granted, is rather an
uncommon mode of presenting genuine Maori examples either of
comparison, or of anything else, we may now turn to his
teachings upon: —
The superlative degree. Maori has no direct form to mark
the superlative, but expresses it by various circumlocutions-
(a) by the definite article prefixed, with or without some word
of intensity; e.g., Ko au te kaumatua: I am the eldest son.
Remarks: — The context does not admit of a "son" of any
kind. If the article te, is compelled to carry, as Tie represents,
the whole burden of the sentence, it will resolve into the
negative te, and reverse the meaning, whatever that may be,
of the example. For instance, the text with the ordinary form
of article reads: I am the old man If te be given the
importance and the necessary accent which Mr. Maunsell sug-
gests, the meaning would be: As for me, it is impossible for
me to become an old man.
Compare, however, with the proper forms: —
Ko au te taina matamua: I am the first-born son.
Ko au to matou tuakana: I am our family's senior (by
birth).
Ko au te tama kaumatua: I am the eldest son.
In excluding the son from his example, Mr. Maunsell
deprives the thing of its whole force; a force which he un-
wittingly imagined could be secured by relegating foreign work
to the unassuming definite article te.
Again: —
"Ko te tino noliinolii rawa tend: That is the least."
Correct reading: — Verily that will be too small.
Again: —
"Ko te nui tenei o nga rakau katoa: This is the largest
(lit. the large one) of all the trees."
As already explained, the definite article will not bear
such undue pressure, without adopting the negative.
Correct reading: — This is the uniform size of all the trees.
Neither comparison, nor degree, is expressed or implied.
244 MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR
Let us turn to Mr. Maunsell's remarks toiiching "the want
of a verb substantive. ' '
Mehemea ko Poroa: If it be Poroa. Ko ia: It is (he).
Ko wai hei haere? Who is to go?
Ko au: I am.
Ko wai Tie lioa mfiou: "Who is to be a companion for you?
Ko Icoe, Ko ia cm i liaere mai ai: You are, that is why I came
along.
Nd wai tend i whakarite: Who arranged that? etc., etc.
Ko wai tend: Who is that?
Ko au: It is I.
Ko Icoe, d ko wai koe: It is you, and who are you'?
Ko au rd, ko rangi: I am rangi, to be sure.
Ko wai rawa rd ia! Who ever can it be! (sotto voce).
Ko rangi aha Icoe: What rangi are you?
Ko rangikura au tama a Te Rangihdeata: I am Rangikura,
son of Te Rangihaeata.
E tama! e tama! he alia koe te ki waive mai ai: O Son! O
son! why did you not say so before, etc., etc.
(Compare, ko wai tenei? with Nd wai tenei?).
The language abounds with these and similar forms of
usage of the verb substantive. Furthermore fco is "To speak,"
which is synonymous with "To "be."
Each example ought, in a technical work, to contain in itself
whatever is necessary to make it intelligible, but Mr. Maimsell
constantly leaves the reader to draw whatever conclusions he
may please.
He does not seem to be aware that there must of necessity
be a limit to the various meanings of a word. For instance, in
at least four different places he uses the expression: — "He kino
te tutu: Disobedience is sinful." Now the radical meanings of
kino are: bad, objectionable; those of tutu: mischievousness,
meddlesomeness. These meanings they convey to the Maori, in
the above quoted sentence, and not the meanings which Mr.
Maunsell gives to them.
Te rongo, is disobedience, its literal meaning being, (one)
who will not hearken to instruction.
Turi: also, is disobedience, and obstinacy. It means literally,
(one) who turns a deaf ear to instructions.
He is "wrong"; it also implies "vice." (See To-Jie: "to
persist" in wrong-doing).
Hara is "crime, guilt."
And so on to finer distinctions, for the Maori had both a
moral and a physical world.
Not to defraud Mr. Maunsell of due praise, it must be allowed
that his observations on the Numerals (part 1.) are in the main
just.
MAORI-ENGLISH TUTOR 245
To those who know me I need offer no explanation for
these critical notes; to those who do not I will at once own
that I am quite aware, that criticism which apparently con-
curs with interest, is likely to be suspected, and liable to
misconception. But I am solely concerned with the sweeping
away of error, and I trust that these notes will be found,
upon reference to the Grammar, to be fully justified.
My reason too is fully convinced of their truth and useful-
ness as a guide to those who wish to be accurate regarding
THE MAOEI TONGUE.
Could we but use thee, as thou canst appear,
In all thy parts so excellently clear;
Tuned to her tender accents, sadness tell,
And stir the scornful note to passion's swell:
To rhythmic measure happiest songs unite,
And climb — nor fear to fall — to rapturous heights.
In aphorism apt, and brightly terse,
Strong and harmonious in resounding verse.
Let no one charge me with having crushed moths with a
club, neither complacently assert that some of the matters
treated of are mere trifles. It is by painstaking and judicious
attention to trifles that perfection is slowly attained, and
perfection is admittedly no trifle.
INDEX.
A., sounds of, 1; table, 1; and, 1;
future tense, 194 ; in antonyms,
67; and pronouns, 36; in verbs,
83 ; personal article, 76 ; prefix
to proper names, 1.
A and o ; a general, o exclusive,
38; active and passive, 39.
Accents, 4.
Active verbs, 83 to 104.
Actions, repetition of, 76.
Active voice, 58.
Adjectives, 48 ; follow nouns, 75 ;
must agree with verbs, 81.
Adverbs, 48.
Adoption, 173.
Adultery, 190.
Adzes, 150.
Ae, yes, 3 ; sounds of, 6.
Agricultural calendar, 196.
Ahei, 8.
Ai, verb auxiliary, may, possible
to be, 8.
Ailments, 141.
Albino, 35.
Alliance, 115.
Alphabetical tables, 1 to 5.
Amorous, 225.
Amphibian, 109.
Angel, 156.
Ant and locust, 135.
Ann, also, 13.
Antonyms, 67.
Aotea, 106.
Aouri, 106.
Aphorisms, 126.
Appendix, 232.
Arcturus, 211.
Arero, tongue, 20.
Argo, 203.
Ariki, 147, 175.
Aroha, 215.
Articles, 31, 76; to personal
names, 119; precede each sub-
stantive, 76.
Aspirated h, 2.
Author. 156, 165, 229, 232.
Axes, 150.
Battleaxe, 150.
Bay, 212.
Beneath, 15.
Beauty, 138.
Bird at the Sun, comet, 199.
Birds, 116.
Black, 107.
Blue, 108.
Bone system, 140.
Born, 223.
Boy, 217.
Brown, 108.
Burial, 227.
Calendar, lunar, 195.
Cancer, 169.
Canis Major, 197, 201.
Canopus, 203.
Capella, 203.
Capricorn, 169.
Causation effected by prefix, 7, 76.
Certainty, 49.
Chants, 158.
Chaplet, 199.
Charity, 215.
Chatham Islanders, 114.
Childhood, manhood, to old age,
223
Children, 188.
Coal-sack, 203.
College, 153.
Colour, 105.
Come, 17.
Comet, 199.
Comparatives, 19.
Compounds, wh, ng, 1.
Connections by marriage, 187.
Consonants, 1 to 5.
Constellations, 200.
Conquest, 172.
Construction of sentences, 61.
Continuity of action, 76.
Contrariety, 10.
Critical notes, 232.
Cross, Southern, 202, 209.
Crossing Sun, 203.
Custom, 191 ; marriage customs,
182.
Dance, 219.
Day, 207.
Daystar, 198.
Dead, first fruits of, 166.
Death chant, 158.
Demonstrative pronouns, 45.
Diagram, xii.
Dialects, v.
Didactic lament, 165.
Differences, 10.
Digraphs, 6.
"Dinornis," Moa bird, 113. 116,
170.
Diphthongs, 6.
Directive particles, 17.
Diseases, 141.
Disposal by marriage, 189.
246
INDEX
247
Distributive pronouns, 46.
Ditties, 159.
Divinity of man, 153.
Down, North, 17, 198.
Dress, 149, 227.
Drill, 143.
Dual forms, 52, 59.
Dual tense, 57.
Dye, 108.
Dying chief, 184, 227.
E, 2 ; functions of, 11 ; sign of
future tense, 2, 51; sign of
vocative, 1, 11; numeral prefix,
2 ; sometimes indicates the
passive, 81 ; in verbs, 67, 83.
Enumeration, 22.
Epic Poem, 165.
Equator, 203.
Equatorial counter- currents, 171.
Extremes, 67.
Fable, 135.
Faded, 109.
Female, 33, 118.
Fish, 110.
Fixity of land tenure, 174.
Flax garments, 149.
Flute music, 167.
Forms of relative pronouns, 43.
Future possessive, 41.
Future tense, 51, 56.
Gender, 33.
Go, 17.
Grammar, 75.
"Grammar of the New Zealand
language," 232.
Green, 108.
Grey, 107.
Groups of stars, 209.
Groves, 116.
Growth, spring, 201.
H, always aspirated, 2.
Ha, 69, 85.
Haere, a verb of motion, 17.
Hawaiki, 169, 171.
He, indefinite article, 31.
Hereditary land tenure, 181.
Hoki, 13.
Hoko, 26.
Home, 219.
Houses, 151.
Hues, 105.
Human body, 138.
Hymn, 229.
7, 3; sign of past tense, 1, 193; in
verbs, 67, 84.
I was, I had been, I have been,
I have become, 77.
la, it, 36, 46.
Imperative mood, 59.
Incorrect forms corrected, 41.
Indefinite pronouns, 47.
Indicative mood, 52.
Tndigo, 108.
Insects, 109.
Interpretations, 213.
Jupiter, 198, 209, 218.
Jussive tense, 60.
Ka, 65, 69, 87 ; a numeral prefix,
1 ; not a tense sign, 64.
Kahore, misuse of, 66.
Kai, indicates the agent, 12.
Eano, colour, 106.
Ke, difference, 10.
Ki, to, 42.
Kia, 7 ; a numeral prefix, 3.
Kinship, 187.
Ko, verb substantive, 20, 43, 49.
Koa, 14.
Korero, to speak, 20.
Koropatu, 146.
Kura, 153.
Lake-names, 219.
Lament, 165.
Land and women, 172.
Land rights, 172.
Land tenure, 182.
Letter sounds, 1 to 5 ; none
silent, 2.
List of verbs, 83.
Locust and ant, 135.
Long sounds of vowels, 1 to 5.
Love, 114, 159, 217, 225.
Love ditties, 159.
Ma, 71, 89; for, 1.
Male, 33, 118.
Man, 33.
Mnna, 213.
Mangu, black, 107.
Mantles, 149.
Manu, birds, 116.
Marriage connections, 187.
Marriage customs, 172.
Marriages plural, 190.
Mars, 198, 218.
Matariki, 203.
Me, must, 11.
Measurements, 30.
Mercury, 198.
Meteor, 199.
Milky Way, 200.
Misuse of the word kahore, 66.
Mode of comparison, 19.
Modes of salutation, 37.
Months, 196.
Moon, 133, 195, 218.
Moral, 136.
,Va, 72, 93; belonging to, 1.
Na and no, 38.
Names, corrected, 125 ; of lakes,
219; of places, 120; proper,
118; of songs, etc., 158.
248
INDEX
Negatives, 59, 65.
Kga, the plural article, 31.
Ngahuru, tenth, 24.
Night, 209.
Noun and gender, 33.
Noun and substantive, 75.
Numbers, 1 to 5, 22.
Numbers of personal pronouns,
iii., 36, 76.
O. 4, 68, 84; of, 1.
O and a, differences, 38.
Ordinals, 5.
Orange, 105.
Pa, 72, 93.
Para, colour, 105.
Parents, 188.
Particles, 14, 17.
Parts of human body, 138.
Past perfect tense, 55.
Pastime, 143.
Past possessive, 39.
Past tense, 53.
Perfect tense, 51, 55.
Perfume, 114.
Philosophical lament, 165.
Phrases, selected, 132.
Pity, 215.
Place names, 120, 219.
Planets, 198, 218.
Pleiades, 203, 205.
Plural marriages, 190.
Poem, 165.
Possessive pronouns, 37.
Prefixes, verbal, 81.
Present possessive, 40.
Present tense, 51.
Prepositions and particles, 14.
Pronouns, 36.
Pronunciation, 5.
Proper names, 118.
Proverbs, 126.
P«, 9.
Purple, 108.
Ra, 72, 96 ; the Sun, 1 ; yonder, 48.
Rakau, trees, 111.
Rawa, very, 10.
Red, 107.
Regular, use of tense signs, 61.
Reptiles, 109.
Rupe, 166.
Ruriruri, love-ditties, 159.
Slang, 228.
Song names, 158.
South, up, 17, 198.
Southern Cross, 202, 209.
Speech, 20.
Sport, 143.
Stains, 105. .
Star-groups, 200 to 211.
Stars ruling months, 196.
Subjunctives, 64.
Substantives, 75.
Summer, 207.
Sun, 1, 72, 207.
Sun-crossing, 203.
Ta, 72, 97; to print, 1.
Tables, A, E, I, O, and U, 1 to 5 ;
of personal pronouns, 36; of pos-
sessive pronouns, 37.
Tabloid translations, 213.
Tawhaki, 166.
Tajm, 144.
Te, definite article, the, 31.
Tekau, ten, 24.
Tenses, 51.
Tenure, 181.
Terminals, verbal, 78, 83.
Time, 193.
lino, superlative, 10.
Tints, 105.
Tohunga. 137.
Toko, 25.
Tnnu, precision, 9.
Topu, to double, 28.
Trees, 111.
Tu, strange, 12.
Tua, ordinal prefix, 5.
Turaukawa, Poem, 161.
Tutelary deities, 113.
U, table, 5 ; in antonyms, 68 ; in
verbs, 84.
Up, SoutH, 17, 198.
Venus, 198, 218.
Verbalized phrases, 223.
Verbal nouns, 83.
Verbs, list of, 83 ; mood and
tense, 51; passive, 60, 75; sub-
stantive, ko, 20, 43, 49;
auxiliary, Ai, 8; position of, 61,
75.
Voice and speech, 20.
Vowels, 1 to 5.
I TFo. 74. 102 : time, space. 1.
Salutations, 37.
War weapons, 150.
Saturn, 198, 218.
Whaka. a causative prefix, 7.
Scents, 114.
Sea birds, 117.
Whakaharahurtt, exceedingly, 10.
Whanga, a bav, haven. 212.
Seasons, 197.
White, 107.
Selected phrases, 132. .
Widows, 184.
Senses, 19.
Winds, 197.
Shades, 105.
Woven flax, 149.
Short sounds of vowels, 1 to 5.
Sirius. 201.
Yellow, 108.
Sky, 207.
Youth. 34.
Printed, by Whitoamb* and Tomb* Limited. G-23306
UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACIL
A 000138123 5
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11